JP6649659B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by projecting an image on a screen (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to represent images at the same level as that of the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged as compared with the liquid crystal display device or the like. In addition, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by the liquid crystal display device.

JP 2012-147828 A

  In a gaming machine that performs effects using such a screen, it is important that the screen is arranged at an appropriate position. In other words, if the screen is not placed at an appropriate position, there will be a gap between the image projected by the projection device such as a projector and the display surface of the screen. It becomes something.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to enhance the precision of an effect in a gaming machine that effects using a screen.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) a projector capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector mechanism B2);
A screen (for example, a front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface (for example, a projection surface E11a) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector,
A main body (for example, cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (for example, an upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (for example, an upper display window UD1) in which the screen can be viewed;
The screen (for example, front screen mechanism E1) includes a first member (for example, front screen member E11) having the display surface, and a second member (for example, front screen support) adhered to the first member. Table E12), and
The second member (for example, the front screen support E12) is formed with a hole (for example, a through hole E130) that penetrates from the side adhered to the first member to the other side.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the invention of (1), the screen includes the second member separately from the first member having the display surface, and is formed by adhering the first member and the second member. Have been. And the 2nd member is formed with the hole penetrated from the side adhered to the 1st member to the other side. Therefore, even after the first member and the second member are adhered, the first member is easily inserted by inserting a rod-shaped object or the like into the hole and lifting the first member. Can be removed. Therefore, even when the first member (display surface) is displaced from an appropriate position and the first member and the second member are adhered to each other, the first member is separated from the second member. Once removed, and the first member and the second member are adhered again, the position of the first member (display surface) can be finely adjusted. Thereby, the display surface can be arranged at an appropriate position, and the accuracy of the effect using the screen can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
The screen (for example, front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (for example, front screen drive mechanism E2), so that a first position (for example, front standby position) and a second position (for example, front position). Between the exposure position)
When the screen is in the second position (for example, the front exposure position), the image projected by the projector is displayed on the screen, while the screen is in the first position (for example, the front standby position). The screen is arranged such that the surface on the other side of the second member (for example, the second pattern surface E12b) is visible through the display area,
A pattern having irregularities is formed on the other side surface (for example, the second pattern surface E12b) of the second member,
The hole is formed in a concave portion of the irregularities constituting the pattern,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the invention of (2), when the screen is at the first position, the screen is provided on the surface of the other side of the second member (the side opposite to the side adhered to the first member) ( The rear surface of the screen) is arranged so as to be visible through the display area. Here, as described above, since the hole formed in the second member penetrates from the side adhered to the first member to the other side, when the screen is in the first position, As the back surface of the screen becomes visible through the display area, the holes formed in the second member also enter the field of view of the player. If such holes are visually recognized by the player, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine may be impaired, and the interest of the game may be reduced. In this regard, according to the invention of (2), a pattern is formed on the surface of the second member on the other side (the side opposite to the side adhered to the first member). Thereby, it is possible to make the holes formed in the second member concealed in the pattern and make them less noticeable in appearance, while maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine and preventing the interest of the game from being reduced. be able to. In particular, the pattern has irregularities, and the holes are formed in concave portions of the irregularities constituting the pattern. Accordingly, the hole is located at a deep place in the surface of the second member on the other side (the side opposite to the side adhered to the first member), and the hole is formed in the game. It is possible to create a situation that is difficult for a person to visually recognize.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the precision of an effect can be improved in the game machine which performs an effect using a screen.

It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic layout diagram inside a housing of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a mirror mechanism is attached. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a fixed screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a front screen mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an irradiation state on a rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are open. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a mirror mechanism is attached. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. FIG. 41 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 40, omitting functional components housed in the housing of the display unit, and arranged above the gaming machine when the gaming machine is installed in the island facility. FIG. 3 also illustrates a fixed plate member of the island facility. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a perspective sectional view of a display unit and a cabinet. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a fixed screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a front screen mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a reel screen mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation range of a front screen mechanism and an operation range of a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism and a front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism and a reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view for explaining a sensor mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a detection state of a sensor mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a detection state of a sensor mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a detection state of a sensor mechanism. FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram related to the operation of the front screen mechanism. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a control sequence of a drive motor of the front screen drive mechanism when driving the front screen mechanism from the front standby position to the front exposure position. It is a sequence diagram concerning operation of a reel screen mechanism. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a control sequence of a drive motor of the reel screen drive mechanism when driving the reel screen mechanism from a reel standby position to a reel exposure position. It is a figure explaining the drive procedure of a front screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism concerning an origin return operation. It is a perspective view of a cabinet and a medal supply opening. It is a perspective view of a cabinet, a medal supply opening, and a medal supply mechanism. It is a perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of a back wall, a medal supply opening, a medal supply mechanism, and a scaler device. It is a front view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view of the coin guard. It is a front view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a state where a hopper guide mechanism is attached to a bottom plate. It is the top view and front view of a hopper guide mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a hopper mechanism HP. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram when the hopper mechanism HP is normally mounted. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram when the hopper mechanism HP is normally mounted. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram when a hopper mechanism HP is erroneously entered. It is a detailed view of the inside of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of a sheet metal. It is explanatory drawing of a sheet metal. It is a front view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism were opened. It is a side view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism were opened. It is a perspective view of the cabinet in the state where the lower drag mechanism was opened. It is explanatory drawing of an upper door lock mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism in a locked state. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was removed from the cabinet. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a detailed view of the lower space of the cabinet. It is a side view in the state where speaker DD25 and a power supply device were opposed. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. FIG. 4 is an exploded view of an operation unit and a locking unit of a maximum BET button. It is the figure which looked at the maximum BET button fixed to the 2nd pedestal part from the inside of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of a 2nd pedestal part. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a rear perspective view of a lower door mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of attaching a main control board to a reel unit. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view of mounting a reel unit to a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel device. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate, a reel index, and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a detection piece and a detection state. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the pedestal member with respect to a motor attachment plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the sensor with respect to a pedestal member. FIG. 3 is a top view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism opened. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state where the upper door mechanism was removed from the cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of an upper hinge mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between an irradiation light device and a decoration unit. It is sectional drawing of a decoration unit. It is a front view showing the internal configuration of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is sectional drawing of a left panel mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light-guide structure of a left light guide plate. It is a perspective view of a panel base, a top lens cover, and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a top lens cover and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a figure showing the functional flow of a pachislot. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control circuit. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a sub control circuit. It is an exploded perspective view of a sub control device. It is a perspective view of a base member. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover member from the bottom side. It is a front view of a sub control device. It is a top view of a sub control apparatus. It is a bottom view of a sub control device. It is a perspective view of a base side adhesion part. It is a front view of a base side adhesion part. It is the perspective view which looked at the base side adhesion part from back. It is a right view of a base side adhesion part. It is a top view of a base side bonding part. It is a perspective view of a cover side adhesion part. It is a right view of a cover side adhesion part. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover side adhesion part from the lower part. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover side adhesion part from the lower part. It is a bottom view of a cover side adhesion part. It is a figure showing a situation at the time of aligning a base member and a cover member. It is a bottom view of the base side adhesion part and the cover side adhesion part in the state which screwed the base member and the cover member. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow AA of the sub control apparatus shown to FIG. 152A. It is a perspective view of a display unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a front screen support stand. FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 171, taken along the line BB. 177 is a diagram showing a state where the front screen member is adhered to the front screen support base shown in FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 171, taken along the line CC. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a state where a front screen member is adhered to the front screen support shown in FIG. 174. It is a rear view of a front screen support stand. FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 176, taken along the line DD. FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 176, taken along the line EE. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate and the left side plate of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing a state where a crank gear of a right front screen drive mechanism is removed. It is a top view of the crank gear of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a right front screen mechanism and a left front screen drive mechanism. It is a right side view of the crank gear of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a right side view of an intermediate gear of a right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 5 is a right side view of a crank gear and an intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is disposed at a front exposure position. It is a right view of a right side board. FIG. 5 is a right side view of the screen device when the front screen mechanism is disposed at a front exposure position. It is a left view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism in the case where the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposure position. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the crank gear in a state before the crank gear and the crank member are assembled. It is a figure showing a crank member in a state before assembling a crank gear and a crank member. It is a right view which shows the state which attached the crank gear to the right plate. FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating a state where an intermediate gear is attached to the right side plate and the crank gear illustrated in FIG. 192. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism at the time of arrange | positioning at a reel standby position. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism at the time of being arrange | positioned at a reel exposure position. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism and a reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows an arm member and a movable body base when a reel screen mechanism is arrange | positioned at a reel standby position. It is a right view of a reel screen mechanism and an arm member. It is a bottom view of a reel screen mechanism and an arm member. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel screen mechanism and the arm member from the lower part. It is a perspective view of a right movable body base. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a state where the positions of the arm member and the movable body base shown in FIG. 198 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. It is a top view near the reference surface in a movable body base. FIG. 204 is a cross-sectional view of the movable body base shown in FIG. 204, taken along arrow FF. It is the figure which looked at the buffer member installation part from the right side. FIG. 206 is a diagram illustrating a state where a buffer member is installed in the buffer member installation unit illustrated in FIG. 206. FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the arm member and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in a cross section taken along line GG of the movable body base illustrated in FIG. 204. It is a perspective view which shows a front screen mechanism and a bottom plate in case a front screen mechanism is arrange | positioned at a front exposure position. It is a perspective view of a front screen support base. FIG. 210 is a partially enlarged view of a protrusion formed on the front screen support shown in FIG. 210. It is a perspective view of a bottom plate. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a state where the positions of the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate shown in FIG. 209 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. It is the figure which looked at the bottom plate from diagonally below. It is a top view of a bottom plate. FIG. 215 is a partially enlarged view of a buffer member installation portion in a cross section taken along the line HH of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215. FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a state where a buffer member cover is attached to a buffer member installation portion formed on the bottom plate shown in FIG. 214. It is a perspective view of the cover for buffer members. FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating a state where the cushioning member is placed on the cushioning member cover illustrated in FIG. 218. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a state in which the front screen support and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in a cross section taken along arrow HH of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215. 215 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the cushioning member and the cushioning member cover are installed in a cross section taken along the line II of the bottom plate illustrated in FIG. 215. 197 is a right side view of the arc gear shown in FIG. 197. FIG. FIG. 222 is a perspective view of the arc gear shown in FIG. 222. It is a left view of the crank member of a right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 223 is a perspective view of the crank member shown in FIG. 224. It is a perspective view of a section of a screen device in case a front screen mechanism is arranged in a front exposure position, and a reel screen mechanism is arranged in a reel standby position. It is a right view of the section of an arc gear and a crank member when a front screen mechanism is arranged in a front exposure position, and a reel screen mechanism is arranged in a reel standby position. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a cross section of the screen device when the reel screen mechanism is disposed at a reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism is disposed at a front standby position. FIG. 7 is a right side view of a cross section of the arc gear and the crank member when the reel screen mechanism is disposed at a reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism is disposed at a front standby position. It is an exploded perspective view of an irradiation light device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a projector mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector mechanism. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector mechanism. It is a top view of the state which connected the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a figure for explaining a positioning method of an upper pedestal. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow JJ of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. It is a figure for explaining a posture adjustment method of a lower pedestal. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a connection mode between a projector mechanism and an adjustment PC. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state where an upper wall portion of a projector cover is removed. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state where a projector cover, a relay plate, and an upper pedestal are connected. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover, the relay plate, and the upper pedestal shown in FIG. 240 taken along the line KK. FIG. 240 is a perspective view showing a state where the projector cover is removed from the state shown in FIG. 240. It is an exploded perspective view showing a relay board and a buffer member. It is a perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is a top view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is the figure which looked at the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal from diagonally forward. It is the figure which looked at the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal from diagonally back. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a case that houses internal components of the projector mechanism. It is a perspective view showing the state where the case was attached to the lower pedestal. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state where an upper wall portion of a projector cover is removed. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the projector cover with an upper wall removed. FIG. 265 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 251 along the line LL and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 5 is a diagram of the projector cover with the upper wall removed, as viewed obliquely from above. FIG. 3 is a front view of the projector cover with an upper wall removed. FIG. 267 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 254 taken along the line MM. It is a perspective view of a blind. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the irradiation light device in a state where an upper wall portion of a projector cover is removed. FIG. 267 is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257, taken along line NN. 257 is a right side view of a cross section of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257 taken along the line NN.

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. A gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a card storing information of a game value, which is given or given to a player, in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, Hereinafter, description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right and left sides of the gaming machine 1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. Further, a direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a cabinet 21 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on an upper front part of the cabinet 21, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on a lower front part of the cabinet 21. ing. The cabinet 21 houses equipment used for the game (for example, a reel (or also called a drum)). As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet 21 can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit A is provided inside the cabinet 21 on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is detachably provided on an intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. Note that the intermediate support plate 211 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 21. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. Etc.) and an image generated according to the effect information, which is generated based on the shape, enables an advanced and powerful effect.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 obliquely below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at a rear part in the cabinet 21. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. On a lower surface of the base member B22, a lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so that the irradiation light emitted from the light source is emitted toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, on the lower surface of the base member B22, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air flows and a fan that sends out air. By blowing air backward, heat generated when generating irradiation light is forcibly moved backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, ventilation holes 21 a of the cabinet 21 are arranged in the direction of air flow in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. Thus, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 to the outside of the apparatus together with the air through the ventilation holes 21a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the emission direction of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown also in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 has a front surface formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 are formed symmetrically in the vertical direction between the angle adjustment holes B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed at the center and has a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by a mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged to be exposed to the front when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holder B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the same as those of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is pinched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is pinched by. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. Thus, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes an upper wall portion B12 disposed horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed in front of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting forward from the cabinet 21 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion of the front side of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward, and holds the above-described mirror mechanism B3 in a space formed by the projection so that the angle of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding horizontally from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is set to have a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 21. Have been. On the other hand, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to a space behind the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is larger than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13, the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 21.

  On the lower surface side of the projector cover B1, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided. The perforated plate B15 is a punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.) plate. The plurality of holes B151 are formed substantially uniformly dispersed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, and a hexagon, and has a hole diameter of about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from a lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle portion, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by bending obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by being bent horizontally from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side walls B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a, and to cover from the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. I have. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position disposed at an upper position serving as a standby posture for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower position serving as an exposure posture for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture has an inclined posture substantially parallel to and close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed position, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the line of sight of the player located on the front side is centered in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen device C. The perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed even when the light irradiation device B exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. This allows the display unit A to integrally handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C in a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen casing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 disposed horizontally, a right plate C2 erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left plate C3 erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Thereby, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, which constitute the screen housing C10, are each independently formed in a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been. This makes it possible to share the plate unit of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared. In addition, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, a central mounting portion C11 arranged at the center portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction with the central mounting portion C11 as a center. I have. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positionable by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting part C12 and the left mounting part C13 position the right mobile body base C5 and the left mobile body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right mobile body base C5 and the left mobile body base C6, respectively. Mounted as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 211 of the cabinet 21, the front side portion C <b> 14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 211 so that the front unit C <b> 14 It is possible to perform rearward positioning. The display unit A is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 21 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14, so that the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 21. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 21 in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 21 releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet 21 and removes the screws. Then, the user reaches the inside of the cabinet 21 and holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes out the display unit A out of the cabinet 21. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, the user reaches into the screen device C from one of the operation openings C21 of the detached display unit A, and rotates the crank gear E21 that is viewed horizontally from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In a state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 21 into a space between the side wall 212 of the cabinet 21 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is opened. By operating the crank gear E21 from above, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A outside the cabinet 21.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The motor housing C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit A to be assembled and wiring to the outside of the display unit A to be performed at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so as to be disposed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21. That is, the relay board CK is disposed in a gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 2111 of the intermediate support plate 211 that supports the display unit A is arranged below the relay board CK, and the signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

  Accordingly, since the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is increased.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side, and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet 21. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C through the operation opening C41 and rotates the intermediate gear E23 that is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, thereby easily moving the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D / E1 / F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. Making it possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, so that an image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thereby, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1 by setting the reel screen mechanism F1 to cover the fixed screen mechanism D from the front. Making it possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, it is possible to make the image by the irradiation light appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 located at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 located at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is located above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is located behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation areas due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to a minimum.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when rotating.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflector D1, a right reflector D2, a left reflector D3, and a lower reflector D4. The reflection surfaces of these reflection portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  Note that the fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and continuously has different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflection portion D1 has a reflection surface facing the player on the front side and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are joined to the right and left sides of the front-side reflection unit D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front-side reflection unit D1. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection unit D1. Thereby, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 can easily reflect a part of the irradiation light while causing an image by the irradiation light to appear, because the reflection direction of the irradiation light on the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection unit D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Also, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is more likely to be directed to the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Thereby, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the white blur due to the mixing of light due to the irregular reflection of the reflection units D1 to D4 is prevented. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection unit D1 in the other reflection units D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection unit D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be represented by relative values based on white.

  The brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as the brightness is lower than the surface brightness. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make black the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added a black pigment to the paint applied to a substrate should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio between the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes: Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is higher in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than the paint applied to the base materials of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or (About 10 to 20%)). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known coating material for a screen can be appropriately used, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  It is to be noted that the black pigment is not contained in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be reduced.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10, such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of those members is lower than the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, Lower is more desirable. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably as close to black as possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed in a flat shape, so that an image having no distortion at the time of irradiation with irradiation light appears.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 abuts and is supported by the step E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. Have been in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion prevents the front screen member E11 from deforming and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. As a result, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support E12, the sink marks are mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but may be any method such as screw fastening.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) capable of generating sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately employed. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen driving mechanism E2 includes a left front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right screen connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end (one end) connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 in FIG. 15 at an intermediate position E22a. This allows the crank member E22 to rotate at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a, and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line (the straight line passing through the middle position E22a and the middle point at the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set in parallel with the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two linear portions) substantially matches the member width of the slide member E26, and is set so as to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to a line connecting the center point of E26.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is determined in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b corresponds to the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since the rotation trajectory is set so as to be orthogonal to the line connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 starts rotating easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a two-joint link having one degree of freedom is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b in which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates around the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  In addition, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, gradually increases, and is intermediate between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 27). , Gradually decelerates after reaching the maximum speed, and enters the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are attained. Accordingly, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the driving mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. I have.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen part F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support part F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen part F11, and a reel screen part F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape approximate to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front. On the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on a peripheral portion, and an inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion is a projection surface. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface can make an image appear by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a projection (not shown). The protruding portion protrudes horizontally outside each of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to be a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(2nd Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. A gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a card storing information of a game value, which is given or given to a player, in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, Hereinafter, description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right and left sides of the gaming machine 1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. Further, a direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on an upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on a lower front part of the cabinet G. have.

  Further, two openings G41 penetrating in the up-down direction are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 33, the display unit A is exchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. Etc.) and an image generated according to the effect information, which is generated based on the shape, enables an advanced and powerful effect.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. Although details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box-like shape having a bottom plate C1, a right plate C2, a left plate C3, and a back plate C4. Then, the projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 34, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 diagonally below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at a rear part in the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. On a lower surface of the base member B22, a lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so that the irradiation light emitted from the light source is emitted toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, on the lower surface of the base member B22, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air flows and a fan that sends out air. By blowing air backward, heat generated when generating irradiation light is forcibly moved backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 30, the ventilation holes G3a of the cabinet G are arranged in the flow direction of the air in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. Thus, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 to the outside of the apparatus together with the air through the ventilation hole G3a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 34, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 35, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown in FIG. 36, the front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 are formed symmetrically in the vertical direction between the angle adjustment holes B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed at the center and has a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by a mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged to be exposed to the front when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holder B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the same as those of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is pinched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is pinched by. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. Thus, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. In addition, the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front at the front. As shown in FIG. 39, the projector cover B1 has an upper wall portion B12 disposed horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed in front of the upper wall portion B12, and a left-right symmetric arrangement in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. Side walls B13. The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting forward from the cabinet G (see FIG. 33). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion of a front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space formed by the projection so as to be adjustable in angle. I have.

  Further, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protruding portions B131a protruding from the side walls B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the opening of the cabinet G. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to a space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction between the distal ends of the second protrusions B131b protruding from the side walls B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the space behind the cabinet G. That is, the side walls B13 are formed such that the distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the second protrusions B131b is greater than the distance in the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusions B131a. Thereby, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

  In addition, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the up-down direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 33), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. In addition, the protrusions B131 project in the horizontal direction from the lower ends of the side walls B13, B13, so that the protrusions B131 and the side walls B13 have recesses at both ends of the projector cover B1 from the front ends thereof. B132 is formed continuously toward the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, a space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. The shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 is such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the distal end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the same. The front part of the two protruding parts B131b is configured to be larger than the rear part (see FIG. 39). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the space in front of the space BS overlap when viewed from above. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island facilities.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the gaming machine is installed and fixed on the island facility, a fixing plate member OC of the island facility is arranged above the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G. The space BS is a space in which nails from the plate member G42 attached to the upper surface wall G4 to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility can be driven from inside the cabinet G.

  As described above, even when the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G with almost no gap between the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 and the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, the display unit A A space BS for securing the installation to the island facility is secured between the cabinet BS and the cabinet G. This allows the operator to perform a nailing operation using the space BS from the front side of the cabinet G where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, and as a result, the display unit A is damaged. The gaming machine 1 can be nailed to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility while the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G while preventing it.

  Further, the nail for nailing the gaming machine 1 and the fixed plate member OC is driven not into the metal cabinet G but into a wooden plate member G42 which is softer than the cabinet. Can be installed on island facilities.

  As a modified example, the material of the plate member G42 is not limited to wood, and various materials can be adopted as long as the material is a soft member softer than the cabinet G. Further, the method of fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment is not limited to nailing, and various fixing methods such as screwing can be adopted.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 42, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of a metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, or the like). The plurality of holes B151 are formed substantially uniformly distributed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and has a hole diameter of about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from a lower position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle portion, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by bending obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by being bent horizontally from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side walls B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a, and to cover from the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. I have. The inclined portion B15b is disposed so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 when viewed from above. Then, as shown in FIG. 38, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. Below the perforated plate B15, a front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position disposed at an upper position serving as a standby posture for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower position serving as an exposure posture for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture has an inclined posture substantially parallel to and close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed position, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the line-of-sight position of the player located on the front side is centered in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen device C. The perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed even when the light irradiation device B exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 44, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, as described above, the screw is screwed into the upper surface of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C via the screw hole B131C formed in the projection B131 of the projector cover B1. This allows the display unit A to integrally handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C in a unit.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. The front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier than the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, driving the front screen mechanism E1 requires a larger driving force than driving the reel screen mechanism F1. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D • E1 • F1 and each screen drive mechanism E2 • F2 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has the box-shaped screen housing C10 as described above. As shown in FIG. 45, the screen casing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 disposed horizontally, a right plate C2 standing upright on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left plate C3 standing upright on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Thereby, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen casing C10 are separately molded into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. Has been. This makes it possible to share the plate unit of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared. In addition, since it is possible to partially replace each plate member, it is possible to easily change specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1. The functional components positioned and arranged with respect to each plate member will be described later in detail.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, a central mounting portion C11 arranged at the center portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction with the central mounting portion C11 as a center. I have. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positionable by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end of the left movable body base C6. The right and left movable bases C5 and C6 each have a three-dimensional pattern formed on the inner side in the left-right direction by unevenness. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable base C5, and the left movable base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. When the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) of the cabinet G, the front side portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to move backward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A is screwed to the front of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front side C14, so that the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front of the cabinet G. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen casing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from outside.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screws. Then, the user reaches into the cabinet G, grasps the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes out the display unit A out of the cabinet G. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47, for example, the user reaches into the screen device C from one of the operation openings C21 of the detached display unit A, and rotates the crank gear E21 that is viewed horizontally from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In a state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is opened. By operating the crank gear E21 from above, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A out of the cabinet G.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged by the motor housing portion C22. Further, a first support portion C23 for rotatably supporting a gear shaft E21a of a crank gear E21 in the front screen driving mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen driving mechanism E2 are respectively provided on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. A second support portion C24 for rotatably supporting the shaft member E3 serving as the gear shaft of the first embodiment is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are disposed between the right movable base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 48, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a concave portion CO for positioning and positioning the relay board CK is formed in a lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK is a relay for relaying wiring (not shown) between various functional components (such as the projector mechanism B2) of the display unit A and various functional components other than the display unit A (such as the main control board MS). It is a substrate.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side, and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C through the operation opening C41 and rotates the intermediate gear E23 that is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, thereby easily moving the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. Can be moved.

  Further, the back plate C4 is disposed forward of the rear end of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 49, when the display unit A is mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 of the screen device C, and The space GS is defined by the back plate C4. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Thereby, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G due to the space GS.

  Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position facing the space GS in the intermediate support plate G1. The through-hole G11 is formed such that its opening surrounds the relay board CK in a top view. The relay board CK is provided so that the connector CK1 to which wiring from a device (such as the main control board MS) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. Thereby, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is achieved by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space through the through-hole G11. This can be performed by connecting to CK1.

  Since the relay board CK is arranged outside the screen device C in this manner, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C, The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Further, it becomes easy to discharge the heat generated from the relay board CK to the outside through the ventilation holes G3a formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Further, the wiring connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear part of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it is easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased.

  In addition, since the relay board CK is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet G, light hardly reaches the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It is possible that Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes below the intermediate support plate G1 through the through hole G11. It may be constituted so that it may project. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the driving mechanisms F2 and E2, and the relay board CK are respectively positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 and C3, and the back plate C4, and are different from each other. It is positioned and arranged on the plate. Therefore, even if the entire display unit A cannot be shared between the models, the display unit A can be shared between the models on a board basis. As a result, it is possible to manufacture the display unit at lower cost than in the case where the display unit is manufactured for each model.

  Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by screw fastening, the connection between the plates C1 to C4 can be released by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled such that the respective plates C1 to C4 are exchangeable. This makes it possible to replace the functional components of the display unit on a board-by-board basis, thereby making it possible to change the specifications of the display unit A while reusing functional components that are not to be replaced by the display unit A. .

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right movable body base C5 is disposed on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is disposed on the right inside of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with a concave portion for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 50, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 51, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. Making it possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, so that an image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided rotatably between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thereby, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1 by setting the reel screen mechanism F1 to cover the fixed screen mechanism D from the front. Making it possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the axial direction of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the axial direction of the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 coincide with the left-right direction. The operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 due to the rotation partially overlap each other. Therefore, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed in the overlapping range where the operation range overlaps, the other screen is brought into contact when the other screen is rotated.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 located at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 located at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is located above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is located behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front standby position is located outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel standby position is located outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is arranged in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range.

  On the other hand, the front exposure position is located within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel exposure position is located within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front exposure position and the reel exposure position is arranged in an overlapping range in the operation range. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be located at the reel exposure position. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be located at the front exposure position.

  The rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 are so set as to minimize the overlapping of the operation ranges due to the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Are different. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposure position. Thus, the distance between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened, so that the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced. By thus reducing the operation range, it is possible to increase the size of the front screen mechanism E1 even in a limited space in the display unit A. Note that both the rotation center axis FG and the rotation center axis RG are disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when rotating. Details of the operations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflector D1, a right reflector D2, a left reflector D3, and a lower reflector D4. The reflecting surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. I have.

  Note that the fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and continuously has different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflection portion D1 has a reflection surface facing the player on the front side and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are joined to the right and left sides of the front-side reflection unit D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front-side reflection unit D1. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection unit D1. Thereby, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 can easily reflect a part of the irradiation light while causing an image by the irradiation light to appear, because the reflection direction of the irradiation light on the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection unit D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Also, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is more likely to be directed to the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflection surface is set to be lower than the brightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflecting surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Thereby, in the fixed screen mechanism D, white blur due to mixing of light due to irregular reflection of the reflection units D1 to D4 is prevented. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection unit D1 in the other reflection units D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection unit D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be represented by relative values based on white.

  The brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as the brightness is lower than the surface brightness. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make black the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added a black pigment to the paint applied to a substrate should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio between the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes: Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is higher in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than the paint applied to the base materials of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or (About 10 to 20%)). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known coating material for a screen can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  It is to be noted that the black pigment is not contained in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before forming the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be reduced.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10, such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of those members is lower than the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, Lower is more desirable. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably as close to black as possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 54, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thus, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed to be flat.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed at the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12, and a step portion E121b formed linearly at both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 abuts and is supported by the peripheral step E121a and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep part. Have been in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion prevents the front screen member E11 from deforming and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. As a result, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support E12, the sink marks are mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but may be any method such as screw fastening.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) capable of generating sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately employed. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the front screen driving mechanism E2 includes a left front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower left lower surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower right lower surface of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen driving mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position (in a standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end. It is configured as follows. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2.

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is parallel to the horizontal plane. In comparison with the case of the posture, the irradiation light irradiated by the irradiation light device B can be suppressed from being hindered by the front screen mechanism E1. Thus, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when located at the front standby position can be made closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, even in the limited space of the display unit A, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when disposed at the front standby position is set with respect to the projector mechanism B2. You can get closer. As a result, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. A position where the upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is located on the rear surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1 when the front end is located at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). It is connected to.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by a right movable base C5 (see FIG. 45) at an intermediate position E22a. Thus, the crank member E22 is rotatable at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. Further, the crank member E22 has its upper end (one end) connected to a position on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 to be an upper position when the crank member E22 is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). . With the above configuration, the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a, and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 57, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line (the straight line passing through the middle position E22a and the middle point at the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set in parallel with the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two linear portions) substantially matches the member width of the slide member E26, and is set so as to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 55, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and is formed between the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member E26. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to a line segment connecting the center point.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so that the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom having the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends, and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when E1 is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b slides with the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 since the trajectory is set so as to be orthogonal to the line connecting the center point of the member E26. Accordingly, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 starts rotating easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b in which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates around the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, gradually increases, and is intermediate between the standby posture and the exposure posture (see FIG. 59). ), The speed gradually decreases after reaching the maximum speed, and becomes the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are attained. Accordingly, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the driving mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

  The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3.

  Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A and the right front screen driving mechanism E2B are connected to both ends thereof. Further, the shaft member E3 is disposed in a space behind the fixed screen mechanism D and between the back plate C4 and the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 53).

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, respectively, and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis FG and the front standby position is shifted to the front standby position. It will move between the front exposure position.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A and the right front screen driving mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the driving motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It is possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22 as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B disposed to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as a rotation axis of the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the shaft member E3 is increased, and it is possible to arrange the shaft member E3 so as not to hinder the arrangement of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional object while maintaining the rotation range and the size of the front screen mechanism E1 at desired levels.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D, light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not obstructed by the shaft member E3. In addition, since the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is located forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, the rotation center axis FG is located behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG (the length of the crank member E22) can be reduced. For this reason, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired size.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is made of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape in a side view that is curved into a shape approximating the rotating direction. The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on a peripheral edge thereof, and an inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is a circular arc surface that is convex toward the upstream side in the light irradiation direction from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, which is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between a reel standby position and a reel exposure position by a driving force of a reel screen driving mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a is capable of displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21, F21, an arc gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the rear surface of the right end portion and the rear surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Support shafts F21a, F21a projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other ends of the two arm members F21, F21. These support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, respectively. Thus, the two arm members F21 can rotate about the support shafts F21a and F21a as the center of rotation. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arc-shaped gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a disposed on the right side of the two support shafts F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 meshes with the arc gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven under the control of the main control board MS, the motor shaft gear E24 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the arc gear F22 rotates. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arc gear F22, the arm member F21 is rotated to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 about the rotation center axis RG, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism CS)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIG. 53). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms. That is, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the driving of the reel screen mechanism F1 are not interlocked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to know the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) determines the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the front standby position as the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position.

  However, when the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not performed normally or when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is turned off, the main control is performed. The board MS cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism CS for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the main control board MS performs a return operation of returning the screen mechanisms E1, F1 to the origin positions (standby positions) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism CS.

  In the crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, a light shielding portion E22d is formed in an upper region, and a light shielding portion E22e is formed in a lower region. Further, a light shielding portion F1b is formed on the back surface of the right end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3. These sensors CS1 to CS3 are transmission-type optical sensors, and are formed in a substantially U shape as shown in FIG. One end of the U-shaped open side is a light emitting unit that emits light, and the other end is a light receiving unit that receives light. When the light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit, these sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal to the main control board MS, the light emitted from the light emitting unit is cut off, and the light receiving unit is turned off. When light cannot be received, a Hi signal is output to the main control board MS.

  The sensor CS1 is a sensor for detecting whether the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. This sensor CS1 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion E22d of the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS1 sandwiches the light-shielding portion E22d between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion, and sets the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position. When it does not exist at the position (see FIG. 66), the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit are fixedly arranged so as not to sandwich the light-shielding unit E22d. Therefore, the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, and outputs a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position.

  The sensor CS2 is a sensor for detecting whether the front screen mechanism E1 exists at the front exposure position. This sensor CS2 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion E22e in the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position (see FIG. 66), the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding unit E22e between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and sets the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position. (See FIG. 65), the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion are fixedly arranged at a position where the light-shielding portion E22e is not sandwiched. Accordingly, the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, and outputs a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front exposure position.

  The sensor CS3 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position. This sensor CS3 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light shielding portion F1b in the reel screen mechanism F1. Specifically, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding unit F1b between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and sets the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position. (See FIG. 67), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are fixedly arranged at a position where the light shielding unit F1b is not sandwiched. Accordingly, the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal to the main control board MS when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position, and outputs a Low signal when the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel standby position.

  In the above configuration, the detection signals from the sensors CS1 and CS2 indicate whether the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the front exposure position, or an intermediate position between them. I have. The detection signal from the sensor CS3 indicates whether the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position or at a position other than the reel standby position.

  Further, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are each disposed in an overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed in the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor CS2 detects that the front screen is at the front exposure position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel exposure position.

(Operation control of front screen mechanism E1)
Next, prior to describing the home position return operation, operation control of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in a normal state will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor E25 to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position. The turning operation of the front screen mechanism E1 is executed on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position.

  As mentioned earlier, the main control board MS sets the front standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 from the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of steps is 210, it can be grasped that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal, and when the number of steps is 190-191, the detection signal of the sensor CS2 is detected. The signal switches between a Hi signal and a Low signal.

  The main control board MS controls the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the front screen mechanism E1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and the pulse width of the drive motor E25. Hereinafter, in the drive motor E25, the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is the + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position is the-direction. And

  FIG. 69 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor E25 when rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor E25 is excited by a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor E25 is driven in the positive direction by a pulse width of 2.2 ms. To drive 210 steps (procedure 2). As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposure position. Thereafter, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 3). The above is the control sequence when the rotary operation is performed from the front standby position to the front exposure position. A control sequence for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is a sequence in which the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to the procedure 2 in the control sequence of FIG. do it.

(Operation control of reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the normal operation control of the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor F24 to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position. The turning operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed on condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the main control board MS sets the reel standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position. For example, when the number of steps is 140, it can be grasped that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

  The main control board MS controls the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and the pulse width of the drive motor F24. Hereinafter, in the drive motor F24, the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is the + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position is the-direction. And

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor F24 when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor F24 is excited in the + direction with a pulse width of 4 ms in the + direction. Drive by the number of steps (procedure 2). Thereby, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is started, and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is accelerated. Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is driven 122 steps in the + direction with a pulse width of 3 ms (procedure 3). Then, the drive motor F24 is driven in the + direction with a pulse width of 5 ms for 122 steps (step 4). Thereby, the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is reduced. Then, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 5). The above is the control sequence for rotating the reel from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. The control sequence when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is such that the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 in the control sequence of FIG. What is necessary is just to make a sequence.

  As described above, the main control board MS drives the front screen mechanism E1 on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven on the condition, it is possible to prevent interference between the screen mechanisms during rotation.

(Origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The origin return operation is executed at a predetermined timing such as when the power is restored from the power-off state.

  Here, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches from the Hi signal to the Low signal when the drive motor E25 is driven in the + direction by several steps from the origin position of the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 68). Therefore, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 may not coincide with the origin position. Similarly, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 may not coincide with the origin position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the origin return operation relating to the front screen mechanism E1 is performed, and even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is operated. It is configured to perform such an origin return operation.

  Further, the main control board MS drives the drive motor F24 and the drive motor E25 in the home position return operation, and can execute four types of basic operations 1 to 4. The operations 1 and 2 are operations related to the front screen mechanism E1, and the operations 3 and 4 are operations related to the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The operation 1 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal. In detail, the operation 1 is an operation for driving the drive motor E25 in the + direction by about 30 to 40 steps. As a result, the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  Operation 2 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Low signal. In detail, the operation 2 is an operation in which the drive motor E25 is driven in the negative direction, and after the signal output from the sensor CS1 switches from the Low signal to the Hi signal, the drive is stopped by 20 steps. As mentioned earlier, when the number of steps of the drive motor E25 is 20-21 when the front standby position is the origin position, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  Operation 3 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal. More specifically, the operation is to drive the drive motor F24 in the + direction by about 10 to 20 steps. Thereby, the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  Operation 4 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Low signal. In detail, the operation 4 is an operation in which the drive motor F24 is driven in the negative direction, and after the signal output from the sensor CS3 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal, the drive is stopped by driving one step. As mentioned earlier, when the reel standby position is set to the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor F24 is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing the operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

  As shown in FIG. 72, since the sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3, there are eight combinations of the detection states of these sensors CS1 to CS3 in all. Here, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not disposed at the front standby position and the front exposure position at the same time, of the eight sensor states, two of the sensor states CS1 and CS2 that are both outputting Hi signals are output. The sensor states (state 1 and state 2) indicate that an abnormality such as a failure of the sensors CS1 and CS2 has occurred. Therefore, when both the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output the Hi signal, the main control board MS determines that an abnormality has occurred, and notifies the abnormality by voice or video using a speaker, a monitor, or the like.

  The memory of the main control board MS stores the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen according to the six types of sensor states (states 3 to 8) excluding the two types of sensor states among the eight types of sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS. Six types of driving procedures for the mechanism F1 are stored. The six driving procedures are determined so that the screen mechanisms do not interfere with each other as much as possible. Hereinafter, a driving procedure according to each of the six types of sensor states will be described.

  When the sensors CS1 and CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 outputs a Low signal (state 3), both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are out of the operating range of the other screen mechanism. Are located in Accordingly, in the driving procedure according to the state 3, the main control board MS first returns the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position by performing the operations 1 and 2 continuously. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS2 and CS3 output a Low signal (state 4), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the reel The screen mechanism is disposed at the reel exposure position or at an intermediate position between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. Here, the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 (non-overlapping range) on the reel standby position side, and is within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 on the reel exposure position side. And a range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. For this reason, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the intermediate position, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be arranged in an overlapping range that is within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 4, the main control board MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the operation 1 and the operation 2 are successively performed, thereby returning the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

  When the sensors CS2 and CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 outputs a Low signal in a sensor state (state 5), the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and The reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 5, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS3 output a Low signal (state 6), the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism F1 Is located at an intermediate position. In this state 6, similarly to the above-described state 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be located within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to state 6, the main control board MS first performs operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position.

  When the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal and the sensors CS1 and CS2 output a Low signal in a sensor state (state 7), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at an intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is It is located outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to State 7, the main control board MS first performs Operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 3 and 4.

  When the sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal in the sensor state (state 8), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the intermediate position or the reel exposure position. Here, the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 is also outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 (the non-overlapping range) on the front standby position side, and within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the front exposure position and the front standby position. Therefore, in state 8, the front screen mechanism E1 may be located within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are arranged within the operation range of each other. As a result, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven, the other screen mechanism may move due to interference. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven to perform the return operation based only on the detection results of the sensors CS1 to CS3 at the start of the return operation, one of the screen mechanisms is returned to the origin position. You may not be able to.

  Therefore, in the driving procedure according to state 8, the main control board MS first performs operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. When the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Low signal, the operation 4 is performed to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the operations 3 and 4 are continuously performed to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position.

  As described above, when the sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS are states 3 to 7, by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in accordance with the driving procedure according to each state, the screen mechanisms may interfere with each other. And can be returned to their respective origin positions. When the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 8, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by a driving procedure according to the detection signal of the sensor CS3 after returning the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position. As a result, in the processing after the return operation, by appropriately driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, it is possible to reliably prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  As a modified example, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 3, the main control board MS continuously performs the operation 3 and the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position, and then performs the operation 1 By continuously performing the operation 2 and the above, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position.

  Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is state 8, the main control board MS first performs operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. When the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Low signal, the operation 2 is performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the operations 1 and 2 may be continuously performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

  Further, the sensors CS1 to CS3 are not limited to transmission type optical sensors, and various sensors such as contact sensors can be adopted. Further, the sensor mechanism CS does not necessarily need to include the three sensors CS1 to CS3, and detects whether the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, and detects whether the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. If it is possible to detect whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position, it may be constituted by one sensor.

(Cabinet G)
(Cabinet G: medal supply mechanism MH)
As shown in FIG. 73A, a supply opening G31 for opening the atmosphere between the inside and the outside of the housing 2 is formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G. The supply opening G31 is arranged at the center of the rear wall G3. When an automatic circulation replenishing device (not shown) is laid on the installation island where the gaming machine 1 is installed, the screw is inserted in a state where the medal supply port P serving as a replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the replenishing opening G31. Stopped and fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, the medal supply port P inserted through the supply opening G31 reaches above the hopper mechanism HP. Thereby, medals from the automatic circulation replenishing device can be supplied to the hopper mechanism HP.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, a medal supply mechanism MH is provided inside the housing 2 in the supply opening G31 through which the medal supply port P is inserted. The medal supply mechanism MH opens and closes the supply opening G31. That is, when the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation supply device is inserted through the supply opening G31, the supply opening G31 is released by the medal supply mechanism MH. When the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation supply device is not inserted through the supply opening G31, the supply opening G31 is closed by the medal supply mechanism MH. Hereinafter, the medal supply mechanism MH will be specifically described.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the medal supply mechanism MH has a shielding member MH1 and a guide member MH2. The shielding member MH1 is slidable in the vertical direction by the guide member MH2, and can switch between a shielding state in which the supply opening G31 is shielded and a released state in which the supply opening G31 is exposed. .

  The shielding member MH1 has a flat plate portion MH11 and a protruding portion MH12. The flat plate portion MH11 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape capable of blocking the supply opening G31 from the inside of the cabinet G of the housing 2. The flat plate part MH11 has a screw hole MH13 at the upper part and a screw hole MH14 at the lower part. Accordingly, the shielding member MH1 can be screwed and fixed to the rear wall G3 in a shielding state in which the shielding member MH1 shields the supply opening G31. The protruding portion MH12 is formed to protrude vertically from the center of the upper edge of the flat plate portion MH11 toward the inside of the cabinet G.

  The guide member MH2 is formed in a rectangular ring shape along the edge of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state that shields the supply opening G31. The guide member MH2 is screwed and fixed to the rear wall G3 so as to sandwich the shielding member MH1. Specifically, the guide member MH2 has an upper edge MH21, two side edges MH22 and MH22, and a lower edge MH23.

  The upper edge portion MH21 is formed along the outside of the upper edge of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state. That is, the upper edge portion MH21 is adjacent to above the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and regulates the movement of the shielding member MH1 in the vertical upward direction. The two side edge portions MH22, MH22 are formed along the side edges of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state vertically downward from the one end, with both ends of the upper edge portion MH21 being one end. That is, the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are adjacent to the side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and regulate the movement of the shielding member MH1 to the side.

  The lower edge portion 23 is formed so as to connect the other ends of the two side edge portions MH22. The lower edge portion 23 is formed with a holding portion MH23a, a guide groove MH23b, and a screw hole MH23c. The holding portion MH23a is a notch formed at the center of the upper surface of the lower edge portion 23, and is formed to have a width larger than the width of the protrusion MH12 of the shielding member MH1. Thus, when the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state is slid vertically downward, the protrusion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 is supported by the holding portion MH23a. That is, the shielding member MH1 is held in an open state exposing the supply opening G31. Further, the holding portion MH23a is formed to be thinner than the protruding length of the protruding portion MH12. Therefore, since the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 protrudes more than the holding portion MH23a, the protruding portion MH12 is easily grasped, and it is possible to easily shift from the open state to the shielding state.

  The guide groove MH23b is a groove that engages with the shielding member MH1 formed on the back wall G3 side, and the shielding member MH1 is slid in the vertical direction. The screw hole MH23c is formed at a position where the screw hole MH14 and the screw hole MH13 can be screwed and fixed when in the shielding state, and at a position where the screw hole MH13 and the screw hole MH13 can be screwed and fixed when in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 76, a medal supply opening P is obliquely inserted into the supply opening G31. Above such a medal supply port P, a scaler device SK is provided. The scaler device SK includes a scaler substrate SK1 for processing position information input to a touch sensor panel disposed on a liquid crystal display panel surface, and a scaler substrate case SK2 on which the scaler substrate SK1 is installed. The scaler substrate case SK2 is a support member having a bottom surface as a concave plate formed so as to surround the medal supply port P inclined in an oblique direction. The scaler board SK1 is provided on such a scaler board case SK2 with an inclination.

(Hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 77, a hopper mechanism HP and an overflow bucket OF are disposed below the lower space of the cabinet G.

  The hopper mechanism HP is attached to the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G. The hopper mechanism HP has a structure capable of storing a large number of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper mechanism HP pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number or when the payment button is pressed to perform the payment of the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper mechanism HP are discharged from a medal payout exit DD14.

  The overflow bucket OF stores medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. The overflow bucket OF is disposed on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The overflow bucket OF is engaged with a bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate G91.

(Configuration of hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 78, the hopper mechanism HP includes a bucket HP1 for storing a large number of medals, a base member HP2 to which the bucket HP1 is attached, and a payout unit (not shown) housed inside the base member HP2. I have.

  The payout unit has a function of paying out medals one by one in a fixed posture, and has a coin disk for sequentially paying out while rotating the medals accumulated in the bucket HP1. The base member HP2 has a medal payout exit DD14. By driving the coin discs of the medal payout unit integrated in the bucket HP1, the coins are ejected one by one from the medal payout exit DD14.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the bucket HP1 has an upper end opening HP11 formed of a wall surface substantially perpendicular to a horizontal plane, and an inclined side wall HP12 that is inclined at a predetermined angle continuously from the upper end opening HP11. are doing. The top opening HP11 has a substantially rectangular planar shape. A discharge guide HP13 that guides medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 to the outside of the bucket HP1 is provided at a corner portion in front of the upper end opening HP11. The discharge guide HP13 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to decrease from the inside to the outside of the bucket HP1. The medals guided by the discharge guide HP13 are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

  The medals guided by the selector DD15 and collided with the discharge guide HP13 bounce toward the inclined side wall portion HP12 of the bucket HP1. At this time, if the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has not reached the certain amount, the medals move in the bucket HP1 along the inclined side wall HP12. Thereby, the medals can be uniformly stored in the bucket HP1.

  On the other hand, when the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has reached a certain amount, the medals collide with the inclined surface of the ejection guide HP13 and bounce, and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1 and the ejection guide HP13. Return to the slope. Then, the medals move on the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 by their own weight and head toward the overflow bucket OF.

  Further, on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP, guide pieces HP21 and HP22 continuously extending from the bottom surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. A connector HP41 connected to a connector G81 of a cabinet G described later is provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP.

(Configuration of overflow bucket OF)
As shown in FIG. 78, the overflow bucket OF includes a storage main body OF1 and a medal guide OF2.

  The storage main body OF1 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose upper surface is opened. The medal guide OF2 is configured to be detachable from the storage main body OF1. The medal guide OF2 guides the medals guided from the discharge guide HP13 to the overflow bucket OF to the storage main body OF1, and prevents the medals from being biased to one side of the storage main body OF1.

(Coin guard HP30)
In this gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 79, a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for discharging medals received from outside is provided above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.

  Here, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device). When the medals are supplied from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, the medals fall due to a predetermined distance in the height direction, and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1, and move outward due to the momentum. May be popped out. In this case, most of them collide with the upper end opening HP11 of the hopper mechanism HP and remain in the bucket HP1. However, in rare cases, the medal may jump over the upper end opening HP11 and jump out of the bucket HP1.

When the medal jumps out of the bucket HP1, or when the medal falls on the side of the bottom plate G91 where the power supply device DE is located or on the side where the overflow bucket OF is located, the lower door mechanism DD is opened and collected. do it. However, when a medal falls between the hopper mechanism HP and the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, it is necessary to remove the hopper mechanism HP, which takes time and effort.
Furthermore, since the connector is electrically connected between the hopper mechanism HP and the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, if a metal medal touches a metal part or the like of the connector, it may cause a failure. Would.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a back wall G3 of the cabinet G (corresponding to the back of the housing) and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. A coin guard HP30 (corresponding to a medal spill prevention member) is provided from the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G to the edge of the bucket HP1 so as to fill a gap HPG (see FIG. 80) therebetween.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 81, the coin guard HP30 is provided at a corner on the far side of the upper end opening HP11, and has an L-shape as viewed from above. The L-shaped coin guard HP30 is formed of a first guard portion HP301 facing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a second guard portion HP302 facing the overflow bucket OF. As described above, the first guard portion HP301 prevents the medal from dropping into the gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, and the second guard portion HP302 forms the overflow bucket. The medal is prevented from falling to the OF (corresponding to an auxiliary storage) side.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the first guard portion HP301 and the second guard portion HP302 of the coin guard HP30 are inclined so as to fall from the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G toward the bucket HP1 side. It has a surface HP301a. As shown in FIG. 81, two screw holes HP301c and HP301d that are screwed into the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G are formed on the front surface of the coin guard HP30.

  According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Even if it overflows from HP1, it can be prevented from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from accumulating in the gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with the connector, the electronic device, or the movable member.

  In addition, by forming the coin guard HP30 into an L-shape, the second guard portion HP302 can be disposed between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the hopper mechanism HP.

  The coin guard HP30 has inclined surfaces HP301a and HP301b. Accordingly, even when a medal rides on the coin guard HP30, since the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1, the medal slides down to the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. it can.

(Hopper guide mechanism HG)
The substrate HG1 that constitutes the hopper guide mechanism HG is positioned by screws at the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 84, the substrate HG1 has a frame body with an opening HG11 at the center, and guide rails HG12 and HG13 formed by bending both sides of the substrate HG1 in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 83, a lock member HG14 that locks to a lock member (not shown) provided at the bottom of the hopper mechanism HP is fixed to the near side of the substrate HG1 with screws, and At the back, a connector G81 (corresponding to a housing-side connector) on the cabinet G side is arranged.

  The guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are guided by the guide rails HG12 and HG13, so that the connector HP41 (see FIG. 85) provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 (hopper-side connector). ).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed in a U-shape by lower portions HG123 and HG133, side surfaces HG122 and HG132, and upper portions HG121 and HG131. Above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13, projecting portions HG124 and HG134 projecting in the vertical direction are formed. The protruding portions HG124 and HG134, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, the side surfaces HG122 and HG132, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, and the substrate HG1 are formed integrally by bending a single plate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the upper portions HG121 and HG131 have tapered portions on the near side.

  The protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are formed so as to be disposed in front of the connector G81 on the cabinet G side in the upper portions HG121 and HG131. Further, the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are shorter in the depth direction than the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and are disposed behind the upper portions HG121 and HG131.

  As shown in FIG. 84, pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 that are in contact with the bottom plate G91 and serve as pedestals for the connector G81 are formed on the back surface of the substrate HG1. The pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are also formed by being bent integrally with the substrate HG1.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a planar space HG17 is provided on the near side of the board HG1 (on the near side of the guide rails HG12 and HG13).

  As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131, respectively. The connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 by being slid to the rear side of the cabinet G in a state of being sandwiched and engaged with the connector G81.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP is provided between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131. When the hopper mechanism HP is slid to the rear side of the cabinet G as it is, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 abut against the protrusions HG124 and HG134, The hopper mechanism HP is restricted from sliding backward from the protrusions HG124 and HG134. Also, as shown in FIG. 88, the hopper mechanism HP in a state where the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are in contact with the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 has a rear surface of the lower door mechanism DD when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (FIG. 88). (See the two-dot chain line DDB), and if the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it comes into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

According to the above configuration, in order to electrically connect the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP to the connector G81 on the cabinet G side, when the hopper mechanism HP is slidably mounted on the hopper guide mechanism HG, the hopper mechanism HP is slid on both sides of the hopper mechanism HP. If the pair of provided guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and are erroneously slid over the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 will By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the rails HG12 and HG13 and forward of the connector G81, the hopper mechanism HP is slid at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP contacts the connector G81. Can be prevented. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position, the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP coming into contact with the connector G81 at the incorrect position, and the connector G81 and the connector HP41 from being damaged.

  Further, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid and installed on the bottom of the cabinet G, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP form upper portions HG121 and HG131 and lower portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. If the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 slide above the guide rails HG12 and HG131 by mistake without being sandwiched between the HG123 and HG133 and slide above the guide rails HG12 and HG131. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the parts HG121 and HG131, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position. That is, it is possible to normally slide the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G.

  Further, since a part of the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 is tapered, when the hopper mechanism HP is guided by the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the upper portions HG121 and HG12 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are used. The HG 131 can be prevented from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  In addition, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed by a single plate, so that the manufacturing process can be simplified. .

  In addition, since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, they do not hinder the temporary placement of the hopper mechanism HP around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparation stage for guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13. You can do so.

  Further, as a preparation step before guiding the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13 in the planar space HG17 provided in front of the substrate HG1 (in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13), The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thereby, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably mounted on the hopper guide mechanism HG.

(Sheet metal BK)
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a display unit A (corresponding to an effect device) is provided in an upper space (corresponding to an upper portion of the cabinet) of a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing). A power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device) are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower portion of the housing). A sub-control device SS (corresponding to control means) is provided on the back wall G3 side of G. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is disposed on the front side of the sub control device SS. A sheet metal BK is provided between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control device SS. Further, a sub relay device SN is provided between the sub control device SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, there is provided a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) in which metal medals are externally supplied, and medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the sheet metal BK is disposed above a corner on the far left side of the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the sheet metal BK is disposed between the first opposing surface BK1 opposing the sub-control device SS, the second opposing surface BK2 opposing the power supply device DE, and the bottom surface of the sub-control device SS and the upper surface of the bucket HP1. A third opposing surface BK3, a supporting surface BK4 projecting from the third opposing surface BK3 and fixing the sheet metal BK to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws, a fourth opposing surface BK7 corresponding to the medal supply mechanism MH, and a sheet metal BK. And a supporting surface BK7 for fixing the fixing member to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the sheet metal BK is formed by bending a single sheet, and has a rectangular third opposing surface BK3, which contacts the bottom surface of the sub-control device SS. A square support surface BK4 bent downward by 90 ° to the back wall G3 side of the third opposing surface BK3, and a square support surface BK5 bent downward by 90 ° to the power supply device DE side of the third opposing surface BK3 A first rectangular opposing surface BK1 bent upward by 90 ° in front of the third opposing surface BK3 (a square notch BK12 is formed at the upper right in front view), and a first opposing surface BK1 The second opposing surface BK2, which is bent 90 ° in the front direction to the power supply device DE, and the fourth opposing surface, which is bent 90 ° toward the rear wall G3 in the medal supply mechanism MH of the first opposing surface BK1. BK6, of the fourth opposing surface BK6 A rectangular support surface BK7 bent at 90 ° in the direction of the medal supply mechanism MH is formed on the back wall G3. The sheet metal BK is screwed to the corresponding rear wall G3 via a screw hole BK41 formed in the support surface BK4 and a screw hole BK71 formed in the support surface BK7. Thus, the sub control device SS is arranged to be sandwiched between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the first facing surface BK1 of the sheet metal BK. The sheet metal BK is made of metal, and may be fixed to the metal back wall G3 via the support surface BK4.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control device SS. That is, the support surface BK4 and the first opposing surface BK1 are not in contact with the sub-control device SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control device SS. The thin sub relay device SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin sub control device SS detachably attached to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. They are arranged in a state where the L-shape is upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS, the sheet metal BK The medal can be prevented from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, the sub-control device SS is provided at the back side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the rear wall G3 and the sheet metal BK. Can not be removed. This enhances the security of the sub-control device SS.

  Further, since medals are dropped from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, medals are likely to be repelled by the hopper mechanism HP and the repelled distance is increased. However, the medal between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP is increased. Since the sheet metal BK is provided therebetween, even if the medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and greatly jumps out to the sub-control device SS side, the medal physically contacts the sub-control device SS by the sheet metal BK. Can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals due to the drop of medals can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.

(Lower door mechanism DD)
(Lower door lock mechanism and upper door lock mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 93, a lower door lock mechanism G51 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the lower door mechanism DD (corresponding to the lower door). An upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the upper door). The lower door lock mechanism G51 serves to lock the lower space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the lower part of the housing) so as to maintain a closed state. The upper door lock mechanism G52 serves to lock the upper space of the cabinet G (corresponding to the upper part of the housing) so as to maintain a closed state.

(Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 94, the lower door lock mechanism G51 includes a locked part G511 fixed to the right end of the rear wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking part G512 fixed to the right end of the cabinet G, And a cylinder lock G513.

  The locked part G511 has two bar-shaped locked rods G511a and G511b formed at both the upper and lower parts, formed over both ends of a concave frame G511c.

  The locking portion G512 includes a long tube G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 that is slidably arranged in the tube G5122 in a vertical direction.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b to be locked to the locked bars G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide in the vertical direction in the tube G5122 in accordance with the sliding of the locking plate G5121, whereby the locked rod inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the tube G5122. G511a and G511b are locked or unlocked. In addition, the locking plate G5121 has a spring that is urged upward.

  The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked with the locked bars G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at the height position for locking the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked by the lower door mechanism DD. Is set so that the lock on the locked bars G511a and G511b is released when the lock is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. Further, the claw portions G5121a and G5121b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, so that the claw portions G5121a and G5121b are pressed down by contact with the locked bars G511a and G511b.

  Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle. The lowering portion allows the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. Accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5121a and G5121b and the locked bars G511a and G511b can be released by descending as the locking plate G5121 is lowered.

(Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 94, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked part G521 fixed to the right end of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locked part G522 fixed to the right end of the cabinet G. Have.

  The locked portion G521 has two bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b formed at both the upper and lower portions formed over both ends of a concave frame G521c.

  The locking portion G522 includes a long cylinder G5222 (corresponding to a locking cylinder) and a long locking plate G5221 (corresponding to a locking member) arranged to be vertically slidable in the cylinder G5222. are doing.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b (corresponding to locking portions) to be locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b slide in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5222 in accordance with the sliding of the locking plate G5221, so that the locked rod inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It is locked to G521a / G521b or unlocked (see FIG. 97).

  The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked with the locked bars G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked by the upper door mechanism DU. Is set so that the lock on the locked bars G521a and G521b is released when the lock is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, so that the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are pressed down by contact with the locked bars G521a and G521b.

  As shown in FIG. 95, an opening G5222c is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and the projection G5221c provided on the locking plate G5221 is provided with the opening G5222c. And protrudes to the inside of the cabinet G. By lowering the protrusion G5221c downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked bars G521a and G521b can be released.

  Here, when the protrusion G5221c is slid upward and the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, the protrusion G5221c is moved to the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 93). ).

  According to the above configuration, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion G5221c, thereby stopping the locking plate G5221 from sliding. The locking between the portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked bars G521a and G521b can be prevented from being released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so as not to be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the projection G5221c of the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, The locking of the portions G5221a and G5221b to the locked bars G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper door mechanism DU to the cabinet G can be released.

  Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to unlock the lower door lock mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and then unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. Security can be increased. In addition, security can be enhanced in the upper space of the cabinet G more than in the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than in the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

  In order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, there is an advantage that the key is easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.

  In addition, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be hooked on the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the hooks are released. Thus, the upper door mechanism DU can be locked to the upper space of the cabinet G in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  In addition, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end and is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so that the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD greatly. Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and it is possible to enhance security.

  As shown in FIG. 98, between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is employed. Accordingly, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be closed quietly with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. Thus, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between power supply device DE and speaker DD25L)
As shown in FIG. 99, a speaker DD25L (corresponding to an acoustic device) is provided on the lower part of the lower side of the lower door DD1 (corresponding to the door) of the lower door mechanism DD (the lower space side of the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing)). Is provided. On the other hand, a power supply device DE (corresponding to a power supply device) is provided in a lower space (corresponding to the inside of the housing) of the cabinet G. The speaker DD25L and the power supply device DE are arranged to face each other when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 101).

  The power supply device DE is disposed on the left side of the hopper mechanism HP when viewing the inside of the cabinet G from the front. The power supply device DE plays a role of converting AC voltage power supplied from the outside into DC voltage power required in each unit, and supplying the converted power to each device constituting the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 100, on the front side of the power supply device DE, there is provided a power switch DE1 for switching whether or not to supply power (ON / OFF) to the equipment constituting the gaming machine 1. Further, two slide rails DE3 are provided on both sides of the power switch DE1 in a vertical direction. The switch cover DE2 is slidable on the slide rail DE3 in the vertical direction. Thus, when the switch cover DE2 is slid downward along the slide rail DE3, the switch cover DE2 covers the power switch DE1 as shown in FIG. 99 (the closed state of the switch cover DE2). On the other hand, when the switch cover DE2 is slid upward along the slide rail DE3, the power switch DE1 is exposed as shown in FIG. 100 (the open state of the switch cover DE2). By providing the switch cover DE2 in this way, it is possible to prevent direct access to the power switch DE1 from the outside, thereby enhancing security.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a that is inclined so as to protrude downward from above.

  On the other hand, a convex portion DD25L1 (corresponding to an engagement portion) protruding toward the power supply device DE is formed on the back side (the surface facing the power supply device DE) of the speaker DD25L, as shown in FIG. The convex portion DD25L1 has an inclined surface DD25La that is inclined so as to project upward from below.

  In the speaker DD25L, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G, the convex portion DD25L1 interrupts above (sliding path) above the switch cover DE2 when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, and switches the switch. The cover DE2 is formed at a position for restricting the cover DE2 from sliding upward.

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 interrupts the sliding path (moving path) of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is closed. The opening state can be restricted. On the other hand, by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 is released, so that the switch cover DE2 is slid upward and the power switch is turned on. It is possible to switch from the closed state where the operation of DE1 is not possible to the open state where the power switch DE1 is operable.
Thereby, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened, an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE can be prevented to enhance security.

  Further, by sliding the switch cover DE2 up and down, it is possible to switch between the open state and the closed state. This makes it easy to access the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.

  Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the speaker DD25L has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased by an amount protruding toward the power supply device DE, and the sound quality can be improved simultaneously. .

Further, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at positions facing each other, and the sliding of the switch cover DE2 is performed. Movement can be regulated.
On the other hand, if the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position displaced upward from the closed state. The switch cover DE2 slides downward and moves to the closed position because the switch DE2 slides downward to come into contact with the inclined surface DE2a of the cover DE2.
As a result, even if the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is closed and the switch cover DE2 is closed, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is attached to the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the closing operation of the lower door mechanism DD because the switch is pressed in contact with the lower door mechanism DD.

(Maximum BET button DD8)
The maximum BET button DD8 (corresponding to a button unit) is arranged on a second pedestal portion DD2b (corresponding to a pedestal portion). An opening DD2ba is formed in the second pedestal DD2b, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105, the opening DD2ba has a predetermined depth, has a side wall DD2bc so as to surround the opening DD2ba, and a flange DD2bb is formed at the bottom of the side wall DD2bc. As shown in FIG. 102, the maximum BET button DD8 includes an operation unit DD81 and a locking unit DD82.

(Operation unit DD81)
As shown in FIG. 106, the operation unit DD81 includes a first member DD812, a button base DD811, a spring DD813 (corresponding to an elastic member), a photo sensor DD814, a second member DD815, and a button base cover DD816. Have.

  The first member DD812 has a button base DD8123, a button cover DD8121, and a button sheet DD8122. As shown in FIG. 106, the first member DD812 is arranged so as to be able to be pushed down (in the direction A).

  The button cover portion DD8121 is arranged above the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 is engaged with and fixed to an edge of the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 has a function as a cover that constitutes a surface directly pressed by the player.

  The button sheet DD8122 is arranged between the button base DD8123 and the button cover DD8121. The button sheet DD8122 is made of a flat plate-shaped light-transmitting resin sheet and has a light distribution property.

  The button base DD8123 is arranged above the button base DD811. The button base DD8123 has two cylindrical sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b on the lower side. A cylindrical screw hole is formed below the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. A spring holding portion DD8124c for holding the spring DD813 is formed between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The spring holding portion DD8124c is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the spring DD813.

  Between the button base DD8123 and the button base DD811 is provided a spring DD813 having an elastic force that repels a force that pushes the first member DD812 downward (A direction). The spring DD813 is formed by a coil spring formed in a cylindrical shape. One end of the spring DD813 is arranged and held on the outer periphery of the spring holding portion DD8124c. The other end of the spring DD813 is in contact with the lower part of the button base DD811. For this reason, the spring DD813 repels the force of the player pushing down the button cover portion DD8121 of the first member DD812 downward (in the direction A).

  The button base DD811 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose upper surface is opened. Two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed in the lower part of the button base DD811. The through-holes DD811a and DD811b are open in the up-down direction, so that the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b can slide, respectively. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. A flange DD8111 protruding outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the button base DD811. The flange DD8111 contacts the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba provided in the second pedestal portion DD2b (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD8111 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the operation unit DD81 is inserted from above the opening DD2ba, the portion including the bottom and four side surfaces of the button base DD811 is not included. Pass through the opening DD2ba, but the flange DD8111 is regulated by contacting the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba.

  The button base DD811 is provided with a stop plate DD8112 that protrudes in the horizontal direction on a side surface portion DD8113 extending from the side surface of the button base DD811. Further, two communication holes DD816a and DD816b are formed in the side surface portion DD8113. The shape and area of the bottom surface portion of the button cover portion DD8121 are the same as the shape and area of the upper surface portion of the button base DD811 including the flange DD8111. That is, the button cover DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps in the vertical direction.

  The second member DD815 is arranged below the button base DD811 (direction A). The second member DD815 has cylindrical screw holes DD815a and DD815b. The sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the button base portion DD8123 pass through the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the lower portions of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extend from the through holes DD811a and DD8124b. And the screw holes DD815a and DD815b formed in the second member DD815 are screwed together with the screws DD8152a and DD8152b. As a result, the second member DD815 is attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The second member DD815 has a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

  Further, in the second member DD815, a thin plate-shaped light shielding piece DD8151 that protrudes in the vertical direction is provided between the screw hole DD815a and the screw hole DD815b.

  Below the second member DD815 (direction A), there is provided a photosensor DD814 in which a light emitting unit DD814a and a light receiving unit DD814b face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. The predetermined interval is set to be larger than the horizontal thickness of the light shielding piece DD8151. A transmission connector is provided on the back of the photosensor DD814, and is connected by an external connector DD85.

  The button base cover DD816 is formed in a box shape with the lower side of the button base DD811, and the side facing the side face DD8113 opened. Above the button base cover DD816, claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are formed. The button base cover DD816 is fixed to the lower portion of the button base DD811. The button base cover DD816 has two screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  When the player presses the first member DD812 downward (direction A), the second member DD815 also moves downward (direction A). By the movement of the second member DD815, the light blocking piece DD8151 interrupts between the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b, and blocks light emitted from the light emitting unit DD814a to the light receiving unit DD814b. Thereby, it is detected that the player has operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  Then, when the player stops pressing the first member DD812 downward (in the direction A), the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813 (the first member DD812 moves to the initial position). Will return). When the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813, the upper surface of the second member DD815 contacts the lower surface of the stop plate DD8112, and the second member DD815 and the first member DD812 return too upward. Regulate that.

  As a result, when the second member DD815 moves upward, the light shielding piece DD8151 that has been interrupted between the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b also moves upward, and light is emitted from the light emitting unit DD814a to the light receiving unit DD814b. The light blocking is released. Thereby, it is detected that the player has not operated the maximum BET button DD8.

  According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and the sliding portion DD8124a of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.・ Attached to DD8124b. This allows the second member DD815 to prevent the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, thereby preventing unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8.

  Further, the light-shielding piece DD8151 allows the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b to slide through the two through-holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 in response to the player pressing the first member DD812. A light-shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the DD811a and DD811b cuts off between the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b. can do.

(Locking part DD82)
As shown in FIG. 103, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape, and connects the opening DD821 formed on the upper surface of the locking portion DD82 and the connector DD85 to the back surface of the operation portion DD81. It has an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82.

  A flange DD823 projecting outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the opening DD821 of the locking portion DD82, and further, the flange DD823 projects vertically outside the flange DD823 so as to surround the flange DD823. An enclosing frame DD824 is formed. The flange DD823 contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD823 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the locking portion DD82 is pressed from below the opening DD2ba, the flange DD823 portion contacts the lower surface of the flange DD2bb. It is regulated by contact.

  On the inner wall side of the locking portion DD82, a locking piece DD825 for positioning the operation portion DD81 when the operation portion DD81 is stored is formed. In addition, communication holes DD826a and DD826b provided on both sides of an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82 are formed.

  The operating portion DD81 is inserted into the opening DD2ba from above, and the locking portion DD82 is attached to the operating portion DD81 from below the opening DD2ba in a state where the flange DD8111 is in contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb. , The flange DD823 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba. The two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively (see FIG. 104).

  According to the above configuration, the two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively, thereby locking the operation unit DD81. The portion DD82 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b via the opening DD2ba. Further, since the operation unit DD81 has the flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from dropping from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. In addition, since the locking portion DD82 also has the flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from going out of the cabinet G from inside the opening DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

In addition, since the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps in the vertical direction, when the button cover portion DD8121 is viewed from above, the button base portion DD811 is hidden by the button cover portion DD8121, and the external In addition, only the button cover part DD8121 pressed by the player can be shown. Thereby, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
In addition, the button cover portion DD8121 has a structure in which the shape of the bottom surface is smaller than the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811, and the button cover portion DD811 has a structure that can more easily prevent unauthorized intrusion through the gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b. be able to.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device M1)
(Lower door mechanism DD)
As shown in FIG. 107, the lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening substantially in the center of the upper part. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is mounted on the back surface of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on each outer peripheral surface. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (one horizontal line) so that they can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. On the reels RL, RC, RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c that are substantially horizontal are formed. A medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals is provided in the first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening through which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an active line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of inserted medals.

  A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). Note that the touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a type that detects contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or of another type or structure (such as an in-cell structure).

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface). On the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games is displayed as the game progresses, and the selection by the player is performed. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting an input is displayed.

  In the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) corresponding to the effect related to the game as the game progresses. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing effect, or a jog dial or a push button as a dedicated attachment may be provided. Further, the function of the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by distributing its functions to a display unit A or the like to be described later.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 for rotating the reels RL, RC, RR by the operation of the player and for starting the variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4 is provided. The start lever DD6 is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by a pressing operation (stop operation) by the player. , DD7C, DD7R.

  The C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is for switching the credit / payout of medals obtained by the player by a push button operation. In a state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are discharged from a medal payout opening DD14 (cancel chute) provided in a coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving section DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name indicating the model of the gaming machine 1, various patterns, and the like are drawn by printing.

  Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sounds such as voices and music. Further, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are disposed on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of paid-out medals and the number of credited remaining medals at the time of winning. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, so a credit number of 50 or less is displayed. When the maximum number of medals of 50 has been credited, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout exit DD14 as they are. Further, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may include a touch panel on the front surface.

(Relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 108, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 is configured to include a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the lower door DD1 (corresponding to a door) is provided to be capable of opening and closing with respect to a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing). As shown in FIG. 110, the reel unit RU (corresponding to symbol display means) is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside of the cabinet G (lower space side)).

  The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on a command signal output from a start lever DD6 and stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (corresponding to command means). To stop the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR.

  By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 The work for assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling can be easily performed.

  In addition, the main control board MS is an important component for controlling the game, and requires measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, it is difficult to remove it. It can be configured.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be arranged on the far side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS can be ensured, and even if an unauthorized intrusion is made through a gap between the lower door DD1, the vehicle reaches the main control board MS. And security can be improved.

  In addition, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when the specifications of the gaming machine 1 are changed, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, and the reels RL and RL of the reel unit RU are changed. The change of the RC and RR symbols and the change of the game content can be performed collectively.

  Specifically, the attachment of the main control board MS to the reel unit RU will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 111, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact surface RU9a at the rear. The substrate contact surface part RU9a is a plane part extending in the left-right direction at the center in the vertical direction on the back side of the reel unit RU. The normal direction of the flat portion substantially coincides with the front-back direction. Further, the reel unit RU has an upper flat portion RU9b above the center right of the substrate contact surface portion RU9a. The upper plane part RU9b is a plane part whose surface direction matches the substrate contact surface part RU9a, and has a screw hole at the upper left. Further, the reel unit RU has a mounting portion RU9c below the substrate contact surface portion RU9a, the length of which is substantially equal to the length of the substrate contact surface portion RU9a in the left-right direction. The mounting portion RU9c includes a substrate contact surface portion RU9a, a wall surface having the same plane direction as the upper flat surface portion RU9b, a bottom surface bent and extended from a lower portion of the wall surface in a horizontal rearward direction, and a rear surface of the bottom surface. And an inclined portion which is bent from an end and extended with an inclination upward and backward. The receiver RU9c has screw holes at both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact surface part RU9a and a plane part whose surface direction matches the upper plane part RU9b.

  The main control board MS is mounted on the bottom surface of the mounting portion RU9c, and comes into surface contact with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a, the upper flat surface portion RU9b, the wall surface portion of the mounting portion RU9c, and other flat surface portions having the same surface direction. It is positioned in the state where it was done. Then, in this state, the screws are screwed into the screw holes of the upper flat portion RU9b and the mounting portion RU9c via the through holes formed in the main control board MS. As a result, the main control board MS is stably attached to the board contact surface RU9a, the upper flat part RU9b, and the mounting part RU9c arranged on the same plane.

  Next, the attachment of the reel unit RU to the lower door DD1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, the reel unit RU has a reel hinge RU21 at the left end. The reel hinge RU21 is a U-shaped flat plate member in a plan view, and the normal direction of the plane substantially coincides with the front-back direction. The reel hinge RU21 has an upper hinge RU21a formed downward from the upper left end. The reel hinge RU21 has a lower hinge RU21b formed downward from the lower left end. The upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b are formed such that their central axes coincide.

  At the upper left side on the inner side of the lower door DD1, a reel hinge base DD18 extending from the upper end to the center is provided. The reel hinge base DD18 has an upper hinge base DDR18a and an upper hinge base DDR18b at positions corresponding to the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. The upper hinge base DDR18a and the lower hinge base DDR18b can be inserted with the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b, respectively. It is rotatably supported.

  The reel unit RU has an upper right lock portion RU22 protruding rightward at the upper right end. The reel unit RU has a lower lock portion RU23 that protrudes downward from substantially the center of the lower end portion. The upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 can be locked in a state of being in contact with the inner wall surface of the lower door DD1. That is, when the reel unit RU is rotated in the direction of the lower door DD1 and brought into contact with the lower door DD1, the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are brought into contact with the lower door DD1. The upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 are locked to the lower door DD1, so that the reel unit RU can be maintained in a rotation impossible state. A knob member is rotatably provided on the rear side of the upper right lock unit RU22 and the lower lock unit RU23. By rotating the knob member with the upper right lock unit RU22 and the lower lock unit RU23 engaged with the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be switched between a rotatable state and a locked state. It has become. Note that the reel unit RU may be lockable to the lower door DD1 in a locked state. Further, the main control board MS may be lockable to the reel unit RU.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel device RU)
As shown in FIG. 113, the reel device RU has three reel units RU1, a reel base RU2, and a reel cover RU3. The three reel units RU1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (one horizontal line). The left reel unit RU1 has a reel RL, the central reel unit RU1 has a reel RC, and the right reel unit RU1 has a reel RR. Each reel unit RU1 is independently supported by a reel base RU2. The reel base RU2 is formed in a box shape having an open surface, and accommodates each reel unit 1 in a partially exposed state. A reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2 by screwing so as to cover the open surface. When the reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2, the outer peripheral surface from the center to the upper part of the reels RL, RC, RR in each reel unit RU1 is exposed from the reel base RU2. As a result, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, RR become visible.

  The reel unit RU1 has a motor mounting plate RU11 that supports the reel shaft and is a support plate on which a motor serving as a driving force of the reel is mounted. The motor mounting plate RU11 is arranged on the right side of the reel unit RU1, and rotatably supports the reel. That is, they are arranged so as to be sandwiched between the adjacent reel units RU1. The motor mounting plate RU11 has a front part RU11a forming a front part. The front portion RU11a is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Note that the bow shape is a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc.

  Specifically, the motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view and a shape continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc defining the arc in a side view (for example, in a side view). (Substantially rectangular shape) rear portion RU11b. Note that the motor mounting plate RU11 may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member.

  The front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in side view has substantially the same size as the front portion of the opposing reel, and it is desirable that both overlap. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 is almost completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion by the front portion of the support plate. Is desirably almost completely covered. As a result, it is possible to achieve a good balance between providing the motor mounting plate RU11 with a function as a partition plate and maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1)
The reel unit RU1 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the three reel units RU1 have the same configuration, only the right reel unit RU1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a reel index RU111, a sensor unit RU112, a motor drive unit RU113, and a drive control board RU114 are provided on the motor mounting plate RU11 of the reel unit RU1. The reel index RU111 is arranged at the center of the motor mounting plate RU11. The sensor unit RU112 is arranged behind the reel index RU111. The motor drive unit RU113 is arranged above the reel index RU111.

  The reel RR has a reel drum RR1. The reel drum RR1 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a reel band RR2 on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed. In the reel drum RR1, a frame for increasing rigidity is disposed on a surface on the left side (opposite to the motor mounting plate RU11) of the cylindrical portion, radially from the center and concentrically smaller than the outer circumferential circle. . This frame has a shape in which the center is depressed rightward (inside of the cylinder). On the reel drum RR1, a rotary gear RR3 having the same central axis is arranged on the left side (frame side) inside the cylindrical shape. That is, inside the reel drum RR1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, and the motor drive unit RU113 are arranged on the right side (motor mounting plate RU11) of the rotating gear RR3. Further, on the reel drum RR1, a backlight RR4 that illuminates the symbols arranged on the stopped and displayed reel RR from behind is arranged on the radially inner wall surface inside the cylindrical shape.

  The motor driving unit RU113 has a stepping motor and a driving gear meshing with the rotating gear RR3, and power from the stepping motor for rotating the reel RR is transmitted by the rotating gear RR3. The stepping motor is rotated by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. That is, it is possible to specify how much the reel RR has been rotated (the degree of displacement) from the reference position, based on the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. The start and stop of rotation of the motor drive unit RU113 are controlled by the drive control board RU114 according to a control signal from the main control board MS. Specifically, a start command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to an operation on a start command means such as the start lever DD6 by the player. The main control board MS transmits a start control signal to the drive control board RU114 upon detection of the start command signal. The drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 when the start control signal is detected, and the reel RR is rotated. As a result, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are variably displayed. In addition, a stop command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to the operation of the stop command means such as the stop button DD7R by the player. The main control board MS transmits a stop control signal to the drive control board RU114 upon detection of the stop command signal. Upon detecting the stop control signal, the drive control board RU114 drives the motor drive unit RU113 to stop the reel RR. Thus, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are stopped and displayed.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1: reel index RU111)
The reel index RU111 has a reel shaft RU1111, a detection piece RU1112, and a connection plate RU1113. The reel shaft RU1111 is rotatable about the left-right direction in the reel index RU111. The reel shaft RU1111 can be connected and fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotating gear RR3 at the left end, and is rotated with the rotation of the rotating gear RR3. That is, when the reel RR is rotated by the motor driving unit RU113, the reel shaft RU1111 is rotated. The detection piece RU1112 is formed in a figure shape surrounded by an arc-shaped outer periphery and an arc-shaped inner periphery in a side view. In the present embodiment, the angles of the arcs of the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 are set to 180 degrees, respectively, and are formed by cutting a disk having a concentric opening at the center by a line passing through the center point. ing. A disc-shaped connection plate RU1113 is connected to the inside of the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 along the inner periphery. The connection plate RU1113 has a circular hole at the center, and the reel shaft RU1111 is inserted and fixed. Thus, the reel index RU111 is connected to the rotating gear RR3 via the reel shaft RU1111. Therefore, the reel index RU111 and the rotating gear RR3 are formed separately from each other. Note that it is preferable to use a material having high slidability for the rotating gear RR3. Further, it is preferable to use a material having an excellent antistatic function for the detection piece RU1112 in the reel index RU111.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 115, the detection piece RU1112 is moved around the rotation axis of the reel shaft RU1111 along with the rotation of the reel shaft RU1111 (reel RR), as indicated by an arrow in the figure, as shown by the arrow in the drawing. It is to be rotated along. The sensor unit RU112 is disposed on the motor mounting plate RU11 such that a detection point RUP indicated by an asterisk in the figure on the circumference RUD is a detection position. That is, the sensor unit RU112 detects whether the detection piece RU1112 exists at the detection point RUP.

  With reference to FIG. 116, the relationship between the detection piece RU1112 and the detection state will be described. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the rotation of the reel RR is continued. First, in step SRU1, one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (on-edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 is started by the sensor unit RU112. At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (first reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected to the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected. Thereafter, while the detection piece RU1112 continues to exist at the detection point RUP, the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 is continued (SRU2). Then, the other end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (off-edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112 is terminated (SRU3). At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (second reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected to the state where it is not detected. That is, the detection piece RU1112 is continuously detected by the sensor unit RU112 until the position of the reel RR becomes the first reference position and then becomes the second reference position. Thereafter, the state in which the sensor RU112 does not detect the detection piece RU1112 continues until one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP again (SRU4).

  In this manner, the first reference position and the second reference position are alternately detected every time the reel RR makes a half turn, and the position of the reel RR is specified based on the detected first reference position or the second reference position. Is done. Specifically, the main control board MS is supplied from the drive control board RU114 based on the control of the main control board MS with respect to the immediately preceding reference position (first reference position or second reference position). By adding a displacement corresponding to the number of drive pulses, the position of the reel RR is specified. As described above, the main control board MS determines whether the reel RR has reached the reference position (the first reference position or the second reference position) based on the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112. Functions as a specific means. In addition, the main control board MS and the drive control board RU114 function as reel position specifying means for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel RR from a reference position (first reference position or second reference position) due to rotation. I do.

  As described above, the detection piece RU1112 is formed in the shape of a figure surrounded by the arc-shaped outer periphery and the arc-shaped inner periphery, and the angle of the arc is set to 180 degrees. Therefore, the first reference position and the second reference position on the reel RR are opposed to each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel RR with the central axis interposed therebetween.

  As described above, by detecting that the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 is changed to a state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112, the first reference position of the reel RR is determined. Can be identified. In this way, by detecting that the state where the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 is changed to the state where the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112, the second reference of the reel RR is detected. The position can be specified. Thus, the reference position of the reel can be detected twice while the reel RR makes one rotation, and the same effect as in the case where two sensors are provided can be obtained.

  In addition, on the circumferential path on which the detecting piece rotates, the area includes a region from the position corresponding to the first reference position to the position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and corresponds to the second reference position. The shape of the sensing piece is not limited as long as it has a shape that does not include an area extending from the position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1: sensor unit RU112)
As shown in FIG. 117, the left side surface (reel mounting side surface) of the motor mounting plate RU11 is screw-fastened so that the sensor unit RU112 is placed on the bottom surface. The sensor unit RU112 has a sensor RU1121 and a pedestal member RU1122. The sensor RU1121 is a transmission-type sensor that detects a detection piece RU1112 that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel RR. The sensor RU1121 is formed to have a concave cross section with the center depressed, and is provided such that the direction of the depression is orthogonal to the center axis of the reel shaft RU1111 of the reel index RU111. The sensor RU1121 is attached to the motor mounting plate RU11 via the base member RU1122 such that the edge of the rotation surface of the detection piece RU1112 of the reel index RU111 passes through the space inside the recess of the sensor RU1121.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the pedestal member RU1122 has a pedestal base RU1122g having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and a pedestal column RU1122h protruding leftward from the center of the pedestal base RU1122g. I have. The pedestal base RU1122g has a shape in which a semicircle is extended in a vertical direction of a rectangular flat plate. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b penetrating in the left-right direction at upper and lower positions. The pedestal base RU1122g has a rectangular shape, the front side of which is formed in a concave shape, and has a protrusion RU1122j projecting rightward at the center of the concave side edge. The pedestal base RU1122g has a rectangular portion, the rear side of which is formed in a convex shape, and has a protruding portion RU1122k that projects rightward in a columnar shape at the center of the convex side edge.

  The pedestal column portion RU1122h has a plane having a vertical direction at the left end, and has screw holes RU1122c and RU1122d at positions above and below the plane. In the pedestal column RU1122h, the plane at the left end protrudes forward from the center in the vertical direction. The pedestal column RU1122h has protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f that are arranged in the front-rear direction at the protruding portion and protrude leftward in a cylindrical shape.

(Mounting of base member RU1122 to motor mounting plate RU11)
The motor mounting plate RU11 has fitting holes RU11e and RU11f formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122f and RU1122g on the base member RU1122. By fitting the protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k into the fitting holes RU11e and RU11f, respectively, the pedestal member RU1122 is positioned with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11. In the motor mounting plate RU11, screw holes RU11c and RU11d are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b in the base member RU1122. The screw RU1124a is screwed into the screw hole RU1122a and the screw hole RU11c, and the screw RU1124b is screwed into the screw hole RU1122b and the screw hole RU11d from the pedestal member RU1122 to the right. The base member RU1122 is screwed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the mounting position of the pedestal member RU1122 with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in the motor mounting plate RU11, the screw holes RU11c and the screw holes RU11d are arranged on a straight line RUDA. A fitting hole RU11e and a fitting hole RU11f are arranged at two points on a straight line RUDB substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are located on the opposite sides of the straight line RUDA. The straight line RUDB is a straight line passing through a center obtained by bisecting a line connecting the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d. Here, the fitting hole RU11f has a longitudinal direction in the direction of the straight line RUDB. Accordingly, an error in the interval in molding the two positioning protrusions in the pedestal member RU1122 can be allowed. The longitudinal direction of the fitting hole RU11f is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of the rotation of the detection piece RU1112 at the detection position of the sensor RU1121. This makes it possible to prevent the sensor RU 1121 from erroneously detecting the reference position even when the fitting hole RU 11f having a longitudinal direction is displaced from the pedestal member RU 1122.

(Attaching the sensor RU1121 to the base member RU1122)
The sensor RU1121 is engaged with a plane at the left end of the pedestal member RU1122, and has a plane substantially equal in shape to the plane at the left end of the pedestal member RU1122. That is, the plane located at the right end of the sensor RU 1121 has a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and protrudes forward from the center in the vertical direction. The pedestal column part RU1122h is formed with fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f that are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction at the projecting portion. In addition, screw holes RU1121a and RU1121b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at upper and lower positions on the plane. The screw hole RU1121b is formed in a long hole shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f of the pedestal member RU1122, and the sensor RU1121 is positioned with respect to the pedestal member RU1122 by being inserted respectively. The sensor RU 1121 is configured such that the screw RU 1123a is screwed into the screw hole RU 1121a and the screw hole RU 1122c from the sensor RU 1121 side to the right, and the screw RU 1123b is screwed into the screw hole RU 1121b and the screw hole RU 1122d. The sensor RU1121 is screwed to the RU1122.

  Here, the mounting position of the sensor RU 1121 with respect to the base member RU 1122 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 121, in the base member RU1122, the screw holes RU1122c and the screw holes RU1122d are arranged on a straight line RUDC. Then, a protrusion RU1122e and a protrusion RU1122f are arranged at two points on a straight line RUDD substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDC. Further, the protrusion RU1122e and the protrusion RU1122f are located on the side where the sensor RU1121 detects the detection piece RU1112 with respect to the straight line RUDC. The straight line RUDD is a straight line passing through a center obtained by bisecting a line segment connecting the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d. Here, the screw hole RU1122b of the sensor RU1121 screwed together with the screw hole RU1122d has a longitudinal direction in the direction of the straight line RUDC. Thereby, an error in the interval in forming the two screwing locations in the sensor RU1121 can be allowed.

(Upper door mechanism DU)
As shown in FIG. 122, a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing) rotatably supports an upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to a door) at a left end portion. The upper door mechanism DU and the cabinet G are connected by an upper hinge mechanism UH. As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the upper hinge mechanism UH is a slide member UH1 attached to the left end of the upper door mechanism UD. And a shaft member UH2 attached to the left end of the upper space of the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the slide member UH1 has one plate bent at three places to form a groove UH11. The groove UH11 is provided with a bearing mechanism UH12, a positioning portion UH14, an engagement protrusion UH15, a bearing mechanism UH13, and an engagement protrusion UH16 from above (U direction).

  The bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 have a rectangular shape and are attached to the slide member UH1 by screws. At the bottoms of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, there are formed bearing portions UH121 and UH131 that are overlapped and engaged with shaft portions UH21 and UH22 described later. The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are opened in a substantially circular shape at the bottoms of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, and have a shape in which the size of the mouth is reduced upward from the periphery of the opening. The direction in which the centers of the openings of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 face upward along the groove UH11 is defined as an axis UH121A.

  The positioning portion UH14 has a curved shape such that the positioning portion UH14 comes into contact with a curved surface of a support portion UH25 of the shaft member UH2 to be described later, so that the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121.

  The engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 have a thin plate shape that projects horizontally from the groove UH11. The engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 play a role of engaging with engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 described later.

  The shaft member UH2 is formed by bending a single plate. The shaft member UH2 includes, from above, a shaft portion UH21 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH25, a support portion UH25, an engagement recess UH23, a shaft portion UH22 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH26, and a support portion UH26. , An engagement recess UH24.

  The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 have a conical shape. The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 serve to overlap and engage with the bearing portions UH121 and UH131.

  The support portions UH25 and UH26 are provided on the shaft member UH2, and the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 are provided on the upper surface. Further, the side surface of the support portion UH25 has a curved shape, and the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121 by contacting the curved surface of the positioning portion UH14.

  The engagement plates UH27 and UH28 extending from the side surfaces of the support portions UH25 and UH26 are formed with engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 that are opened horizontally. The engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 play a role of engaging with the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16.

  Then, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are slid so as to cover the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G from above from below and engaged by overlapping. The upper door mechanism DU can be attached to the cabinet G. At this time, it is desirable that the upper door mechanism DU be mounted with the upper door mechanism DU opened at 90 ° with respect to the cabinet G so that the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 do not engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 protrude toward the cabinet G, but the protrusion height is such that the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G (FIG. 122) is the height at which the engagement of the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 is released. Thus, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are moved from the shaft portion UH21 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G to the axis line. By sliding above the UH121A, the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G in a state where the restriction on the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is released. Becomes

  If the height of the projections of the engaging projections UH15 and UH16 is lower than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU can be set at an angle smaller than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G at an angle of less than 60 °. The restriction on the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G. On the other hand, if the height of the protrusions of the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 is made higher than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU can be formed at an angle larger than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G at an angle of more than 60 °. The restriction on the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G.

According to the above configuration, until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle (60 ° in the present embodiment) with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24. , Restricts the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 from sliding along the axis UH121A. Accordingly, the release of the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 can be restricted, and the removal of the upper door mechanism DU from the cabinet G can be locked.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 move to the axis UH121A. It can slide along. As a result, the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.
Further, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (opening of 90 °).

  As shown in FIG. 125, the upper door mechanism UD has a mechanism that emits light in the upper and left and right regions of the upper display window UD1 that transmits the image of the display unit A to the front. Specifically, a top panel mechanism HA disposed above the upper display window UD1, an upper left panel mechanism HB disposed in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, and an upper right disposed in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1. A panel mechanism HC, a left lateral panel mechanism HD disposed above the upper display window UD1 in the left direction, a right lateral panel mechanism HE disposed right above the upper display window UD1, and a left direction of the upper display window UD1. It has a left front panel mechanism HF arranged at the lower part, and a right front panel mechanism HG arranged at the right lower part of the upper display window UD1. Details of each of the panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 126, a panel base HH that forms the framework of the upper door mechanism UD is provided. On the front side of the panel base HH, the above-described panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided. On the other hand, on the back side of the panel base HH, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided. The upper door key receiving member HK is screwed to the right side of the panel base HH. The upper door hinge member HM is screwed to the left side of the panel base HH. The center frame HL is arranged horizontally, and a right end and a left end are connected to lower ends of an upper door key receiving member HK and an upper door hinge member HM, respectively. A transparent panel UD11 is provided on the upper door key receiving member HK, the upper door hinge member HM, and the center frame HL. The transparent panel UD11 can be attached from behind by screwing.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Decoration unit HA1)
As shown in FIG. 127, the top panel mechanism HA has a decoration unit HA1 for decorating the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD while emitting light. The decoration unit HA1 forms a decoration protrusion protruding forward from the upper display window UD1. The decorative unit HA1 includes a seamless top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion. Accordingly, when a plurality of components are joined to form the light guide plate of the decorative unit HA1, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the components, but the seamless lens is used in the top lens light guide plate HA14 having the seamless structure. If so, it is possible to avoid a situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative projection formed by the decorative unit HA1 including the seamless top lens light guide plate HA14 has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, so that an external force is applied from a player or the like located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it is done, it is hard to cause deformation and breakage.

  In the decoration unit HA1, the rear end connected to the panel base HH substantially coincides with the width in the left-right direction of the upper door mechanism UD. It is formed in a shape having an apex at the center of the front end. That is, the decoration unit HA1 has a substantially isosceles triangular shape with the panel base HH side as the base.

  As a result, even if the bending moment increases as the decorative unit HA1 approaches the front end part away from the panel base HH, the decoration unit HA1 reduces the width in the left-right direction on the front end side to reduce the weight, thereby improving the rigidity and the rigidity. Strength has been increased. As a result, since the decoration unit HA1 has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located in front or the like, the decoration unit HA1 is unlikely to be deformed or damaged.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens cover HA11, a top design sheet cover HA12, a design sheet HA13, a top lens light guide plate HA14, and a top lens light guide plate base HA15 arranged in this order from the top. The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens left LED board HA17 and a top lens right LED board HA18. The top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the rear end of the decoration unit HA1. The top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 have a plurality of LEDs HA17a and HA18a at equal intervals in the left-right direction, and are installed so as to emit light forward from these LEDs HA17a and HA18a. .

  The top lens cover HA11 constitutes an upper wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as to transmit light. The top lens light guide plate HA14 is formed so as to take in the light from the top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 from the rear end face and uniformly emit the light from the front end face. Display is made on the top lens cover HA11 via the design sheet cover HA12. The top lens light guide plate base HA15 forms a lower surface wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The decoration unit HA1 forms a hollow portion with the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the top lens cover HA11, and houses the top design sheet cover HA12, the design sheet HA13, and the top lens light guide plate HA14 in this hollow portion. Thereby, the rigidity is increased in the form of a large second moment of area, as compared with the case where the top lens light guide plate base HA15, the top lens cover HA11, the top lens light guide plate HA14, and the like are simply laminated and formed into a plate shape. .

  Further, an opening HA15a is formed in the top lens light guide plate base HA15. The opening HA15a is disposed so as to face an LED substrate HA411 in a top lens described later. The opening portion HA15a is provided with a top lens LED board hidden member HA16. The top lens inside LED substrate hidden member HA16 functions as a reflector of the top lens inside LED substrate HA411 and opens and closes the opening portion HA15a. Functions as a window. Note that the top-height LED substrate hiding member HA16 may be formed so as to transmit part of the light from the top-lens LED board HA411.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the decoration unit HA1 has a front region curved downward. This allows the decoration unit HA1 to visually recognize the design by transmitting light to the upper front side and the front side of the upper door mechanism UD. The lower surface of the top lens light guide plate HA14 is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, when the light from the top lens left LED board HA17 and the top lens right LED board HA18 travels through the front area curved downward, a part of the light is reflected by the reflector on the back face. Can be changed obliquely downward on the front side.

  An irradiation light device B is arranged behind the decoration unit HA1. Here, since the decoration unit HA1 protrudes forward behind the decoration unit HA1, a large space is secured by the amount of the protrusion. Thereby, the decoration unit HA1 can expand the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the mirrors with respect to the irradiation light device B of the light reflection type using the mirrors provided in a large space. Furthermore, since the decoration unit HA1 has high rigidity and strength, it is possible to sufficiently protect the irradiation light device B.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the top lens cover HA11 in the decoration unit HA1 is supported by a decoration unit support mechanism HI in which a front area curved downward is horizontally arranged. The decorative unit support mechanism HI includes a horizontal protruding portion HA11a horizontally protruding rearward from the rear surface of the top lens cover HA11, a horizontal protruding portion HH1 horizontally protruding forward from the front surface of the panel base HH, and a horizontal protruding portion. A plurality of sets of connecting screws HH2 formed by screwing the portions HA11a and HH1 to each other are provided in the left-right direction.

  As a result, the decoration unit HA1 has the back surface of the front region curved downward and connected to the panel base HH via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism HI. The state is supported by the HI in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the decoration unit HA1 has a structure in which the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Left end light emitting mechanism HA2, right end light emitting mechanism HA3)
As shown in FIG. 130, the top panel mechanism HA includes a left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that emits a planar light at the left end area of the upper door mechanism UD, and a right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that emits a planar light at the right end area of the upper door mechanism UD. have. More specifically, the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 is disposed on the left rear side of the upper left speaker device UD2. The left end light emitting mechanism HA2 has a left LED substrate HA21. The left LED substrate HA21 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. On the substrate surface of the left LED substrate HA21, two LEDHAs 22 are arranged. These LEDHAs 22 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light with a light intensity of a predetermined level or more in the left area (the left end area of the upper door mechanism UD) of the upper left speaker device UD2. It has become.

  On the other hand, the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 is arranged on the right rear side of the upper right speaker device UD3. The right end light emitting mechanism HA3 has a right LED substrate HA31. The right LED substrate HA31 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LEDHAs 32 are arranged on the board surface of the right LED board HA31. These LEDHAs 32 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light in a right area (right end area of the upper door mechanism UD) of the upper right speaker device UD3 with a light intensity higher than a predetermined value. It has become.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4)
The top panel mechanism HA further has a central light emitting mechanism HA4. The center light emitting mechanism HA4 is arranged on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD between the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. The center light emitting mechanism HA4 is configured to emit light in a region where it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to emit light with a predetermined light intensity or more.

  More specifically, the center light emitting mechanism HA4 includes a first lighting mechanism HA41 that emits light in a left peripheral area on the left end area side and a right peripheral area on the right end area side, and a second lighting mechanism that emits light in a front end of the decorative unit HA1. HA42 and a third illuminating mechanism HA43 for emitting light from the lower side of the decorative unit HA1. In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the first illumination mechanism HA41 emits light in both the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first illumination mechanism HA41 may be configured to emit light in at least one of the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: First lighting mechanism HA41)
As also shown in FIG. 131, the first illumination mechanism HA41 has an LED substrate HA411 in the top lens which is arranged below the substantially central portion of the decoration unit HA1. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 guides the light emitted from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to the left peripheral area and the right peripheral area by the light guiding mechanism, so that the light is hardly guided by the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. Also in the region, it is configured to be able to emit light with a light intensity higher than a predetermined value. In other words, the first illumination mechanism HA41 includes a plurality of upper light sources LEDHA4111 provided on the upper surface of the top lens LED substrate HA411, and a plurality of upper lenses inside the top lens disposed so as to cover the lower surface and side surfaces of the top lens LED substrate HA411. And a reflector HA412. The top surface of the top lens middle LED board HA411 is covered with a top lens middle board LED cover member HA16 of the decoration unit HA1 in FIG. 127, and the top middle lens board hidden member HA16 reflects the light of the LEDHA4111. Functioning as

  On the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, a light-transmitting left light-guiding lens HA413 and a light-transmitting right light-guiding lens which guide the light from the LEDHA4111 to the left and right upper light guide areas to emit light in a planar manner. An upper light guide mechanism having a configuration in which the HA 414 and the HA 414 are arranged symmetrically about the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens is provided. Specifically, on the upper surface of the left end of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, the right end of the horizontally arranged left light guide lens HA 413 is arranged, and the light of the LED HA 4111 can be incident from the end of the right end. Have been. The left light guide lens HA413 has a left end located above the upper left speaker device UD2, and emits light upward from the middle to the left end, thereby forming an upper light guide on the center side from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD. The area is made to emit light.

  On the other hand, on the upper surface of the right end of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, the left end of the horizontally arranged right light guide lens HA 414 is arranged, and light from the LED HA 4111 can be incident from the end of the left end. The right light guide lens HA414 has a right end positioned above the upper right speaker device UD3, and emits light upward from the middle to the right end, thereby forming a region (upper side) from the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD to the center side. (Light guide region) to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens is provided with a lower light guide mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to the lower light guide region and emits light in a planar manner. . More specifically, a plurality of LEDHAs 4112 serving as lower light sources are provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. On the lower surface of the right end of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, the left end of a translucent right downlight lens HA415 that is horizontally arranged is arranged. I have. The right downlight lens HA415 has a right end positioned above the upper right speaker device UD3, and emits light downward from the middle to the right end, thereby lowering the center of the upper door mechanism UD from the left end region to the lower side of the center. The light region emits light. That is, the right downlight lens HA415 illuminates the area around the lower light guide area HA5d (see FIG. 125), which is the area in front of the upper right speaker device UD3 of the panel base HH, and surrounds the lower light guide area HA5d that is non-translucent. The light is emitted when the member functions as a reflector. The lower light guide mechanism includes a left downlight lens (not shown) having the same configuration as the right downlight lens HA415. The left downlight lens and the right downlight lens HA415 are arranged symmetrically about the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Second lighting mechanism HA42)
As shown in FIG. 131, the second illumination mechanism HA42 has an LED substrate HA421 on the center lens disposed below the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. A plurality of LEDHAs 4211 are provided on the upper surface of the center lens upper LEDHA 421. The lower surface of the LEDHA4211 is covered with a central lens reflector HA422.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the upper surface of the center lens upper LED substrate HA421 is covered with the top lens light guide plate base HA15. In addition, a translucent center lens A423 is disposed below the center lens upper LED substrate HA421. The center lens A423 is provided such that the upper end thereof exposes the center lens upper LED substrate HA421 from a gap between the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the panel base HH, and receives light of the LEDHA4211 from the end surface of the upper end, Light is emitted from the lower end surface formed and arranged along the lower end of the top lens light guide plate base HA15.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Third lighting mechanism HA43)
The third illuminating mechanism HA43 has a lower center LED board HA431 arranged behind the center lens upper LED board HA421. The lower center LED substrate HA431 is provided such that the normal direction of the front surface substantially matches the front direction. On the front surface of the lower center LED substrate HA431, a plurality of LEDs HA4311 are provided. In front of the lower center LED substrate HA431, a translucent lower lens HA432 is arranged. The lower center lens HA432 is provided below the panel base HH, and emits the light of the LEDHA 4311 in the lower area of the decoration unit HA1.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Left horizontal panel mechanism HD, right horizontal panel mechanism HE, left front panel mechanism HF, right front panel mechanism HG)
Hereinafter, a mechanism integrating the left horizontal panel mechanism HD and the left front panel mechanism HF will be described as a left panel mechanism HJ, and a mechanism integrating the right horizontal panel mechanism HE and the right front panel mechanism HG will be described as a right panel mechanism HK. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism HK function as light emitting units arranged on the side of the front surface of the screen mechanism D as an effect device. Since the left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism K are symmetrical with respect to each other with the screen mechanism D interposed therebetween, only the left panel mechanism HJ will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left panel mechanism HJ includes a partition mechanism HJ2 functioning as a partition member, an upper left side lens HJ3 functioning as a side translucent member, and a lower left lens HJ4 functioning as a front translucent member. , An inner light guide member HJ5. The left panel mechanism HJ has a left LED board HJ1 as a light source device described later, and light from the left LED board HJ1 is emitted to the outside from the upper left side lens HJ3, the lower left lens HJ4, and the left light guide plate HJ5. It is configured to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the left panel mechanism HJ includes an upper left side lens HJ3, a lower left lens HJ4, a partition plate HJ21 and a left LED board case HJ22 functioning as a partition mechanism HJ2, and a left LED. It has a substrate HJ1, a left light guide plate HJ51 functioning as an inner light guide member HJ5, and a left LED board cover HJ52.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is set so that the normal direction of the substrate surface substantially matches the front direction. Four LEDHJ11 and six LEDHJ12 are arranged on the front surface of the left LED substrate HJ1. These LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are set to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. Further, six LEDHJ13s are arranged on the surface of the left LED substrate HJ1 opposite to the surface on which the LEDHJ11 / LEDHJ12 are arranged. These LEDs HJ13 are set to emit light in the normal direction (backward direction) of the substrate surface.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the up-down direction, and the upper end region is formed wide in the right direction. The LEDs HJ12 are arranged in a row substantially uniformly along the left edge in the longitudinal direction from the upper end to the center. In the LEDHJ11, two sets are arranged in a line on a straight line inclined from the center to the lower left end with a wider interval than the set. Further, the LEDs HJ13 are arranged in a line substantially uniformly from the upper end to the lower end of the central region along the right edge of the surface opposite to the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

  The left LED board case HJ22 is a case that houses the left LED board HJ1 formed in the same shape as the left LED board HJ1 when viewed from the front from the front side. In the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ221 for passing light in the forward direction from the LED HJ11 are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LED HJ11. Further, in the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ222 for passing light in the forward direction from the LED HJ12 are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LED HJ12. That is, four through holes HJ221 are arranged on a straight line, and six through holes HJ222 are arranged on a straight line. The plane region HJ22a in which the four through holes HJ221 are formed and the plane region HJ22b in which the six through holes HJ222 are formed are formed by a bent line extending from the center left end to the upper end of the surface of the left LED board case HJ22. Are classified. The plane region HJ22a is set higher in the forward direction than the plane region HJ22b, and a step HJ22c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the partition plate HJ21 has a mountain shape having a vertex at a front end in a side view. Specifically, the partition plate HJ21 is formed in a substantially pyramid shape with the plane region HJ22b as the bottom surface. The partition plate HJ21 has an open bottom surface on the planar region HJ22b side and a left side surface. The upper wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with a downward inclination while decreasing the width in the left-right direction forward from the upper edge of the planar region HJ22b. Further, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the top with a slant leftward while the width in the vertical direction is reduced forward. Thus, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed to extend from the step HJ22c. That is, the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide light emitted from the left LED substrate HJ1 in the forward direction into the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

  The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed in a substantially triangular flat plate whose peripheral shape substantially coincides with the open left side surface of the partition plate HJ21. That is, the partition plate HJ21, the upper left side lens HJ3, and the left LED substrate HJ1 form an internal space HJ23 to which light is emitted from the LED HJ12. The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed of a material that can transmit light, and forms a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 exists in front of the LED HJ12. Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the LED HJ12 is reflected by the partition plate HJ21. Since the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 has an inclination, the light is reflected to light having at least a leftward component. Thus, the light reflected by the partition plate HJ21 reaches the upper left side lens HJ3. The upper left lens HJ3 is decorated such that the inner wall surface has a matrix of square pyramids having vertices inside. As a result, the light that has reached the upper left side lens HJ3 is irregularly refracted and transmitted outside. As described above, the partition mechanism HJ2 having the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light in the forward direction into two, and can guide the light divided into one in the lateral direction. Further, the upper left side lens HJ3 can transmit one of the light beams guided by the partition structure HJ2. The partition plate HJ21 is preferably white for increasing the reflectance, but is not limited to this.

  The lower left lens HJ4 is arranged in front of the left LED board case HJ22 so as to form an internal space HJ41 with the plane area HJ22a of the left LED board case HJ22. The lower left lens HJ4 is formed of a translucent material, and forms a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the front wall surface of the lower left lens HJ4 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ11. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED HJ11 reaches the lower left lens HJ4. The lower left lens HJ4 has a decoration in which the inner wall surface has a zigzag cross section in a side view. As a result, the light that has reached the lower left lens HJ4 is irregularly refracted and transmitted outside. As described above, the lower left lens HJ4 can transmit the light that is divided into the other by the partition structure HJ2. The decorative structure of the inner wall surface of the upper left lens HJ3 or the lower left lens HJ4 is not limited to this, but may be any as long as the incident light is diffused and emitted to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the left light guide plate HJ51 has a light incident portion HJ511, an optical path portion HJ512, and a light emitting portion HJ513. The left light guide plate HJ51 is formed of a translucent material. The light incident portion HJ511 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The light incident portion HJ511 has dents at two upper and lower portions, and has a projecting portion HJ511a extending in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction of each of the dents. The light incident portion HJ511 has a through hole HJ511b extending adjacent to the left side of the protruding portion HJ511a. The left LED board cover HJ52 has a shape that engages with the rear side surface of the light incident portion HJ511 of the left light guide plate HJ51. The left LED board cover HJ52 has a protruding portion HJ52a having a convex cross section extending in the up-down direction at the center in the left-right direction, and is fitted into the through-hole HJ511b. The left LED board cover HJ52 is formed of a non-translucent material.

  The protruding portion HJ511a is provided to face the LED HJ13 arranged on the left LED substrate HJ1. The light from the LED HJ13 enters from the front side of the protrusion HJ511a. The left light guide plate HJ51 has an inclined surface HJ511c in which the incident surface is inclined approximately 45 degrees to the right in the traveling direction of the incident light to the protrusion HJ511a. Since the inclined surface HJ511c is disposed so as to be in contact with the left LED board cover HJ52, the light incident on the protrusion HJ511a travels rightward after being reflected by the inclined surface HJ511c. The light traveling rightward passes through the optical path section HJ512 and reaches the light emitting section HJ513. The optical path portion HJ512 is formed so as to be bent backward from the right end of the light incident portion HJ511. The optical path portion HJ512 is set so that the normal direction is the right front direction. The light emitting section HJ513 is formed to be bent from the right end of the optical path section HJ512. The light emitting unit HJ513 is set so that the normal direction is the right front direction. In addition, the light emitting portion HJ513 is decorated in a zigzag shape in a front end cross section at the right end. As a result, the light that has reached the right end of the light emitting unit HJ513 is irregularly refracted, and is applied to the front surface of the screen mechanism D and the like.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Upper left panel mechanism HB, upper right panel mechanism HC)
Hereinafter, since the upper left panel mechanism HB and the upper right panel mechanism HC are symmetrical with respect to each other with respect to the left and right sides, only the upper left panel mechanism HB will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the upper left panel mechanism HB is fitted into a substantially triangular gap formed between the upper left end of the panel base HH and the left rear end of the top lens cover HA11 of the top panel mechanism HA. Placed in The upper left panel mechanism HB has a substantially right triangular shape having a right angle to the left front corner when viewed from the top, and has an upper surface HB1 whose width in the left-right direction is increased from the rear end to the front end. A tight screw HH4 can be screwed into the upper left end of the panel base HH from behind. The tight screw HH4 protrudes to the front of the panel base HH, and can be fitted to the upper left panel mechanism HB.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a fitting portion HB11 at the rear end, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted. Further, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a frame portion HB2 which is formed to fall downward from the left front end. The frame portion HB2 has a regulating portion HB21 at the lower end portion that projects rearward and is bent downward. When the upper left panel mechanism HB is attached to the panel base HH, the restricting portion HB21 extends to a position behind the fitting portion HH3 of the panel base HH engaged with the frame portion HB2. That is, since the restricting portion HB21 exists at the position behind the fitting portion HH3, the movement in the forward direction is restricted. The frame portion HB2 is decorated such that the inner wall surfaces are arranged in a triangular pyramid shape protruding inward, so that light from a light source from behind can be irregularly refracted.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper left panel mechanism HB has locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are arranged at positions adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 on the front side with respect to the fitting portion HH3, in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11, and from the placement position to the top lens cover HA11. It is formed so as to protrude in the direction toward it. Specifically, the locking piece HB12 is located in the rear end area of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes rightward substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB13 is located substantially at the center of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes right rearward at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB14 is located at the front end of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11 and projects rightward substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking pieces HB12 / HB13 / HB14 protrude from a position below the outer surface of the upper surface HB1.

  On the other hand, the top lens cover HA11 is formed with cutouts HA111, HA112, and HA113 that are engaged with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The cutout portions HA111, HA112, and HA113 are cutouts formed on the inner wall surface of the top lens cover HA11. The notch portions HA111, HA112, and HA113 are engaged with the top lens cover HA11 in a state where the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are engaged, and tight screws HH4 are fitted to the fitting portions HB11 via the panel base HH. By doing so, the movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB in the horizontal direction is restricted by the panel base HH and the top lens cover HA11. Further, the forward movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB is regulated by the regulating portion HB21.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has the following features.
(1-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22) via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). (Crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the (drive motor E25).
The arm (crank member E22) moves through the pin (slide member E26) through the pin (slide member E26) when the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiver (slide groove E22b). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates at the first position (front standby) in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22) while the operation is performed in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to E22b). Position) and a second position (front exposure position).
The pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) is used when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) toward the second position (front exposure position). No driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second position (front exposure position) to the pin position. When the operation is started toward the first position (front standby position), it is formed along a direction in which driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26). I have.

(1-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving motor E25).
The arm (crank member E22) slides through the slide groove (slide member E26) through the slide member (slide member E26) when the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the groove E22b), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in the first position (front) in association with the operation of the arm (crank member E22). Operate between a standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The slide groove (slide groove E22b) is at a point in time when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) toward the second position (front exposure position). The movement direction of the slide member (slide member E26) and the operation of the display means (front screen mechanism E1) from the second position (front exposure position) to the first position (front standby position). A groove wall surface (groove wall surface E22b1) is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) at the time of starting.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the slide groove E22b determines the moving direction of the slide member E26 when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and the front screen. The groove wall surface E22b1 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member E26 when the mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position to the front exposure position, no driving force is transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front exposure position to the front When the operation is started toward the standby position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member.

  Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is activated. Can be moderated. This makes it possible to smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1 and reduce the load on the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 from being damaged. Further, since the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 can be performed smoothly without devising the output of the pulse, there is no need to perform complicated excitation control, and the control load related to the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 is reduced. be able to.

  When the excitation control needs to be performed to smoothly drive the front screen mechanism E1, the design of the excitation control also needs to be changed when the size of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed. It takes time. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, since the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without performing the excitation control, such trouble does not occur, and the front screen mechanism E1 is not required. It is possible to easily cope with a change in specifications such as the size of the screen mechanism E1.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 is moved forward. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the operation is started from the exposure position to the front standby position. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, the slide is performed. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the groove E22b. However, in the present invention, when the front screen mechanism starts operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism starts operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, And the driving force may not be transmitted to the slide groove.

  Here, the position of the pin (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) when the display means is at the first position is referred to as a first predetermined position, and when the display means is at the second position. The position of the pin (the position relative to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a second predetermined position. In this case, the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts operating from the first position to the second position (actually regardless of the pin receiving portion, The direction in which the display means starts moving from the second position to the first position is the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion. (Independently of the pin receiving portion, the direction in which the pin actually moves) may be formed. The first predetermined position and the second predetermined position may be the same position or different positions.

  Further, the driving force transmitting mechanism includes a driving force transmitting member (for example, a gear) that rotates around a first straight line in accordance with the driving force generated from the power source, and the pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting member. May be. The first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the pin at the first predetermined position and a straight line connecting the intersection (for example, the center of the gear) of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is a direction perpendicular to a pin at the second predetermined position and a straight line connecting the intersection (for example, the center of the gear) of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body. May be formed.

  Thereby, the direction of the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the direction in which the pin is going to move when the display means starts operating from the first position to the second position (concentric with the driving force transmitting body). (The tangent direction of a circle whose radius is the distance between the center of the driving force transmitting body and the pin at the first predetermined position), and the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is indicated by the second The direction in which the pin is to move when the operation is started from the position (1) to the first position (a circle concentric with the driving force transmitting body, the center of the driving force transmitting body and the pin located at the second predetermined position). (Tangential direction of a circle whose radius is the distance of the circle). Therefore, when the display means starts operating from the first position to the second position, no driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the display means moves from the second position to the first position. No driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started toward. Thereby, when the display means is near the first position and the second position, the operation of the display means can be moderated.

  The object driven by the driving mechanism is not particularly limited, and the driving mechanism may be the following driving mechanism.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is Operate between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the operation of the arm,
The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the movable body starts operating from the first position toward the second position, and Are formed along a direction in which driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when starting operation from the second position toward the first position,
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is Operate between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the operation of the arm,
The moving direction of the pin at the time when the movable body starts operating from the first position to the second position, and 1 is formed along the moving direction of the pin at the time of starting the operation toward the position of 1.
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

(2-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22) via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25.
The driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) rotates around a first straight line as an axis in accordance with a driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with rotation of the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via a pin (slide member E26). In association with the rotation of the member E22), the member E22 rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In such a case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). Direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposed position). In such a case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member (E22).

(2-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving motor E25).
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26). ), Rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And a straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is substantially orthogonal.

(3-1) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A housing (screen casing C10) for housing the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed on the arm (crank member E22) via a pin (slide member E26) movable inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25.
The driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) rotates around a first straight line as an axis in accordance with a driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) with rotation of the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via a pin (slide member E26). In association with the rotation of the member E22), the member E22 rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In such a case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). Direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) connecting the intersection with the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposed position). In this case, a force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) without depending on the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank). Direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The housing (screen casing C10) has openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) that houses the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10);
Opening and closing doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving motor E25).
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is configured such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates while the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26). ), Rotates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position) in conjunction with the rotation of
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And a straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other;
The drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) has openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the gear (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-3) The opening (operation openings C21 and C31) is a first opening (operation opening) provided on one side surface (right side plate C2) of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10). An opening C21) and a second opening (operation) provided on a side surface (left side plate C3) of the side surface of the drive mechanism housing (screen case C10) opposite to the one side surface (right side plate C2). Opening C31).
The first opening (operation opening C21) and the second opening (operation opening C31) are formed in substantially the same size and substantially the same shape.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is eccentric. A straight line connecting the position E21b and a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) regardless of the driving force generated from the driving motor E25 is applied to the front screen. When applied to the mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotational center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. Therefore, the force applied to the slide member E26 is not converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21 (the direction in which the force acts is from the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21). Any deviation is converted to a force for rotating the crank gear E21). Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, even if the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the front screen mechanism E1 is not rotated. Does not rotate. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 from directly touching the front screen mechanism E1 and forcibly moving the front screen mechanism E1.

  Also, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in realizing that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, There is no need to separately add a member or the like for locking the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1, and it is possible to prevent an increase in cost.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen driving mechanism E2 is housed inside the screen housing C10, and the screen housing C10 manually rotates the crank gear E21. Operation openings C21 and C31 are provided at positions where operation is possible. Therefore, a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 can rotate the front screen mechanism E1 by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the operation openings C21 and C31. Therefore, although the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be rotated by directly touching the front screen mechanism E1, the convenience is reduced because the means for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 is separately secured. Can be prevented. In addition, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated through manually rotating the crank gear E21, the front screen mechanism E1 is not directly touched. The possibility that the screen mechanism E1 is damaged can be reduced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the screen housing C10 is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) having substantially the same size and substantially the same shape on each of the pair of side surfaces. The screen casing C10 can be carried by catching hands on the two openings. As described above, the operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the opening as the handle, The front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for rotating (manually) the front screen mechanism E1 independently of the driving force generated from the driving motor E25. Is applied to the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. It was explained as. That is, it has been described that the front screen mechanism E1 does not manually rotate (is locked) both when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and when it is at the front exposure position. However, in the present invention, the front screen mechanism may not be manually rotated (locked) only in one of the case where the front screen mechanism is at the front standby position and the case where the front screen mechanism is at the front exposure position. .

  The object driven by the driving mechanism is not particularly limited, and the driving mechanism may be the following driving mechanism.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmitting body that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates around a first straight line according to a driving force generated from a power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. While rotating, the movable body rotates between a first position and a second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
The direction of the pin when the movable body is at the first position and the direction of a straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body is such that the movable body is at the first position. In the case, a direction of a force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on a driving force generated from the power source,
The direction of the pin when the movable body is at the second position and the direction of a straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body is such that the movable body is at the second position. In the case, a direction of a force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm without depending on a driving force generated from the power source,
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

A driving mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body,
A driving force transmitting body that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin movable inside the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates around a first straight line according to a driving force generated from a power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body. While the movable body rotates between a first position and a second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm, while rotating about a second straight line as an axis,
When the movable body is at the first position, and when the movable body is at the second position, a line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body and the pin An intersection of the second straight line and the arm and a straight line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other;
A driving mechanism characterized by the above.

  Note that the first straight line and the second straight line may be parallel. In this case, a view from the direction of the first straight line (the direction of the second straight line) (for example, a side view of the driving mechanism). , A straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitting body and the pin (for example, a straight line connecting the center of the gear and the pin), and a straight line connecting the intersection of the second straight line and the arm and the pin (for example, The straight line connecting the rotation center of the arm and the pin) may be perpendicular to each other.

(4-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) can be visually recognized. Mechanism UD), and
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
It has a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) A different second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the screen casing (screen casing) C10) is configured as a unit,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to move between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Works with
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is disposed behind the second position (front exposure position), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is positioned at the second position (front exposure position). ), The image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position. When the projector is at the (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
The brightness of the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is lower than that of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, two screens of the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen mechanism D are housed in the screen housing C10. The front screen mechanism E1 operates between the front standby position and the front exposure position by being driven by the front screen driving mechanism E2, and the fixed screen mechanism D is disposed behind the front exposure position. When the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, while when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, it is projected by the projector mechanism B2. The displayed image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Accordingly, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, and the fixed screen when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. Comparing the position of the mechanism D, the fixed screen mechanism D is located behind the screen casing C10 than the front screen mechanism E1.

  Here, since the far side of the screen casing C10 has a greater influence of irregular reflection due to the reflection of light on the wall of the screen casing C10, the fixed screen mechanism D is more white than the front screen mechanism E1. Blur is likely to occur. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D can be prevented from being blurred, and the sharpness of the image can be improved.

(4-2) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which an image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) can be visually recognized. Mechanism UD), and
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having one display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
A second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a plurality of display surfaces capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) are configured as a unit. Yes,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to move between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Works with
When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism). D)
The brightness of the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is lower than that of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 has one display surface, and the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces. Since the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces, the influence of irregular reflection due to the reflection of light between the display surfaces is large and so-called white blur is likely to occur. Here, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D can be prevented from being blurred, and the sharpness of the image can be improved.

  In the present invention, a first screen whose display surface is perpendicular to the optical axis of irradiation light and a second screen whose display surface is not perpendicular to the optical axis of irradiation light are provided, and the brightness of the second screen is adjusted. The brightness may be lower than the brightness of the first screen. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the second screen from being blurred.

(5-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) , A display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body (cabinet G) and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be viewed; With
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface (projection surface E11a) and a second member having a surface provided with a convex portion (second pattern surface E12b). Of the first member (front screen member E11) on the opposite side of the display surface (projection surface E11a) and the second member (front screen support E12). ) Is fixed by contacting the surface opposite to the surface (the second pattern surface E12b) provided with the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a and a front screen support base E12 having a second pattern surface E12b. It is formed by fixing the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a and the surface of the front screen support base E12 opposite to the second pattern surface E12b so as to be in contact with each other. As described above, the member having the projection surface E11a and the member having the second pattern surface E12b are formed as separate members. As a result, sink marks are formed on the projection surface E11a, and the accuracy as a screen is prevented from lowering. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(5-2) The surface (the second pattern surface E12b) of the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) on which the convex portions are provided is decorated with irregularities.
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to operate between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Do
When the screen (front exposure position) is at the second position (front exposure position), while the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1), When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the surface (the second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion. The decorated decoration is arranged so as to be visible through the display area (upper display window UD1).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is connected to the second pattern surface E12b (the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a, that is, the screen surface). The decoration applied to the back surface) is arranged so as to be visible through the upper display window UD1. Therefore, if the decoration is not applied, if the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 will be directly visible to the player. In this case, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired, which is not desirable. From such a viewpoint, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 is decorated.

  However, if it is attempted to integrally mold the decorated front screen mechanism E1, a projection is formed on the projection surface E11a of the front screen mechanism E1 due to the convex portion constituting the decoration, and the accuracy of the screen is reduced. Will drop. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the member having the projection surface E11 and the member having the decorated surface are configured as separate members, and both members are fixed to each other. The front screen mechanism E1 is formed. This prevents sink marks from being formed on the projection surface E11 due to the decoration, thereby preventing the accuracy of the screen from being reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(6-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image, and a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) A display configured by unitizing a screen mechanism F1) and a screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1). Unit (display unit A),
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
A display area (upper display window UD1) is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body (cabinet G) and allows the screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) to be viewed. Opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD),
A perforated plate (perforated plate B15) in which a plurality of holes are formed,
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged such that the projector (projector mechanism B2) is difficult to view via the display area (upper display window UD1), and the plurality of holes are formed in the perforated plate ( A space in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is accommodated in the screen casing (screen casing C10), with the perforated plate B15) as a boundary, and the projector (projector). A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space in which the mechanism B2) is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the screen housing C10 are accommodated by the plurality of holes formed in the perforated plate B15. A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space and the space where the projector mechanism B2 is arranged. Therefore, the space in which the screen is accommodated (the area opened for projecting an image) in the screen casing C10 can be used for heat radiation, so that the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently released. it can. Further, since the perforated plate B15 is arranged such that the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see through the upper display window UD1 provided in the upper door mechanism UD, the player cannot easily see the projector mechanism B2, and the projector mechanism B2 It is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being impaired due to the appearance of.

(6-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above a screen (fixed screen mechanism D) erected on the screen casing (screen casing C10), and emits light forward. It is possible to irradiate,
The gaming machine further comprises:
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) arranged in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so as to reflect light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) obliquely downward and backward;
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) so as to cover the lower surface of the projector (projector mechanism B2).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D is erected on the screen housing C10, and the projector mechanism B2 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, a relatively large space extends below the projector mechanism B2. The perforated plate B15 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D so as to cover the lower surface of the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, since the relatively large space can be used for heat radiation, the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be more efficiently released.

(7-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). And
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are configured as a unit,
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from outside the display unit (display unit A) with the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the display unit A includes the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, and the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. However, the mirror mechanism B3 can adjust the position from outside the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, since the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(7-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and can irradiate light forward,
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so as to reflect light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) obliquely downward and rearward, and By changing the degree of screwing of the screws exposed toward the opening side of the part (cabinet G), it is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD opened, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the embodiment described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, and the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines (for example, pachinko game machines and slot machines). .

(8-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit comprises:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
First and second screens (a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside a projection range of the projector and different from each other for each screen. A first position operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector; And a second screen;
Drive means for independently driving the first and second screens between the first position and the second position (a front screen mechanism E1, a reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a main control unit); Substrate MS),
Detecting whether the first screen is at the first position (front standby position), detecting whether the first screen is at the second position (front exposure position), And detecting means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen is at the first position (reel standby position).
The operating range between the first position and the second position of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the first and second screens each have an overlapping range. The second position of each of the screens is in the overlap range in the operating range,
The driving means,
When performing a return operation to return each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
The first and second screens are driven in accordance with a driving procedure of the first and second screens corresponding to respective positions of the first and second screens based on a detection result of the detection unit.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. Although the space inside the gaming machine is finite, a plurality of movable bodies can be provided by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, in the case where the operation ranges of the movable bodies overlap, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, when the operation of the movable body is not performed normally, or when the movable body is manually moved while the power is shut off, the movable body is not considered without considering such an abnormal situation. , There is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a possibility that the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection unit differs depending on the position of each of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. For this reason, when the detecting means detects that one screen exists at the first position, no interference occurs even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning the other screen to the origin position first and then returning the one screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. Since only one of the first and second screens can be arranged at the second position, the detecting means detects that the first screen is at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, by returning the second screen to the origin position first and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, in the return operation, the screens interfere with each other by driving the first and second screens in accordance with the driving procedures corresponding to the respective positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection unit. Without returning, it is possible to return to the respective origin positions. As a result, by appropriately driving the first and second screens in the processing after the return operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the screens from interfering with each other.

(8-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), respectively, and the corresponding screen is in the first position (front). (A standby position / reel standby position) and two first sensors for detecting
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is at the second position (front exposure position). A second sensor;
The driving means (main control board MS)
The first sensor detects that the first screen is at the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is at the second position. Is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen does not exist at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen exists at the first position. And when the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred.

(9-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit comprises:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
First and second screens (a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside a projection range of the projector and different from each other for each screen. A first position operable between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector; And a second screen;
Drive means for independently driving the first and second screens between the first position and the second position (a front screen mechanism E1, a reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a main control unit); Substrate MS),
It is detected whether the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first screen is at the second position (front exposure position). Detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) exists at the first position (reel exposure position). ,
The operating range of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the second position of each of the first and second screens is in the operating range. Exists in the overlapping range,
The driving means,
When performing a return operation to return each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
A first condition under which the detecting means detects that the first screen is present at any one of the first position and the second position, and When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied,
Driving the first and second screens according to a driving procedure of the first and second screens corresponding to respective positions of the first and second screens based on a detection result of the detection unit;
When none of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied,
One of the first and second screens is driven to return to the origin position, and then the other of the first and second screens is detected by the detecting means. The other screen is driven to return to the origin position according to a driving procedure according to a detection result as to whether or not the screen is at the first position.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. Although the space inside the gaming machine is finite, a plurality of movable bodies can be provided by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, in the case where the operation ranges of the movable bodies overlap, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, when the operation of the movable body is not performed normally, or when the movable body is manually moved while the power is shut off, the movable body is not considered without considering such an abnormal situation. , There is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a possibility that the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection unit differs depending on the position of each of the first and second screens. The first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. For this reason, when the detecting means detects that one screen exists at the first position, no interference occurs even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning the other screen to the origin position first and then returning the one screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. Since only one of the first and second screens can be arranged at the second position, the detecting means detects that the first screen is at the second position. The second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, by returning the second screen to the origin position first and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, the first condition in which the detecting means detects that the first screen exists at any of the first position and the second position, and the detecting means determines that the second screen is in the second position If at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied, the driving procedure is performed according to the position of each of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means. By driving the first and second screens, the screens can be returned to their respective origin positions without interference.

  On the other hand, when neither of the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first screen is located between the first position and the second position, and The second screen is located at a position other than the second position. Further, in this case, there is a possibility that the other screen operates in accordance with the operation of one screen. Therefore, according to the invention of (1), first, after one screen is returned to the origin position, the detection means responds to the detection result of whether or not another screen exists at the first position. The other screen is returned to the origin position according to the driving procedure. Thereby, even when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to reliably return the first and second screens to the origin positions.

(9-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), respectively, and the corresponding screen is in the first position (front). (A standby position / reel standby position) and two first sensors for detecting
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is at the second position (front exposure position). A second sensor;
The driving means (main control board MS)
The first sensor detects that the first screen is at the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is at the second position. Is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, since the first screen does not exist at the first position and the second position at the same time, the first sensor detects that the first screen exists at the first position. And when the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred.

(10-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit comprises:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed at a predetermined position of the display unit and capable of being projected by the projector;
Second and third screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is a first position (front standby position / reel) outside the projection range of the projector The number of times different from each other between a standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) which is ahead of the first screen and is to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen. A second screen and a third screen, which are rotatable about a moving axis (a rotation center axis FG and a rotation center axis RG);
A drive mechanism (a front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second and third screens independently between the first position and the second position. With
In each of the second and third screens, an operation range between the first position and the second position is partially overlapped with each other,
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is higher than the rotation axis (rotation center axis RG) of the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Yes,
In the first position (front standby position), the second screen is located above the first screen and outside the operating range of the third screen,
In the first position (reel standby position), the third screen is located behind the first screen and outside the operating range of the second screen.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. Since the space inside the gaming machine is limited, space saving is required in providing a plurality of movable bodies, but by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operating range of each movable body, A plurality of movable bodies can be provided. Here, in the case where the operation ranges of the movable bodies overlap, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated simultaneously, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come into contact (interference) with each other. When the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a possibility that the effect device may be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen are rotated about different rotation axes. This makes it possible to reduce the overlapping ranges of the operating range of the second screen and the operating range of the third screen. Further, the rotation axis of the second screen is arranged above the rotation axis of the third screen, and the second screen is arranged above the first screen at the first position. With this configuration, the operating range between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. In addition, by disposing the third screen at the first position behind the first screen, when the third screen is disposed at the first position, the third screen is connected to the second screen. The possibility of contact can be eliminated. As described above, it is possible to efficiently arrange the three screens in the gaming machine while reducing the possibility that the three screens will contact each other.

(10-2) The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2)
The driving of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is executed on condition that the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the first position (reel standby position).
The driving of the third screen is executed on condition that the second screen is at the first position (front standby position).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to reliably prevent the second screen and the third screen from coming into contact with each other.

  (10-3) Each of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) is a projection on which an image emitted from the projector (irradiation light device B) is projected. The shapes of the surfaces are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shapes of the projection surfaces of the first to third screens are different from each other, even if the same image is emitted from the projector, the image is expressed in a different manner for each screen. It is possible to diversify the production.

(10-4) The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) is the screen described above. When being a projection target of the projector, in a side view, the projection surface is an arc surface having a convex arc shape on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light emitted from the projector (irradiation light device B),
The projection surface of any one of the first to third screens (the front screen mechanism E1) is a flat surface.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to express images in different modes by using a screen mechanism having a projection surface having an arc surface and a screen mechanism having a flat projection surface.

(11-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit comprises:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
A movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position (front standby position) outside the projection range of the projector, and a second position (a front standby position) that is a projection target of the projector ( A movable screen that can operate between the front exposure position)
A driving mechanism (a front screen driving mechanism E2) for driving the movable screen between the first position and the second position.
The drive mechanism includes:
A motor (drive motor E25);
A shaft (shaft member E3) that rotates when the motor is driven;
Two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23) provided at both ends of the shaft and rotating together with the shaft;
Two arms (crank members E22 and E22) that are connected to the two gears and that are rotated about the rotation axis along a predetermined direction by rotating the two gears; And two arms connected to both ends of the screen in the predetermined direction.
The movable screen rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the two arms about the rotation axis (rotation center axis FG). .

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by rotating a movable body around an axis (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device that switches between a state in which the display unit is shielded by the movable body and a state in which the display unit is opened (exposed) before and after the movable body rotates is proposed. I have. This makes it possible to create a sense of unity between the movement of the movable body and the state of visual recognition of another accessory such as a display means, so that a variety of effects can be performed. However, when the display means and the like (an additional object) are provided together with the movable body, there is a problem that the rotation axis (shaft) of the movable body obstructs the arrangement of the display means and the like. In this regard, it is conceivable that the rotation axis of the movable body is provided above, below, or on the side of the separate object so as not to hinder the arrangement of the separate object. Since the shaft is disposed at the end, there is a problem that the range of rotation of the movable body is limited, and the size of the movable body is also restricted.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is not used as the rotation axis of the screen (two arms). This increases the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft, so that the shaft can be arranged so as not to hinder the arrangement of another accessory. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional objects while maintaining the rotation range and the size of the screen at desired levels. Further, each of the two arms is rotated with the rotation of two gears connected to both ends of the shaft. Therefore, the shaft can transmit the driving force of the motor evenly to each of the two arms. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one arm.

  (11-2) The motor (drive motor E25) is connected to one of the two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23), and transmits a driving force to the one gear to rotate. Then, the shaft (the shaft member E3) is rotated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the motor is connected to the gear provided at any one end of the shaft, and the motor is controlled so as not to hinder the arrangement of the separate accessory (such as the fixed screen mechanism). Can be located near the end of the shaft. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional objects.

(11-3) a fixed screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that is fixed to a predetermined position of the display unit (display unit A) and can be a projection target of the projector (irradiation light device B);
When the movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) is located at the first position (front standby position), the fixed screen becomes a projection target of the projector,
When the movable screen is disposed at the second position (front exposure position), the movable screen is disposed in front of the fixed screen and is to be projected by the projector instead of the fixed screen;
The shaft (shaft member E3) is disposed behind the fixed screen,
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the two arms (crank members E22 and E22) is disposed forward of a rear end position of the fixed screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is disposed behind the fixed screen as a separate object, so that light projected on the fixed screen is not obstructed by the shaft. In addition, since the rotating shafts of the two arms can be disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen, the rotation axes of the two arms can be rotated with respect to the movable screen as compared with the case where they are disposed rearward of the rear end position of the fixed screen. The length between the moving shaft and the arm (length of the arm) can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the movable screen can be maintained at a desired level even when the space in the gaming machine is limited and the size of the display unit cannot be increased.

(12-1) a housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) for partitioning the inside of the housing into a first space on the upper side and a second space on the lower side;
A display unit (display unit A) mounted on the partition plate and exchangeably housed in the first space of the housing;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring for connecting the display unit and a device housed in the second space;
The display unit (A1) includes:
An accommodating portion (screen casing C10) having a pair of side plates (right plate C2 / left plate C3) and a back plate (back plate C4);
Display means (fixed screen mechanism D / front screen mechanism E1 / reel screen mechanism F1) housed in the housing section for displaying an image,
The back plate in the storage portion is disposed forward of a rear end of the pair of side walls,
The relay board is arranged on a back surface (back wall G3) of the housing, and on a third space (GS) defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing portion,
The partition plate has an opening (through hole G11) through which the wiring is inserted at a position facing the third space.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that they can be replaced in units to facilitate replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine removably housed in a body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in this publication, the inside of the housing is vertically divided by a variable display unit mounting table, a variable display unit is mounted on the upper half of the housing, and devices such as a power supply device are mounted on the lower half of the housing. Attached. Then, a relay board for relaying wiring for electrically connecting a control device of the variable display unit and a device mounted on the lower half of the housing is mounted on the front surface of the variable display unit. By the way, if the wiring is arranged in front of the various devices in the housing, the wiring hinders the appearance and operation of the various devices. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the wiring behind the various devices. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the above publication, since the relay board is mounted on the front of the variable display unit, wiring between the relay board and the device mounted on the lower half of the housing is changed for various devices. It is difficult to arrange behind.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board is arranged in the third space behind the display unit in the housing. The wiring connecting the relay board and the device housed in the second space passes through an opening formed at a position facing the third space in the partition plate. As a result, wiring can be easily arranged behind various devices in the housing, so that the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased. Furthermore, since the relay board is disposed in the rear surface of the housing and in the third space defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing section, when the display unit is housed in the housing section, Contact with the back surface of the housing can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the relay board will break down.

  (12-2) The relay board (relay board CK) is arranged below the third space (space GS).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay board is disposed below the third space, the wiring is connected to the relay board from the second space via the opening formed in the partition plate. It becomes easy to do.

(13-1) a display unit (display unit A);
A main body housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface and accommodating the display unit in a replaceable manner,
The display unit comprises:
Display means (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) for displaying an image,
A display unit housing (housing A1) that houses the display means;
A concave portion (concave portion B132) is formed continuously from the front end toward the rear at both side ends of the top plate member (projector cover B1) in the display unit casing. Thus, a work space (space BS) for installing and fixing the main body housing to the island facility (fixing plate member OC) disposed above the main body housing is defined.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that they can be replaced in units to facilitate replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine removably housed in a body is disclosed. By the way, generally, a game machine such as a pachislot machine and a pachinko machine is installed in an island facility in a game facility to conduct business. When the gaming machine is installed on the island facility, the gaming machine is fixed to the island facility by driving nails or the like from the inside of the housing to the island facility via the top plate. Here, when installing a gaming machine whose units can be exchanged as described above in the island facility, the installation work of the gaming machine is performed with the unit removed so as not to damage the unit. Is required of workers. However, actually, the worker does not want to increase the amount of work, and performs the installation work of the gaming machine in a state in which the unit is housed, thereby causing a problem that the unit is damaged. If the unit is damaged, it may not be possible to reuse the unit, and since it will be different from a normal gaming machine, it will not be allowed to operate because it is not a licensed gaming machine There is a fear.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, concave portions are formed at both end portions of the top plate member in the display unit housing. Thus, even when the display unit is housed in the main body housing, a work space for installation and fixing to the island facility is secured between the display unit and the main body housing. As a result, it is possible to install the gaming machine in the island facility with the display unit housed while preventing the display unit from being damaged.

(13-2) An opening (opening G41) penetrating vertically is formed in a top plate member (upper wall G4) of the main body casing (cabinet G).
The main body housing includes a soft member (plate member G42) that is attached to the top plate member so as to close the opening, and is softer than the top plate member.
The work space (space BS) is a space in which a nail from the soft member to the island facility (fixed plate member OC) can be driven from inside the main body housing.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to drive a nail without interfering with the display unit while the display unit is housed in the main body housing. This makes it possible to reliably fix the gaming machine to the island facility while preventing the display unit from being damaged. Further, by driving a nail into a soft member softer than the top plate member of the main body housing, the gaming machine can be easily installed on the island facility.

(14-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit comprises:
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of a projector (illumination light device B) that projects an image,
A second screen which can be a projection target of the projector, and which is disposed in front of the first screen and is a first position to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen; A second screen (front screen mechanism E1 / reel screen mechanism F1) operable between a second position outside the projection range of
A drive mechanism (a front screen drive mechanism E2 / reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen between the first position and the second position;
A housing (screen housing C10) that houses the first screen, the second screen, and the driving mechanism;
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring for connecting the drive mechanism and a device outside the display unit;
The housing (screen housing C10) has at least a bottom plate (bottom plate C1), side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3), and a back plate (back plate C4) that are separately molded, and the bottom plate, It is configured by assembling the side plate, and the back plate,
Each of the first screen, the driving mechanism, and the relay board is positioned and arranged on any one of the bottom plate, the side plate, and the back plate, and the positioned plates are mutually positioned. different.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized so that they can be replaced in units to facilitate replacement of various parts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 discloses a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case accommodating the variable display device is unitized. A gaming machine removably housed in a body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427, the unitized variable display unit is basically a unit commonly mounted regardless of the model of the gaming machine. The effect devices and the like that cannot be shared among the models depending on the model are not unitized. Here, if the rendering device depending on the model is manufactured separately for each model, the burden of the manufacturing cost increases.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, different functional components are positioned and arranged on each plate of the housing (screen housing C10). Therefore, even when the entire display unit (display unit A) cannot be shared among the models, it may be possible to achieve the commonality between the models in the unit of the housing plate. As a result, it is possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case of manufacturing the display unit (for each model).

  (14-2) The housing (screen housing C10) is assembled such that the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) are replaceable. Have been.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, each plate of the housing (screen housing C10) is exchangeably assembled. Therefore, the members of the display unit (display unit A) can be exchanged for each plate. This makes it possible to change the specifications of the display unit while exchanging the members of the display unit by exchanging the members in units of boards.

(14-3) In the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a concave portion (central mounting portion C11) for positioning and mounting the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is formed.
The drive mechanisms (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) are positioned and arranged on the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3),
The relay board (relay board CK) is positioned and arranged on the back board (back board C4).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board (relay board CK) that relays the wiring is positioned and arranged on the back plate (the back plate C4), so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the wiring. be able to. Further, since the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is positioned by being mounted on the concave portion (center mounting portion C11) formed in the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plate (right side plate C2 / left side plate C3) is positioned. ) Or the back plate (back plate C4), the first screen can be positioned on the housing by a simpler method.

(14-4) The display unit (display unit A)
Decorative member (right movable body base C5, left Movable body base C6) is further provided,
In the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a concave portion (right mounting portion C12 / left mounting portion C13) for disposing the decorative member is formed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, by disposing the decorative member between the drive mechanism and the second screen, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize the drive mechanism. As a result, the beauty of the gaming machine can be improved. Further, since a concave portion for disposing the decorative member is formed on the bottom plate of the housing, the decorative member can be easily disposed on the housing.

(15-1) A gaming machine including a display unit (display unit A) for displaying a video,
The display unit comprises:
A projector (irradiation light device B) for projecting an image,
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that is arranged in front of the projector and reflects light emitted from the projector obliquely downward and rearward;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of the projector;
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position (front standby position) that is disposed above the first screen and that is outside the projection range of the projector; A second screen disposed forward of the first screen and operable between a second position (front exposure position) to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen;
An arm (crank member E22, E22) having a rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) connected to the second screen;
By transmitting a driving force generated from a power source (drive motor E25) to the arm and rotating the arm about the rotation axis, the second screen is moved to the first position and to the first position. A driving force transmitting member (crank gears E21, E21, intermediate gears E23, E23) that operates between the second position and the second position.
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the arm is located at a position farther from the center of the second screen when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position). Is also located above,
The arm is connected to a position that is above the second screen when the second screen is in the first position;
When the second screen is at the second position, the second screen is inclined upward from a rear end far from the reflection mirror to a front end close to the reflection mirror. Is configured.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that display an image projected from a projector on a screen are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to this type of gaming machine, it is possible to express images on the same level as a liquid crystal display, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the size is increased as compared with the liquid crystal display. In addition, by appropriately setting the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that is impossible with a liquid crystal display. By the way, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of screens including a movable screen in a gaming machine in order to expand the range of video expression. In such a gaming machine, when a movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to arrange the movable screen in front of other screens. On the other hand, when a screen other than the movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to arrange the movable screen outside the projection range of the projector so that the projection on the other screen is not hindered. is there. However, since the space for accommodating the display unit is limited in the housing of the gaming machine, the size of the display unit cannot be increased. For this reason, the space in which the movable screen can operate is also limited, and it is difficult to increase the size of the movable screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the rotation axis of the arm is disposed above the center of the second screen when the second screen is at the second position, and the arm is When the second screen is at the second position, the second screen is connected to a position above the second screen. Thereby, the operation range when operating between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. By thus reducing the operating range of the second screen, the size of the second screen can be increased. In addition, when the second screen is in the first position, the second screen is configured to be inclined upward from a rear end far from the reflection mirror to a front end close to the reflection mirror. Have been. Thus, the vertical distance between the first screen and the second screen can be reduced within a range in which the projection of the projector onto the first screen is not hindered. As a result, the size of the second screen can be further increased.

  The projector (irradiation light device B) is disposed above the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). And has an inclined surface that is inclined upward from the rear to the front.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the lower surface of the projector has the inclined surface that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front, the lower surface of the projector and the second screen located at the second position are different from each other. The vertical interval can be shortened. As a result, the size of the second screen can be further increased.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of doors has been known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-52525). By providing a plurality of doors in this way, it is only necessary to open the corresponding doors for purposes such as replenishing medals, adjusting reel devices, and repairing the devices. There is an advantage that the inside does not need to be exposed.

However, in the case where a plurality of doors are provided, locking means for locking each of the doors must be provided, so that there is a problem that the unlocking operation becomes complicated and the number of parts increases.
Also, inside the gaming machine, there are places that are accessed frequently, such as the supply of medals, and some places, such as control boards, that have high security and are rarely accessed. There is also a need to employ locking means.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can perform unlocking work smoothly and enhance security inside the gaming machine. I do.

(16-1) One aspect of the present invention is an upper space having an upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed,
A lower space having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed;
An upper door lock mechanism G52 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU,
A lower door lock mechanism G51 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU;
With
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is
A tube G5222 provided in the upper space;
A locking plate G5221 formed with claw portions G5221a and G5221b and slidable in a cylinder G5222;
Locked parts G511 and G521 provided on the upper door mechanism DU;
The lower door mechanism DD is
In a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the lower door mechanism DD interferes with the locking plate G5221, thereby stopping the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the locking plate G5221 is held in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion is formed. In a state in which G5221a and G5221b are locked by the locked portions G511 and G521 and the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the interference of the lower door mechanism DD with the locking plate G5221 is released, and the locking plate G5221 is slid. The gaming machine 1 is provided at a position where the locking plate G5221 releases the locking of the locked portions G511 and G521.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (the lower door mechanism DD is locked), the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the locking plate G5221, so that the locking plate G5221 slides. Stop moving. Then, by holding the locking plate G5221 in which the sliding is stopped in the cylinder G5222, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU is moved to the upper space. On the other hand, it is locked.
On the other hand, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened (a state where the lower door mechanism DD is unlocked), the physical interference of the lower door mechanism DD with the locking plate G5221 is released. G5222 is slidable, and the locking of the claws G5221a and G5221 with the locking rods G521a and G521b is released, so that the lock on the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.
Thus, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first release the lock of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to unlock the lower door lock mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. Can be enhanced.
As a result, the security of the upper space can be higher than that of the lower space, and the lower space can be a place that can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space.

(16-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the lower door lock mechanism G51 is a cylinder lock G513 that can be locked and unlocked with a key.
Between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in a direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is provided,
The locking portion G522 has a claw shape,
The locked portion G521 has a rod shape,
The claw portions G5221a and G5221b having a claw shape are locked by being hooked on the bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b.

According to the above configuration, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, there is an advantage that the key is easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.
Further, between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in a direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is employed. Thereby, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the lower space without applying a sudden load. This can prevent a sudden load from being applied to the locking plate G5221 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.
In addition, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be hooked on the bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b, and the hook is released. Thereby, it becomes possible to lock the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

(16-3) The upper door mechanism DU is rotatably supported at one end of the upper space, and
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is characterized in that it is provided at an end opposite to the end that is pivotally supported.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely to unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. . Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the inside of the lower space to the outside, and it is possible to enhance security.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-24410, there has been known a gaming machine in which a component is divided into a plurality of units, and a connecting member connects the components. By adopting the configuration divided into a plurality of units as described above, it is only necessary to replace the unit when the specification is changed or repaired, and there is an advantage that the change or repair of the specification is facilitated.

  However, if the unit is divided into a plurality of units and the number of units is increased, it may take time to assemble, replace, and disassemble.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform operations when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the gaming machine. I do.

(17-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G having an openable and closable lower door DD1,
A plurality of reels RL, RC, RR provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1 and provided with a plurality of types of symbols are provided, and a variable display and a stop display of the symbols allocated on the reels RL, RC, RR are performed. A reel unit RU capable of
A start lever DD6 for outputting a command signal in accordance with an operation by a player;
A symbol provided on the back side of the reel unit RU and arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR by stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on a command signal output from the start lever DD6. A main control board MS for stopping and displaying
A gaming machine 1 comprising:

According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1 is provided with the reel unit RU, and the reel unit RU is further provided with the main control board MS. In this way, by integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS, the work when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the gaming machine 1 can be easily performed.
In addition, the main control board MS is an important component for controlling the game, and requires measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, the main control board MS is difficult to remove because it is integrated with the reel unit RU. It can be configured.
Further, the main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be arranged on the far side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Thereby, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized intrusion occurs through the gap of the lower door DD1, the arrival at the main control board MS is prevented. It becomes difficult and security can be improved.

  (17-2) The present invention is characterized in that in the gaming machine 1, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed.

  According to the above configuration, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed, when the specifications of the gaming machine 1 are changed, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reels RL, The change of the symbols of RC and RR and the change of the game content can be performed collectively.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65493, in order to prevent unauthorized operation on an operation plate provided on a power supply device, a cover for covering the operation plate is provided, and the cover is further attached to a closed position. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a biasing cover biasing means is known. According to such a gaming machine, unauthorized operation on the power supply device can be prevented.

  However, if the urging force of the cover urging means is increased, a strong force is required to open the cover, and the operability may be reduced. Further, if the urging force by the cover urging means is weakened, a sufficient urging force to the operation plate is not applied, and the effectiveness of preventing unauthorized operation may be reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the security of a power supply device without lowering the operability of the power supply device. And

(18-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed,
A power supply device DE provided in the lower space;
A speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD;
With
The power supply DE is
A power switch DE1 for selecting whether or not to supply power;
A switch cover DE2 that switches between an open state where the power switch DE1 can be operated and a closed state where the power switch DE1 cannot be operated,
The speaker DD25L is
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it has a protrusion DD25L1 that interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2 and restricts the switch cover DE2 from being opened.
A gaming machine 1 characterized by the following.

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. Can be regulated. On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the switch cover DE2 cannot be operated with the power switch DE1. It is possible to switch from the closed state to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
Thereby, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened, an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE can be prevented to enhance security.

(18-2) According to the present invention, in the gaming machine 1, the switch cover DE2 is switched between a closed state and an open state by sliding.
The convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the switch cover DE2 interrupts the moving path in which the switch cover DE2 slides, thereby restricting the switch cover DE2 from sliding and opening.

According to the above configuration, by switching the switch cover DE2, it is possible to switch between the closed state and the open state. This makes it easy to access the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.
Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time.

(13-1) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a,
The convex portion DD25L1 also has an inclined surface DD25La,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 comes into contact with and pushes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is slid and closed. It is characterized by being in a state.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at positions facing each other. The slide of the cover DE2 can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position shifted from the closed position, and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is moved to the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 slides and moves to the closed position.
As a result, even if the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is closed and the switch cover DE2 is closed, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is attached to the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the closing operation of the lower door mechanism DD because the switch is pressed in contact with the lower door mechanism DD.

(19-1) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening (supply opening G31) formed on the back surface (rear wall G3) through which a supply path (medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted;
A shielding member (shielding member MH1) formed in a flat plate shape capable of shielding the opening from the inside of the housing and capable of being screwed and fixed to the back surface in a shielding state in which the opening is shielded;
A guide portion for slidably guiding the shielding member (shielding member MH1) from the shielding state to an open state exposing the opening, and a holding portion (holding portion MH23a) capable of holding the shielding member in the open state. A guide member (guide member MH2) having
Is provided.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine is installed on an installation island of a game arcade. It is known that an automatic circulation replenishing device that replenishes a game machine such as a medal to a gaming machine is laid on such an installation island.

  In order to supply the game medium from the automatic circulation supply device, an opening is generally formed on the back surface of the game machine housing. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-212282, an automatic circulation replenishing device connection opening including four arc-shaped openings whose connection is interrupted by a cutting portion is formed on the back surface of the gaming machine. When installing a gaming machine on an installation island on which an automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, an opening is formed on the back of the housing by cutting the cut part and removing the inner blocking plate, and replenishment of the automatic circulation replenishment device A passage can be inserted through this opening. In the supply path, for example, an outlet is disposed above a hopper tank of a pachislot machine, and medals can be supplied to the hopper tank as appropriate.

  By the way, with respect to the installed gaming machines, change of the arrangement place and movement to a different game hall are generally performed. However, when the automatic circulation replenishing device is not laid on the installation island where the gaming machine is newly installed, the opening of the rear surface of the housing once formed is maintained in the above-described conventional gaming machine, so the opening is Could be used illegally. Therefore, when a game machine applied to an installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid is applied to an installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is not laid, there is a problem that security is reduced.

  According to the above configuration, the opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the rear surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The sliding of the shielding member is guided between the shielding state and the open state by the guide member. The shielding member can be fixed to the rear surface of the housing by screwing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. Accordingly, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, the shielding member is slid to the open state, and the supply path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when the gaming machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and fixing it with the screw in the shielding state. As a result, after applying to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is laid, even if the gaming machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is not laid, it is possible to cover the opening with the shielding member held. Security can be maintained.

(19-2) a housing (cabinet G) having an opening (supply opening G31) formed on the back surface (rear wall G3) through which a supply path (medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted;
It is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the opening from the inside of the housing, and can be screwed and fixed to the rear surface in a shielded state that shields the opening, and the upper edge is perpendicular to the rear surface. A shielding member (shielding member MH1) on which a protruding projection (projection MH12) is formed;
An upper edge (upper edge MH21) formed along the outer edge of the upper edge of the shielding member in the shielding state and configured to restrict the upward movement of the shielding member in the vertical direction; And two side edges (side edges MH22 and MH22) formed along the side edges of the shielding member in the shielding state from the one end vertically downward, and the other end of the two side edges. A guide groove (guide groove MH23b) is formed on the rear surface side for connecting the shield members and sliding the shield member in the vertical direction, and a lower edge for supporting the protrusion of the shield member on the upper surface and holding the shield member. A guide member (guide member MH2) having a portion (lower edge portion 23, holding portion MH23a);
Is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the rear surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The sliding of the shielding member is guided between a shielding state and an open state by a guide groove formed in a lower edge portion of the guide member. In addition, since the sliding of the shielding member is restricted from moving vertically upward by the upper edge of the guide member, and the movement in the horizontal direction is restricted by the two side edges and the lower edge, It is possible to prevent the shield member from coming off the guide member when sliding. The shielding member can be fixed to the rear surface of the housing by screwing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. Accordingly, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, the shielding member is slid to the open state, and the supply path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when the gaming machine is moved, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and fixing it with the screw in the shielding state. As a result, after applying to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is laid, even if the gaming machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation and replenishment device is not laid, it is possible to cover the opening with the shielding member held. Security can be maintained.

  (19-3) The projecting portion of the shielding member projects more than the lower edge holding the shielding member.

  According to the above configuration, the protruding portion can be easily grasped, and it is possible to easily shift from the open state to the closed state.

  Conventionally, in order to prevent medals from overflowing from a hopper device or an auxiliary storage, a medal overflow prevention member such as a guide member is provided, and medals flowing from the selector to the hopper device, and an auxiliary storage from the hopper device. There is known a gaming machine that prevents medals flowing to overflow from a hopper device and an auxiliary storage (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188397). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a problem that overflowed medals accumulate inside the gaming machine and interfere with other electronic devices or movable members.

  However, in recent years, there has been a flow of new medals other than the flow of medals described above, such as when medals are automatically replenished from the outside, and it is necessary to take measures against the flow of these new medals.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine that can prevent medals from overflowing from a hopper device or the like even when medals are supplied from the outside. The purpose is to:

(20-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G,
A medal supply mechanism MH provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and receiving a thin metal medal into the cabinet G;
A hopper mechanism HP having a bucket HP1 for storing medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH;
A coin disposed below the medal supply mechanism MH and provided from the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 so as to fill a gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Guard HP30,
A gaming machine 1 comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Even if it overflows from HP1, it can be prevented from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Thus, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from accumulating in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with other electronic devices or movable members.

(20-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1 with an overflow bucket OF provided at a predetermined distance from the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G to store medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP,
The coin guard HP30 has an L-shape including a first guard portion HP301 provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 and a second guard portion HP302 provided from the overflow bucket OF to the bucket HP1. And is inclined so as to fall toward the bucket HP1.

According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 can be arranged between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1.
Further, even when a medal rides on the coin guard HP30, the medal slides toward the bucket HP1 due to its own weight because the medal is inclined toward the bucket HP1, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. .

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, as shown in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-1554, when the hopper (coin payout apparatus) which can accommodate several coins is slidably installed in a housing, the connector provided behind the hopper is mounted on the housing. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that can be electrically connected to a connector provided inside a body is known. According to such a gaming machine, the physical installation of the hopper on the housing and the electrical connection can be performed simultaneously, so that the work efficiency of installation, replacement and inspection of the hopper can be improved.

  However, if the hopper is slid at a shifted position when the hopper is slid inside the housing, the connector provided behind the hopper may contact the back plate of the housing and be damaged. There is.

  In this regard, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-1554, a guide rail that guides the hopper to slide is provided, but when the hopper slides in a hurry, the slide is installed without being correctly guided by the guide unit. In some cases, the connector cannot be sufficiently protected by the guide portion alone.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a hopper can be normally slid and set inside a housing.

(21-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine 1 in which a connector HP41 provided on a back surface of a hopper mechanism HP is connected to a connector G81 provided on a back side of a cabinet G,
A pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP;
It is provided on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G and has an upper portion HG121 / HG131 and a lower portion HG123 / HG133. A pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 capable of guiding the hopper mechanism HP so as to be slidable in the depth direction of the cabinet G in the engaged state;
Projecting portions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and forward of the connector HP41;
Is a gaming machine 1 having

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slid and mounted on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are connected to the upper portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. If the HG121 / HG131 and the lower portions HG123 / HG133 are not sandwiched between the HG121 / HG131 and the upper portion HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 and are slid above the HG121 / HG131 by mistake, the guide pieces HP21 / HP22 are moved by the guide rails. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP from coming into contact with the connector G81 to damage the connector G81.

  (21-2) The present invention is a gaming machine, wherein a portion of the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 disposed in front of the cabinet G has a tapered shape.

  According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  (21-3) In the present invention, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 are integrally formed by bending a single plate. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the above configuration, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 can be formed by one plate. Thus, the manufacturing process can be simplified.

  (21-4) Since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, when the hopper mechanism HP is temporarily placed around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparation stage for engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be kept out of the way.

  (21-5) Since the flat space HG17 is provided in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are placed in the flat space HG17. As a preparation stage before engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thereby, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably installed on the bottom of the cabinet G with ease.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a control board for performing control relating to a lottery or an effect associated with a game is disposed at an upper portion of a housing, and a hopper device for handling medals is disposed at a lower portion of the housing (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188395). No.). According to such a gaming machine, since there is a distance between the control board and the hopper device, it is possible to prevent medals from physically contacting the control board, and to reduce the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals. Can be smaller.

  However, in recent years, in order to simplify replacement and recycling of components, the operation device, the effect device, and the like are often unitized and arranged at the upper part of the housing. Then, for the sake of design, there is a case where the control board is arranged at the lower part of the housing and the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short.

  As a result, since the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short, medals may physically contact the control board, or the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals may increase.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and even when the distance between the control board and the hopper device is short, the medal physically contacts the control board. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the occurrence of medals and reduce the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals.

(22-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G having an upper space and a lower space,
A display unit A provided in the upper space;
A sub-control device SS that is arranged on the back side of the lower space and controls a game.
A hopper mechanism HP arranged in the lower space, on the front side of the sub-control device SS, for storing metal medals;
A sheet metal BK provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP;
With
The sub-control device SS is the gaming machine 1 characterized by being sandwiched between a rear wall G3 of a lower space and a sheet metal BK.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal flows into the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control device SS, the sheet metal BK is provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, the sub-control device SS is provided on the back side of the lower space and is sandwiched between the rear wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK. Can not be removed. This enhances the security of the sub-control device SS.

  (22-2) Since the sheet metal BK is connected to the metal frame of the gaming machine 1, radiation caused by contact of the medals with the sheet metal BK and radiation caused by contact between metal medals caused by dropping medals are It can be grounded via a metal frame.

  Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-12239, a button unit provided with a locking portion that is elastically deformed on a side surface so as to be attachable from the front to an opening of a front door is provided. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine has been known in which a button unit is provided with a flange portion larger than the opening to fill a gap between the button unit and the opening. In such a gaming machine, the button unit can be easily fitted into the opening from the front surface by utilizing the elastic deformation of the locking portion. In addition, since the flange portion fills the gap between the button unit and the opening, it is possible to insert a wire or the like from the gap to elastically deform the locking portion, thereby preventing an unauthorized act of removing the button unit.

  However, there is a case where the button unit cannot be sufficiently fixed to the front door simply by elastically deforming and fixing the locking portion to the back of the front door. In addition, the appearance may be impaired by exposing the flange portion to the outside (front door).

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine in which a button can be firmly fixed to a housing.

(23-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a cabinet G,
A second pedestal portion DD2b provided in the cabinet G and a maximum BET button DD8 attached via an opening DD2ba formed in the second pedestal portion DD2b;
With
The maximum BET button DD8 is
An operation unit DD81 arranged outside the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba, and having communication holes DD816a and DD816b and screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b, and having a flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba;
A locking portion DD82 which is arranged on the inner side of the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba, has communication holes DD826a and DD826b, and has a flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba;
The gaming machine 1 is provided with communication holes DD826a and DD826b, communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and screws DD83a and DD83b that are connected to and screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

  According to the above configuration, the operating portion DD81 and the locking portion DD82 are opened by the screws DD83a and DD83b that connect and screw together with the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b. It can be fixed to the second pedestal part DD2b via the part DD2ba. In addition, since the operation unit DD81 has a shape portion larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from dropping from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. In addition, since the locking portion DD82 also has the flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from going out of the cabinet G from inside the opening DD2ba. Thereby, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

(23-2) In the present invention, in the gaming machine 1, the operation unit DD81 includes:
A button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 slidable through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the DD812 pushed by the pressing to the initial position,
Has,
It is characterized in that the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same.

According to the above configuration, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same, when the first member DD812 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is moved by the first member DD812. It can be hidden and only the first member DD812 pressed by the player can be shown outside. Thereby, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
Further, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is the same as the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811, the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is smaller than that of the button base DD811. A structure that can easily prevent unauthorized intrusion from a gap between the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the base DD811 can be provided.

(24-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including a reel (reel RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, the change control means (main control board MS, driving Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means to stop and display the symbols arranged on the reel. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference (circumference RUD) with the rotation of the reel;
A sensor (sensor unit RU112) having one point on the circumference (detection point RUP) as a detection position,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The reference position specifying unit sets a position of the reel when detecting that the detection piece has changed from a state where the detection piece is not detected to a state where the detection piece is detected as a first reference position, and the detection piece is detected. The position of the reel when detecting that the state has changed from the state to the undetected state is defined as a second reference position,
The detection piece is continuously detected by the sensor until the reel position reaches the second reference position after the first reference position.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A stop switch for controlling the operation of the motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for rotating and stopping each reel, and detecting that the start lever has been operated, based on a random number value. A so-called pachi-slot game machine that stops reel rotation based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. Have been.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine using a stepping motor as a motor for driving the rotation of a reel is known (see JP-A-2006-263284). In such a gaming machine, a detection piece (reel index) is provided at a specific portion of the reel, and the reel position can be calculated based on the number of times the pulse is output based on the detection of the reel index. . By calculating the position of the reel using such a method, it is not necessary to provide the number of detecting pieces corresponding to the symbols, and the cost can be reduced.

  However, the position of the reel calculated while the detection piece is not detected is a theoretical position obtained based on the number of times of output of the pulse, and when an irregular operation such as stopping the reel with bare hands occurs. May not always match the actual reel position.

  According to the above configuration, the detection piece that rotates along the predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel is continuously detected by the sensor whose detection position is one point on the circumference. Then, the first reference position is specified by detecting that the detection piece has changed from the non-detection state to the detection state (so-called on-edge), and the detection is performed from the state in which the detection piece is detected. The second reference position is specified by detecting the change to the non-existent state (so-called off-edge). Therefore, during one rotation of the reel, it is possible to perform detection twice when the reel position becomes the first reference position and when the reel position becomes the second reference position. As described above, since the detection is performed twice during one rotation of the reel, the time until the stop operation becomes valid after the rotation speed of the reel reaches the theoretically specified speed (after the acceleration processing is completed). Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that it is not possible to perform one-turn pressing due to the relationship between the position of the design to be pressed and the position of the detection piece, and as a result, uneven timing at which the stop operation becomes effective is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling inconvenience during the stop operation.

(24-2) the first reference position and the second reference position are opposed to each other on a straight line passing through the center axis of the reel with the center axis interposed therebetween;
The sensing piece includes an area on the circumferential path from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and the second reference position Has a shape that does not include a region extending from the position corresponding to the first reference position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

  According to the above configuration, even if only one sensor is provided, it is possible to perform detection twice while the reel makes one rotation, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided is obtained. Can be That is, without increasing the number of sensors, it is possible to reduce the possibility that one round push cannot be performed due to the relationship between the position of the design to be pushed and the position of the detection piece.

(25-1) A symbol display means (reel) provided with a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, the change control means (main control board MS, driving Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means to stop and display the symbols arranged on the reel. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Illumination means (backlight RR4 or the like) for illuminating the pattern stopped and displayed on the symbol display means from behind.
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A step switch motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and controls the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output by a start switch and a stop switch. And a reel control unit for controlling the rotation of each reel and stopping the reel. Then, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. A so-called gaming machine is known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a back lamp for irradiating a symbol from the inside of a reel (see JP-A-2009-178268). According to such a gaming machine, when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to give the effect to the symbol itself, such as highlighting the symbol constituting the symbol combination.

  However, generally, in a gaming machine, since a plurality of reels are provided adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction, lights of the back lamps irradiating adjacent reels interfere with each other, and a good effect is produced. There was a problem that we could not expect.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels, and a front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view. Therefore, since the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the support plate has a function as a partition plate. Light can be prevented from reaching adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as the partition plate is not provided simply by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is provided by forming the front portion of the support plate into a substantially arcuate shape in a side view. Therefore, the support plate does not stand out from the appearance of the player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled.

  The support plate has a front portion having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view) continuously formed from both ends of an arc defining the bow shape in a side view toward the rear. Unit. Note that the bow shape is a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc.

  Further, the support plate may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member. For example, the support plate may be a motor mounting plate for mounting a motor (stepping motor) for driving the reel to rotate.

(25-2) A symbol display means (reel) provided with a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, the change control means (main control board MS, driving Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means to stop and display the symbols arranged on the reel. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Illumination means (backlight RR4 or the like) for illuminating the pattern stopped and displayed on the symbol display means from behind.
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels,
A front portion of the support plate is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate that supports the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels, and a front portion of the support plate is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in side view. Therefore, since the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the support plate has a function as a partition plate. Light can be prevented from reaching adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not provided by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is provided by forming the front portion of the support plate in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. As a result, the support plate does not stand out from the appearance of the player, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be prevented from being impaired.

  The front portion of the support plate, which is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in side view, has substantially the same size as the opposing reel portion, and it is desirable that both portions overlap. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the support plate is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion is substantially covered by the front portion of the support plate. Desirably, it is completely covered. Thus, it is possible to achieve a good balance between providing the support plate with a function as a partition plate and maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

  For example, the support plate is formed in a substantially semicircular front portion overlapping the front half of the reel in a side view, and continuously formed from both ends of an arc defining the semicircle in a side view toward the rear. And a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in side view).

(26-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including a reel (reel RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, the change control means (main control board MS, driving Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means to stop and display the symbols arranged on the reel. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detection piece (a detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The sensor is mounted on a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122).
A screw insertion portion (screw hole RU11c / screw hole RU11d) into which a screw (screw RU1124a / RU1124b) for fastening the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be inserted into the first predetermined portion and the motor mounting plate. 2 are provided at two predetermined locations, and at two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDB) substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDA) connecting the first predetermined place and the second predetermined place. And positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU11e and RU11f) are provided at a third predetermined location and a fourth predetermined location located on opposite sides of the first straight line as boundaries.
The pedestal member is provided with positioning projections (projections RU1122j and RU1122k) that can be inserted into the positioning insertion portions provided at the two locations.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A step switch motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and controls the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output by a start switch and a stop switch. And a reel control unit for controlling the rotation of each reel and stopping the reel. Then, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. A so-called gaming machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see JP-A-2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on this rotation path. Then, the position at which the reel index is detected is set as the reel reference position, and the reel position is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting the reel index is generally provided on a motor mounting plate on which a motor of the reel is mounted via a base member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the pedestal member is not accurately positioned on the motor mounting plate, erroneous determination of a game result determined based on the reel stop position or damage to the gaming machine due to contact between the sensor and the reel index may occur. There was a risk of doing so.

  According to the above configuration, when the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are mounted, the positioning projection of the pedestal member is inserted into the positioning insertion portions at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the motor mounting plate. The pedestal member can be positioned with respect to the mounting plate, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are screwed and fixed. The position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate is regulated at four places of two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions, and further, a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions, and two positioning insertion portions. Are set to be perpendicular to the second straight line connecting. Thus, it is possible to prevent the position of the pedestal member from being shifted with respect to the motor mounting plate. Furthermore, since the screwing is performed only at two places of the two screw inserting portions, the mounting operation can be simplified. As a result, the mounting of the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be easily and accurately positioned and performed, and erroneous determination of a game result and damage to the gaming machine can be prevented.

  (26-2) The positioning insertion portion provided at one of the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location is formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the second linear direction. .

  According to the above configuration, one of the two positioning insertion portions arranged on the second straight line is formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the second linear direction. Thereby, an error in the interval in forming the two positioning projections on the pedestal member can be allowed.

  The positioning insertion portion has a longitudinal direction substantially perpendicular to a tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece at the detection position of the sensor.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the reference position of the reel by the sensor even if a positional deviation from the base member occurs in the fitting hole having the longitudinal direction.

(27-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including a reel (reel RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols arranged on the reel. RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 or the like) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, the change control means (main control board MS, driving Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by a player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means to stop and display the symbols arranged on the reel. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation;
A detecting piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference with the rotation of the reel,
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece,
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached a reference position based on detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
With
The reel position specifying means includes:
The sensor is mounted on a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a base member (base member RU1122).
A screw insertion portion (screw hole RU1122c / screw hole RU1122d) into which a screw (screw RU1123a / RU1123b) for fastening the sensor to the pedestal member can be inserted into the pedestal member at a first predetermined position and a second predetermined position. And two points on a second straight line (straight line RUDD) substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDC) connecting the first predetermined place and the second predetermined place. Positioning protrusions (protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f) are provided at a third predetermined position and a fourth predetermined position located on the side where the sensor detects the detection piece with respect to the first straight line,
The sensor is provided with positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f) into which the positioning projections provided at the two locations can be inserted.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”) have been inserted, and it has been detected that a player has operated a start lever, and a plurality of reels have been detected. A start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a signal for requesting a stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel are detected by detecting that a player has pressed a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A step switch motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and controls the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output by a start switch and a stop switch. And a reel control unit for controlling the rotation of each reel and stopping the reel. Then, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery (“internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. A so-called gaming machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see JP-A-2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on this rotation path. Then, the position at which the reel index is detected is set as the reel reference position, and the reel position is calculated based on this reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting the reel index is generally provided on a motor mounting plate on which a motor of the reel is mounted via a base member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the sensor is not accurately positioned on the pedestal member, there is a possibility that the game machine may be damaged due to erroneous determination of a game result determined based on the reel stop position or contact between the sensor and the reel index. was there.

  According to the above configuration, at the time of mounting the pedestal member and the sensor, the positioning projections at the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location of the pedestal member are inserted into the positioning insertion portion of the sensor, whereby the sensor of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is Positioning can be performed, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the pedestal member and the sensor are screwed and fixed. The position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is regulated at four places: two screw insertion portions and two positioning protrusions, and further connects a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions. It is set so that the second straight line is perpendicular to the second straight line. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member. Furthermore, since the screwing is performed only at two places of the two screw inserting portions, the mounting operation can be simplified. As a result, the attachment of the sensor to the pedestal member can be easily and accurately positioned and performed, and erroneous determination of a game result and damage to the gaming machine can be prevented.

  (27-2) The screw insertion portion provided at one of the first predetermined portion and the second predetermined portion is formed in a long hole shape in which the first linear direction is a longitudinal direction. .

  According to the above configuration, one of the two screw insertion portions arranged on the first straight line is formed in an elongated hole shape whose longitudinal direction is the first linear direction. Thereby, an error in the interval in forming the two screwing locations in the sensor can be allowed.

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, as disclosed in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-245279, the game machine provided with the locking member attached after attaching a button unit and preventing unauthorized removal of a button unit is known. According to such a gaming machine, by attaching the locking member to the existing button unit, unauthorized removal of the button unit can be prevented without changing the existing button unit.

  However, installing a new additional component to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit requires securing a storage space for the additional component in the gaming machine, which may not be easy to apply. .

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent unauthorized removal of a button unit while suppressing an increase in the size of components. I do.

(28-1) One aspect of the present invention relates to a button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 slidable through the through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the first member DD812 pushed in by the pressing to the initial position,
A photosensor DD814 having a light emitting unit DD814a and a light receiving unit DD814b,
A second member DD815 having a light-shielding piece DD8151 for blocking between the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b of the photosensor DD814;
A maximum BET button DD8 having
The second member DD815 is
It has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the gaming machine 1 is attached to a portion of the first member DD812 that extends from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and is attached to a part of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. Have been. Thereby, the second member DD815 can prevent the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from being illegally removed.
In addition, since other members are not used, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of components.

(28-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the button base DD811 is formed with two through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The first member DD812 has two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b that can slide through the two through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The second member DD815 is attached so as to connect between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. It is characterized in that it is provided at an intermediate portion between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the holes DD811a and DD811b.

  According to the above configuration, the light-shielding piece DD8151 slides the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 by the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b interlocking with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player. A light-shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of a second member DD815 attached between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through-holes DD811a and DD811b is provided between the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b. It can be cut off across the space.

  (28-3) Since the first member DD812 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b, the first member DD812 is prevented from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b toward the second member DD815. In addition, unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8 can be further prevented.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-44199, there has been known a gaming machine in which a front door is separated into an upper door and a lower door, and each can be opened and closed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to open and close only necessary portions when supplying medals (opening and closing the lower door) and when adjusting the mechanical reel (opening and closing the upper door). Can be prevented (improved security).

  By the way, in recent years, unitization of operation devices, effect devices, and the like has been performed in order to simplify the recycling of gaming machine parts and the like.

  Here, for example, the effect device unitized may be stored in a space on the housing side corresponding to the upper door. By doing so, it is possible to easily replace the effect device at the time of model change or recycling.

  However, when the unitized effect device is large, the upper door (or the lower door) may be in the way when changing models or recycling.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly take in and out a device housed inside the gaming machine.

(29-1) One of the present inventions
Cabinet G has shaft portions UH21 and UH22, and engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24,
The upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet G is:
Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 that are rotatably overlapped with the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and are slidable with respect to the axis UH121A of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22;
Until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the upper door mechanism DU engages with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 to regulate the sliding of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131. Engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 that are released from engagement with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 when opened to a predetermined angle or more,
A gaming machine 1 characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are pivoted. It restricts sliding along the axis UH121A of the sections UH21 and UH22. Accordingly, the release of the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 can be restricted, and the removal of the upper door mechanism DU from the cabinet G can be locked.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened to a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are disengaged from the shaft portion UH21. -It is possible to slide along the axis UH121A of the UH22. As a result, the overlap between the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.

  (29-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1, wherein the upper door mechanism DU is in a closed state when the upper door mechanism DU is closed with respect to the cabinet G, and is in an open state when the upper door mechanism DU is 90 ° opened with respect to the cabinet G. The predetermined angle is larger than the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the closed state and smaller than 90 ° which is the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the open state.

  According to the above configuration, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (90 ° opening).

(30-1) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism disposed at the left end of the door and guiding and emitting light to the left end region of the door,
A right end light emitting mechanism disposed at the right end of the door and guiding the right end area of the door to emit light.
A central light-emitting substrate that is arranged at the center of the door and emits light,
A light guide mechanism for guiding the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of a left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2009-178268). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect. Generally, a gaming machine is installed side by side on an installation island in a game arcade, so the size of the gaming machine is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices are provided, there is a possibility that a space for a configuration including a reflector and a light transmitting plate for effecting light using a conventional LED may not be sufficient. According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate is guided to at least one of the left peripheral region and the left peripheral region by the light guiding mechanism, so that light is hardly guided by the left end light emitting mechanism or the right end light emitting mechanism. Light can be emitted also in the region. Thereby, even if it is a door in a limited space, it is possible to perform a light effect at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-2) The central light emitting substrate is provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on an upper surface and a lower surface, respectively.
An upper light guiding mechanism that guides light from the upper light source to a position separated from the central portion, and a lower light guiding mechanism that guides light from the lower light source to a position separated from the central portion. Have.

  According to the above configuration, the upper light source on the upper surface and the lower light source on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate can cause the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region to emit light by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism, The left peripheral area and the right peripheral area can be expanded to a wider range and place. Thereby, even if it is a door in a limited space, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-3) a door (upper door mechanism UD) capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that is disposed at a left end of the door and emits light in a plane at a left end region of the door;
A right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that is disposed at the right end of the door and emits light in a plane at the right end area of the door;
A central light emitting mechanism HA4 arranged at the center of the door,
The central light emitting mechanism,
A central light-emitting substrate (LED substrate HA411 in the top lens) provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively;
An upper light guide mechanism (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) that guides light from the upper light source provided on the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate to an upper light guide region to emit light in a planar shape;
A lower light guide mechanism (right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) that guides light from the lower light source provided on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate to a lower light guide region to emit light in a planar shape. And

  According to the above configuration, the central light-emitting substrate of the central light-emitting mechanism has an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, and these light sources are formed by the upper light-guiding mechanism and the lower light-guiding mechanism, respectively. The lower light guide region emits light in a planar manner. Thereby, in addition to the left end area by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end area by the right end light emitting mechanism, the upper light guide area and the lower light guide area can be made to emit light by one central light emitting mechanism. Even in the case of a door, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations with a higher effect.

  (30-4) The upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism are arranged symmetrically about the center light emitting substrate.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region exist symmetrically with respect to the central light emitting substrate, even in the door of the limited space, the production of light at a plurality of places can be achieved. , Can be performed with a higher effect.

(30-5) The upper light guide mechanism includes an upper reflector (a reflector HA412 in the top lens, a hiding member HA16 in the LED lens in the top lens) that covers the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate and the upper light source, and the upper reflector and the center. An upper light-guiding lens (left light-guiding lens HA413, right light-guiding lens HA414) arranged on the right and left sides of the gap with the light-emitting substrate, and arranged to the upper light-guiding region,
The lower light guide mechanism includes a lower reflector that covers the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate and the lower light source, the lower reflectors (the reflector HA412 in the top lens, the LED substrate hidden member HA16 in the top lens), and the central light emitting device. And a lower light guide lens ((right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) disposed to the side of the gap with the substrate and arranged to the lower light guide region.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to achieve the production of light at a plurality of locations with a simple configuration including the reflector and the light guide lens.

(30-6) The upper light guide mechanism is arranged to emit light from the left end area of the door and each area on the center side from the right end area as the upper light guide area,
The lower light guide mechanism is disposed so as to emit light above the upper speakers arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door, respectively, as a lower light guide area.

  According to the above configuration, an area in which light cannot be sufficiently emitted by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism can be emitted by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism.

(31-1) A gaming machine having an effect device (screen mechanism D) arranged at the center of the front of the housing (housing 2) and a light emitting unit (left panel mechanism HJ) arranged on the side of the effect device. And
The light emitting unit,
A light source device (left LED substrate HJ1) capable of irradiating light to the front side and the rear side of the housing;
A partition member (partition mechanism HJ2) that divides the light toward the front side into two, and guides the one of the divided lights toward one side of the housing;
A side translucent member (upper left side lens HJ3) which constitutes a part of one side surface of the housing and transmits the one of the divided light guided by the partition member;
A front light transmitting member (lower left lens HJ) that forms a part of the front surface of the housing and transmits light that is divided into the other by the partition member;
An inner light guide member (inner light guide member HJ5) that guides light toward the rear surface side in a direction in which the effect device is arranged;
Having.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect.

  Generally, a gaming machine is installed side by side on an installation island in a game arcade, so the size of the gaming machine is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices or effect devices that occupy a large space are provided, there is a possibility that sufficient space for a configuration including a reflector and a light transmitting plate for effecting light using a conventional LED may not be obtained. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the light source device toward the front side of the housing is divided into two, one of which is guided by the partition member toward one of the side surfaces of the housing and transmitted from the side light transmitting member, The other is transmitted from the front light transmitting member. Light emitted from the light source device toward the rear surface of the housing is guided by the light guide member to the effect device side. Thus, by merely providing the light emitting unit on the side surface, it is possible not only to achieve the effect light from the front and side surfaces of the gaming machine housing, but also to irradiate the effect device side with the light. As a result, the configuration of the effect light in the gaming machine can be reduced in space, and enlargement of the effect device can be allowed.

(31-2) The inner light guide member includes:
A light-transmitting member (left light guide plate HJ51), which is capable of transmitting light, is incident on the rear surface side of the light source device, and is disposed from the incident position to a peripheral edge of the front surface of the rendering device;
A reflecting member (left LED board cover HJ52) which is disposed in engagement with the rear side of the light transmitting member;
Has,
The translucent member,
A projecting portion (projecting portion HJ511a) having a shape protruding into the light source device, arranged in a traveling direction of light toward the rear surface side of the light source device, and receiving light toward the rear surface direction side of the light source device; When,
A wall surface of the light transmitting member, which is engaged with the reflection member, is disposed in a traveling direction of the light incident on the projection, and a reflection surface is inclined in a direction toward the direction of the rendering device and is incident on the projection. An inclined surface (inclined surface HJ511c) for reflecting the reflected light in the direction of the effect device;
An optical path section (optical path section HJ512) in which the light reflected by the inclined surface travels and has a bent shape with respect to the traveling direction of the light;
A light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit HJ513) formed at an end of the light path in the light traveling direction and having a zigzag cross section when viewed from the front;
have.

  According to the above configuration, the light traveling toward the rear surface side of the light source device is incident on the protruding portion, and then the traveling direction is changed to the rendering device side by the reflecting portion. Since the reflection portion is disposed with the reflection member engaged, light is reflected into the inner light guide member. Then, the reflected light passes through an optical path portion having a bent shape, and then reaches a zigzag light emitting portion. As a result, the light-emitting portion is irregularly refracted. Thereby, the light traveling from the light source of the light emitting device is variously emitted to the outside, so that the performance can be enhanced.

(32-1) a corner translucent member (upper left panel mechanism HB) disposed at a corner position on the front side of the upper surface of the housing;
A support member (panel base HH) located behind the corner light transmitting member;
An outer wall member (top lens cover HA11) adjacent to the corner light transmitting member and engaging the adjacent portion;
Has,
The corner translucent member,
A fitting portion (fitting portion HB11) into which a protruding portion (tight screw HH4) disposed to protrude from the support member in the front direction is fitted at the rear side position;
A notch formed in the outer wall member, which is disposed at the adjacent portion on the front side of the fitting portion and is different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion and protrudes from the arrangement portion toward the outer wall member; (Locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14) which engage with the notches HA111, HA112, HA113;
have.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with an effect device capable of performing various effects have been known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685, through the movement of the movable body, a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device is intended. In such a gaming machine, it is known that a side or a part of a front surface of the gaming machine is formed of a translucent member, and the effect is further enhanced by irradiating this with a light source from the inside of the gaming machine. .

  However, when the fixing member is simply fixed with a fixing member such as a screw, the light transmitting member transmits light, and thus the fixing member is visually recognized from the outside, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is significantly impaired. Further, when the translucent member is extended to a position where it is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and fixed with a fixing member, there is a problem that installation of a plurality of effect devices and effect devices occupying a large space as in the related art is limited. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the translucent member is adjacent to the outer wall member while being engaged therewith, and the locking piece of the translucent member is engaged with the cutout portion of the outer wall member. The projection is provided in the front direction from the support member, so that the projection is fitted into the fitting portion of the light transmitting member. Since the protruding portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the light transmitting member, the movement of the light transmitting member in the vertical direction is restricted. Furthermore, since the fitting direction of the protrusion and the protrusion direction of the locking piece are arranged differently, the movement of the light transmitting member in the horizontal direction is restricted by the support member and the outer wall member. As a result, the translucent member can be easily attached to the gaming machine without using the fixing member and without impairing the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

(32-2) a frame member (frame portion HB2) that supports the corner portion light-transmitting member in a vertical direction,
The corner translucent member has a restricting portion (a restricting portion HB21) that extends along the frame member to a rear position of the frame member at a vertically lower position and restricts movement of the corner member in a forward direction. are doing.

  According to the above configuration, since the translucent member is supported by the frame member in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the stress in the vertical direction on the protrusion and the fitting portion into which the protrusion is fitted. Further, since the restricting portion of the translucent member is disposed at the rear position of the frame member, the forward movement of the translucent member itself is restricted, and horizontal stress on the locking pieces and the notches can be reduced. it can. Thereby, deterioration of the light transmitting member and the structure related to the light transmitting member can be reduced.

(33-1) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
Having a decorative projection protruding forward from the upper part of the door,
A light guide plate (top lens light guide plate HA14) having a seamless structure in which the decorative convex portion diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion is provided from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion. The decoration unit HA1 is formed.

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, as disclosed in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-245279, the gaming machine with which the production | presentation apparatus was provided in the front door is known. According to such a gaming machine, various effects can be performed using the effect device, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the front door faces the player, it is in a state where it is likely to receive external force due to contact with the player, so it is necessary to ensure durability.However, if importance is placed on the arrangement and design of the directing device, There was a problem that durability was reduced. In particular, when a protruding portion protruding from the front surface is provided, the possibility of contact increases, so that more durability has been required.

  According to the above configuration, when the light guide plate of the decorative unit is formed by joining a plurality of components, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the components, but if the light guide plate has a seamless structure. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, since the decorative projection formed by the decorative unit having the light guide plate having the seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. In this case, the door is hardly deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

(33-2) The decoration unit is:
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base HA15 connected to the door frame and the top lens cover HA11 that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.
The front side area is curved downward, and the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and is formed in a shape having a vertex at the front end center portion,
The back surface of the front region and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism.

  According to the above configuration, by storing the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply laminated. It is possible to form a decorative convex portion having higher rigidity than a plate-like shape. In addition, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end that moves away from the rear end connected to the door frame.However, by reducing the front-end width in the left-right direction to reduce the weight, the rigidity of the front-side area and It is possible to increase the strength. In addition, the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit curved downward is connected to the frame of the door via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit is formed by the decoration unit support mechanism. It is supported in the horizontal direction, and the front region has large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. Thereby, even when an external force is applied to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit from a player or the like, the decorative convex portion is hardly deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased. It has become.

(33-3) a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
Having a decorative projection protruding forward from the upper part of the door,
The decorative convex portion,
A top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, a top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface, and a top lens cover that transmits the light to the outside,
There is a decorative unit whose width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and which is formed in a shape having a vertex at the center of the front end.

  According to the above configuration, the bending moment increases as approaching the front end which is away from the rear end connected to the door frame, but the weight is reduced by decreasing the width in the left-right direction on the front end side, thereby increasing rigidity. And the strength can be increased. As a result, since the decorative convex portion has a large rigidity and strength in the front side region, even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine, the decorative convex portion is unlikely to be deformed or damaged. As a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

(33-4) The decoration unit is:
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, thereby simplifying the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate. Since the second moment of area is larger than in the case of laminating into a plate shape, it is possible to form a highly rigid decorative projection.

(33-5) In the decoration unit, a front region is curved downward,
The back surface of the front area of the decorative unit and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism.

  According to the above configuration, the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit curved downward is connected to the door frame via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit is decorated. The unit is supported horizontally by the unit support mechanism. Thereby, since the decoration convex portion having the decoration unit and the decoration unit support mechanism has a large rigidity and strength in the front-back direction in the front-rear direction, an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. In this case, the door is hardly deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be increased.

  (33-6) An irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light in the direction of a screen device C arranged diagonally below and rearward is disposed behind the decorative convex portion.

  According to the above configuration, since a large space can be secured behind the decorative convex portion, the degree of freedom of the size and arrangement of the irradiation light device can be increased, and the rigidity and strength of the decorative convex portion are high. In addition, the irradiation light device can be sufficiently protected.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are at predetermined positions in the display unit A. Fixed. On the other hand, a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction is provided in the mirror mechanism B3, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet 21. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21 of the gaming machine 1, by loosening or tightening the screws with the upper door mechanism UD opened, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, and the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

[Third embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, a third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions that apply to the description of the second embodiment in the third embodiment will be omitted.

[Function flow of pachislot]
First, with reference to FIG. 145, a functional flow of a gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a pachislot) according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a functional flow of the pachislot.

  In the pachislo according to the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals.

  When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along a winning determination line described later is determined. In addition, as the types of symbol combinations, there are provided ones related to "winning" in which a bonus such as payout of medals, activation of re-games, etc. are given to a player, and other types related to so-called "losing". I have.

  Subsequently, after a plurality of reels (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) are rotated, when the player presses the stop button, the reel stop control means sets the internal winning combination and the stop button to Control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the pressed timing.

  Here, in the pachislo, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the relevant reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is determined for four symbols.

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means displays the symbol combination as much as possible along the winning determination line using the above specified time. To stop the reel from rotating. On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the rotation of the reels is stopped using the specified time so that the symbols are not displayed along the winning determination line.

  When the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped in this way, the winning determination unit determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the winning determination line is a winning combination. When it is determined that the game is related to a winning, a privilege such as payout of a medal is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot.

  In this specification, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop button) performed first when all the reels (the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel) are rotating is referred to as a first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot, various effects are performed in the above-described series of flows using the display of images performed by the display unit, the output of light performed by various LEDs, the output of sound performed by speakers, or a combination thereof. Is

  When the start lever is operated by the player, a random number value for effect (hereinafter, random number value for effect) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines, by lottery, the effect content to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the effect contents are determined, the effect execution means is linked with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when the determination of the presence or absence of a prize is performed. To carry out the production. In this way, in the pachislot, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the interest of the player is improved.

[Control system of pachislot]
Next, a control system provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 146 and FIG.

  As described in the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 includes the main control board MS and the sub control device SS. The main control board MS constitutes a main control circuit 1060. The main control circuit 1060 is a circuit for controlling a main flow of a game in the gaming machine 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC, RR, and determination of presence or absence of a prize. The sub control device SS forms a sub control circuit 1070. The sub-control circuit 1070 is a circuit that controls execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

  In the second embodiment, the description has been given assuming that the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is controlled by the main control board MS. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is controlled by the sub control device SS.

  Hereinafter, specific configurations of the main control circuit 1060 and the sub control circuit 1070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147.

<Main control circuit>
First, the main control circuit 1060 including the main control board MS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control circuit.

  The main control circuit 1060 has a microcomputer 1030 installed on a main control board MS as a main component. The microcomputer 1030 includes a main CPU 1031, a main ROM 1032, and a main RAM 1033.

  The main ROM 1032 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 1031, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 1070, and the like. The main RAM 1033 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  The main CPU 1031 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 1034, a frequency divider 1035, a random number generator 1036, and a sampling circuit 1037. The clock pulse generation circuit 1034 and the frequency divider 1035 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 1031 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 1036 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 1037 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  A switch or the like is connected to an input port of the microcomputer 1030. The main CPU 1031 controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R in response to an input from a switch or the like. The stop switch 1007S (stop switches 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) detects that each of the three stop buttons DD7 (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 1006S detects that the start lever DD6 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The medal sensor 1005S detects that the medal accepted by the medal insertion slot DD5 has passed through the selector. The C / P switch 1013S detects that the C / P button DD13 has been pressed by the player.

  BET switch 1008S detects that the BET button has been pressed by the player. As the BET button, a 1-BET button is provided in addition to the maximum BET button DD8 described in the second embodiment. As described above, when the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed once, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals. On the other hand, if the 1-BET button is pressed once, “1” is selected as the number of inserted medals, and if the 1-BET button is pressed twice, “2” is selected as the number of inserted medals. When the BET button is pressed three times, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals. When the BET button (the maximum BET button DD8 or the 1-BET button) is pressed, the number of medals (two or three in the present embodiment) required for performing one game is inserted. The winning determination line is activated.

  Peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 1030 include stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R and a hopper mechanism HP. A circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to an output port of the microcomputer 1030.

  The drive control board RU114 controls the drive of the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R provided for the respective reels (reels RL, RC, RR). The reel position detection circuit 1050 detects a reference position (a first reference position and a second reference position) each time the reels RL, RC, RR make a half turn by an optical sensor (sensor unit RU112) having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. (See FIG. 116).

  The stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R is transmitted to the reels RL, RC, RR via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R, the reels RL, RC, RR rotate at a fixed angle.

  The main CPU 1031 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R after detecting the reference position, and thereby determines the rotation angles of the reels RL, RC, RR (mainly how many symbols are on the reels). The rotation of the symbols RL, RC, and RR is managed, and the positions of the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the reels RL, RC, and RR are managed.

  The hopper drive circuit 1041 controls the operation of the hopper mechanism HP. The payout completion signal circuit 1051 manages the medal detection performed by the medal detection unit 1040S provided in the hopper mechanism HP, and checks whether the number of medals discharged from the hopper mechanism HP to the number of payouts has been reached. I do.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 1070 constituted by the sub control device SS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a sub control circuit.

  The sub-control circuit 1070 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 1060, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub control circuit 1070 basically includes a sub CPU 1071, a sub ROM 1072, a sub RAM 1073, a rendering processor 1074, a drawing RAM 1075, a driver 1076, a DSP (digital signal processor) 1077, an audio RAM 1078, an A / D converter 1079, and an amplifier 1080. It is comprised including.

  The sub CPU 1071 controls output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the sub ROM 1072 according to a command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub RAM 1073 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub-ROM 1072 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 1071 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 1060 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random number values, determining and registering effect contents (effect data). , A projection mapping control task for controlling display of video by the display unit A based on the determined effect contents, an LED control task for controlling light output by LEDs, a voice control task for controlling sound output by speakers DD25L and DD25R, and the like. Is included.

  The data storage area is a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. The storage area includes a storage area, a storage area for storing LED data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-control circuit 1070 includes, as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled, a projector mechanism B2, a drive motor E25 configuring a front screen drive mechanism E2, a drive motor F24 configuring a reel screen drive mechanism F2, a liquid crystal display device. DD20, speakers DD25L and DD25R, and an LED board are connected.

  The projector mechanism B2 controls the light source, three liquid crystal panels corresponding to the three primary colors of light, red, green, and blue, a lens that expands and emits light transmitted through the liquid crystal panel, and controls the light source and the liquid crystal panel. And a transmission type liquid crystal projector including The control unit controls the turning on and off of the light source based on the instruction from the sub CPU 1071, and controls the driving voltage according to the image data to be applied to each pixel of the liquid crystal panel.

  The sub CPU 1071 controls one of the plurality of screens (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1) by controlling the projector mechanism B2 to emit light including an image from the lens. Display the image on the screen.

  As described in the second embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively.

  The sub CPU 1071 rotates the front screen mechanism E1 between the front exposure position and the front standby position by controlling the drive motor E25, and controls the drive motor F24 to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 by reel exposure. It is rotated between the position and the reel standby position (see FIG. 53).

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 51). .

  On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, and the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed. Is displayed (see FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 52). .

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be located at the reel exposure position. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be located at the front exposure position.

  The sub CPU 1071 executes the rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position, and performs the reel screen operation on the condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. The turning operation of the mechanism F1 is executed.

  The sensor mechanism CS (sensors CS1 to CS3) is connected to the sub control circuit 1070, and the sub CPU 1071 converts signals output from the sensors CS1 to CS3 in the same manner as described in the second embodiment. Based on this, the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately managed. This prevents the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  The sub CPU 1071, the rendering processor 1074, the drawing RAM 1075 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 1076 create a video according to the animation data specified by the contents of the effect, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device DD20.

  The sub CPU 1071, DSP 1077, audio RAM 1078, A / D converter 1079, and amplifier 1080 output sounds such as BGM through the speakers DD25L and DD25R according to sound data specified by the contents of the effect.

  Further, the sub CPU 1071 controls turning on and off of the LED via the LED board according to the LED data specified by the effect contents.

[Sub-control board case]
The sub-control device SS configuring the sub-control circuit 1070 described above includes the sub-control board 2070 and the sub-control board case 2000 that houses the sub-control board 2070. Hereinafter, the configuration of the sub-control board case 2000 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 165.

  FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the sub control device. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the base member. FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the cover member as viewed from the bottom side. FIG. 151 is a front view of the sub control device. FIG. 152A is a top view of the sub-control device. FIG. 152B is a bottom view of the sub control device.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the sub control device SS includes a sub control board 2070, a base member 2010, and a cover member 2020. The sub-control board case 2000 is configured by the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020.

  The sub-control board 2070 is composed of two boards slid and arranged substantially in parallel, and has mounted thereon various electronic components such as a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. In addition, the sub-control board 2070 is provided with a connector 2071 into which a cable for electrically connecting the sub-control board 2070 to another control board or device is inserted.

  The sub-control board 2070 is provided with a screw hole 2072 for attaching the sub-control board 2070 to the base member 2010. Further, a through-hole 2073 through which a screw is inserted when the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled by screwing is formed in the sub-control board 2070.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the base member 2010 includes a bottom plate 2011 having a rectangular shape in a top view, and side edges 2012a, 2012b, 2012c, and 2012d rising upward from respective sides constituting the outer periphery of the bottom plate 2011. Side edges 2012a and 2012c are formed in the longitudinal direction of the base member 2010, and side edges 2012b and 2012d are formed in the short direction of the base member 2010.

  The bottom plate 2011 is provided with a boss 2013 for attaching the sub-control board 2070 to the base member 2010. The bottom plate 2011 has a screw hole 2014 for assembling the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 by screwing.

  Base side bonding portions 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) for bonding the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are formed on the side edges 2012a, 2012b, 2012c. The base side bonding portion 2030a formed on the side edge portion 2012a is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2012d than the center of the side edge portion 2012a in the longitudinal direction. The base side adhesive portion 2030b formed on the side edge portion 2012b is provided at the center of the side edge portion 2012b in the lateral direction. The base-side bonding portion 2030c formed on the side edge 2012c is provided at a position closer to the side edge 2012d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge 2012c. The base-side bonding portion 2030 will be described later in detail.

  Note that a heat passage hole 2015 is formed in the bottom plate 2011. A heat sink 2074 is attached to the sub-control board 2070 by screw fastening (see FIG. 148), but the heat passage hole 2015 can face the screw when the sub-control device SS is viewed from the bottom side. It is provided in a suitable position. Thus, heat can be released to the outside of the sub-control device SS through the heat passage hole 2015, and the heat radiation effect can be enhanced.

  The base member 2010 is made of ABS resin, and is formed by separately forming the base-side adhesive portion 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) and a portion other than the base-side adhesive portion 2030, and then bonding and fixing them. It is one. A portion of the base member 2010 other than the base-side bonding portion 2030 is referred to as a base-side base portion. The base side base portion is plated, while the base side bonded portion 2030 is not plated. In this embodiment, the base member 2010 is formed by plating only the base-side base portion of the base-side base portion and the base-side bonded portion 2030, and then fixing the base-side base portion and the base-side bonded portion 2030. It is produced by doing.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the cover member 2020 has a box-like shape with an opening at the bottom, has a rectangular shape in a top view, and has a top plate 2021 formed with a predetermined step (see FIG. 148). And side edge portions 2022a, 2022b, 2022c, and 2022d protruding downward from respective sides constituting the outer periphery of the top plate 2021. The side edges 2022a and 2022c are formed in the longitudinal direction of the cover member 2020, and the side edges 2022b and 2022d are formed in the short direction of the cover member 2020.

  In a state where the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled, the side edge portion 2012a and the side edge portion 2022a form a continuous wall surface, and the side edge portion 2012b and the side edge portion 2022b form a continuous wall surface. The side edge portion 2012c and the side edge portion 2022c form a continuous wall surface, and the side edge portion 2012d and the side edge portion 2022d form a continuous wall surface (see FIG. 151).

  As shown in FIG. 150, a boss 2023 for assembling the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 by screwing is formed inside the cover member 2020.

  Cover-side bonding portions 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) for bonding the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are formed on the side edge portions 2022a, 2022b, and 2022c. The cover side adhesive portion 2050a formed on the side edge portion 2022a is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2022d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge portion 2022a, and the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled. In this state, it is formed at a position corresponding to the base-side bonding portion 2030a. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050b formed on the side edge portion 2022b is provided at the center of the side edge portion 2022b in the short direction, and when the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled, the base-side adhesive portion 2050b is provided. It is formed at a position corresponding to 2030b. The cover side adhesive portion 2050c formed on the side edge portion 2022c is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2022d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge portion 2022c, and the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled. In this state, it is formed at a position corresponding to the base-side bonding portion 2030c. The cover-side bonding portion 2050 will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 148, an opening 2024 for exposing the connector 2071 disposed on the sub-control board 2070 to the outside of the sub-control board case 2000 is formed in the side edge portion 2022d. The opening 2024 is formed in a rectangular shape over a considerable range of the side edge portion 2022d, and the cover-side adhesive portions 2050a and 2050c are formed near the opening 2024.

  The top plate 2021 is provided with ventilation holes 2025 and 2026 for allowing air to flow between the inside and the outside of the sub-control board case 2000. Thus, while the heat generated inside the sub-control board case 2000 is released to the outside, the cooled air can be taken into the sub-control board case 2000.

  The cover member 2020 is made of ABS resin, and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) and the portion other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 are separately molded and then adhered and fixed. It is one. A portion of the cover member 2020 other than the cover-side bonding portion 2050 is called a cover-side base portion. While the cover-side base portion is plated, the cover-side bonding portion 2050 is not plated. In the present embodiment, the cover member 2020 is formed by plating only the cover-side base portion of the cover-side base portion and the cover-side bonding portion 2050, and then fixing the cover-side base portion and the cover-side bonding portion 2050. It is produced by doing.

  The sub-control board 2070, the base member 2010, and the cover member 2020 as the components of the sub-control apparatus SS have been described above. The sub-control apparatus SS is assembled by the following steps (i) to (iii). Will be

(I) Screwing the sub-control board 2070 and the base member 2010 First, the position of the screw hole 2072 formed in the sub-control board 2070 and the position of the boss 2013 provided on the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 are matched. . In this state, a screw is inserted into the screw hole 2072 from above the sub-control board 2070, and the screw is screwed into the hole formed in the boss 2013. Thus, the sub control board 2070 can be attached to the base member 2010.

(Ii) Screwing the Base Member 2010 and the Cover Member 2020 After the Step (i), the Position of the Screw Hole 2014 Formed in the Bottom Plate 2011 of the Base Member 2010 and the Boss 2023 Formed in the Cover Member 2020 (At this time, the position of the through hole 2073 formed in the sub-control board 2070 also corresponds to the position of the screw hole 2014 and the boss 2023). In this state, a screw is inserted into the screw hole 2014 from below the bottom plate 2011, and the screw is screwed into a hole formed in the boss portion 2023. Thereby, the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 can be assembled.

(Iii) Adhesion of base member 2010 and cover member 2020 At the time when the above step (ii) is completed, base-side adhesive portion 2030a and cover-side adhesive portion 2050a are arranged at corresponding positions, and base-side adhesive The portion 2030b and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050b are arranged at corresponding positions, and the base-side adhesive portion 2030c and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050c are arranged at corresponding positions. In this state, the base side bonding part 2030a and the cover side bonding part 2050a are bonded with an adhesive, the base side bonding part 2030b and the cover side bonding part 2050b are bonded with a bonding agent, and the base side bonding part 2030c and the cover side are bonded. The bonding portion 2050c is bonded with an adhesive.

  Through the steps (i) to (iii), the sub-control device SS (see FIGS. 151 and 152) is assembled.

  The sub-control device SS assembled as described above is attached to the cabinet G (see FIG. 90). As shown in FIG. 152B, a locking portion 2001 is formed on the bottom surface side of the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010. By sliding the sub-control device SS with respect to the rear wall G3 in a state where the bottom surface of the bottom plate 2011 faces the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, the sub-control device SS is locked to the rear wall G3 by the locking portion 2001. be able to. In this state, the sub-control device SS is fixed to the rear wall G3 with the screw inserted through the mounting hole 2002.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the base-side bonding portion 2030 and the cover-side bonding portion 2050 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings, with reference to the process (iii).

  Since the base-side bonding portion 2030a, the base-side bonding portion 2030b, and the base-side bonding portion 2030c have the same configuration, the following description will be made without distinguishing them. Similarly, since the cover-side bonding portion 2050a, the cover-side bonding portion 2050b, and the cover-side bonding portion 2050c have the same configuration, they will be described below without distinction.

<Base side adhesive part>
The base-side bonding portion 2030 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 157. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the base-side bonding portion. FIG. 154 is a front view of the base-side bonding portion. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the base-side adhesive portion as viewed from the rear. FIG. 156 is a right side view of the base-side bonding portion. FIG. 157 is a top view of the base-side bonding portion.

  The base-side bonding portion 2030 has a structure protruding from a side edge 2012 (2012a, 2012b, 2012c) of the base member 2010.

  Specifically, the base-side bonding portion 2030 includes a front wall portion 2031 (see FIG. 154) having a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. The front wall portion 2031 has a side edge 2012 (for example, side edge 2012a) opposite to the side edge 2012 (for example, side edge 2012c) facing the side edge 2012 (for example, the side edge 2012a). Is called the front).

  In addition, the base-side bonding portion 2030 is formed by connecting the upper wall portion 2032 which forms the upper end of the base-side bonding portion 2030 continuously from the front wall portion 2031 and the side end of the base-side bonding portion 2030 which is continuous from the front wall portion 2031. The bottom wall portion 2034 which forms the lower end of the base side bonding portion 2030 continuously from the side wall portion 2033 to be formed, the front wall portion 2031, and the rear end of the base side bonding portion 2030 which continuously forms from the upper wall portion 2032. And a rear wall portion 2035.

  The upper wall portion 2032 is formed above the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012, and the bottom wall portion 2034 is formed below the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 and above the lower end surface 2029. ing.

  The rear wall portion 2035 includes a rear wall main portion 2035a formed continuously from the rear end of the upper wall portion 2032 in the vertical direction, and a horizontal portion formed continuously from the lower end of the rear wall main portion 2035a toward the rear. 2035b, a first inclined portion 2035c formed continuously from the rear end of the horizontal portion 2035b toward the rear, and a first inclined portion formed continuously from the rear end of the first inclined portion 2035c toward the rear. The second inclined portion 2035d, which is steeper than 2035c, is formed continuously from the rear end of the second inclined portion 2035d to the rear, and the slope is steeper than the first inclined portion 2035c, and is formed more than the second inclined portion 2035d. And a third inclined portion 2035e having a gentle inclination. The rear end of the third inclined portion 2035e is continuous with the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge 2012.

  The front wall portion 2031 is formed in a vertical direction at the center, a reference surface 2031a substantially parallel to the side edge portion 2012, a curved surface 2031b having a concave shape with respect to the reference surface 2031a, and a horizontal direction above. And a groove 2031c having a concave shape with respect to the reference surface 2031a.

  The reference surface 2031a has a structure slightly bent near the center between the groove 2031c and the lower end of the front wall 2031. The curved surface 2031b has a shape obtained by cutting out the reference surface 2031a in an arc shape, and is formed to penetrate vertically from the upper wall portion 2032 to the bottom wall portion 2034. The groove portion 2031c is also formed on the side wall portion 2033 continuously from the front wall portion 2031 and has a shape in which the wall surfaces of the front wall portion 2031 and the side wall portion 2033 are cut out in a U-shape. The rear end of the groove 2031c is located at the boundary between the side wall portion 2033 and the rear wall portion 2035 and near the center of the rear wall main portion 2035a in the vertical direction.

<Adhesive part on cover side>
The cover-side bonding portion 2050 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the cover-side adhesive portion. FIG. 159 is a right side view of the cover-side adhesive portion. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the cover-side adhesive portion viewed from below. FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the cover-side adhesive portion viewed from below. FIG. 162 is a bottom view of the cover-side adhesive portion.

  The cover side bonding portion 2050 has a structure protruding from the side edge portion 2022 (2022a, 2022b, 2022c) of the cover member 2020.

  Specifically, the cover-side bonding portion 2050 has a box-like shape with an opening at the bottom, and includes a front wall portion 2051, an upper wall portion 2052, and a side wall portion 2053.

  The front wall portion 2051 is opposite to one side edge portion 2022 (for example, the side edge portion 2022a) and the side edge portion 2022 (for example, the side edge portion 2022c) opposite to the side edge portion 2022 (for example, the side edge portion 2022a). Is referred to as the front), and has a shape in which two lower corners of a rectangle are cut out in a front view. Correspondingly, the side wall portion 2053 has a shape in which a rectangular front portion is swelled downward, and the lower end of the swelled portion has substantially the same height as the lower end surface 2019 of the side edge portion 2022. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the inside of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is surrounded by a front inner wall portion 2054, an upper inner wall portion 2055, a side inner wall portion 2056, and a rear inner wall portion 2057. The front inner wall portion 2054 forms the inner wall of the front wall portion 2051, the upper inner wall portion 2055 forms the inner wall of the upper wall portion 2052, the side inner wall portion 2056 forms the inner wall of the side wall portion 2053, and the rear inner wall portion. 2057 has a structure that is continuous with the side edge portion 2022 and the side edge portion 2022 is deformed.

  The front inner wall portion 2054 has a reference surface 2054a substantially parallel to the side edge portion 2022, and a curved surface 2054b which is formed in the center in a vertical direction and is concave with respect to the reference surface 2054a. The curved surface 2054b has a shape in which the reference surface 2054a is cut out in a tapered shape so that the diameter decreases from the lower side of the front inner wall portion 2054 toward the upper side. On the upper inner wall portion 2055, two rectangular projections 2055a are formed.

  The rear inner wall portion 2057 is substantially parallel to the front inner wall portion 2054 and bulges out from the side edge portion 2022 and is formed bulging continuously from the lower end of the bulging portion 2057a toward the rear. Portion 2057b, a reference portion 2057c formed downward from the rear end of the curved portion 2057b and substantially parallel to the front inner wall portion 2054, and an inclination formed continuously from the lower end of the reference portion 2057c toward the rear. 2057d (see FIG. 165).

<Adhesion of base member and cover member>
The bonding between the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 (the step (iii)) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating a state where the base member and the cover member are being positioned. FIG. 164 is a bottom view of the base-side adhesive portion and the cover-side adhesive portion in a state where the base member and the cover member are screwed together. FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the sub-control device shown in FIG. 152A, taken along the line AA.

  As described above, before the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are bonded to each other, the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are screwed together (step (ii)). When the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are screwed together, the position of the screw hole 2014 formed in the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 and the position of the boss portion 2023 formed in the cover member 2020 are matched. The base-side bonding portion 2030 and the cover-side bonding portion 2050 are also at corresponding positions (see FIG. 163).

  When the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are screwed together, the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 of the base member 2010 (see FIG. 153) and the lower end surface 2019 of the side edge portion 2022 of the cover member 2020 (see FIG. 153). 159). At this time, the portion of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 formed above the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 is the opening of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (the front inner wall portion 2054, the upper inner wall portion 2055, and the side inner wall portion 2050). 2056 and the rear inner wall portion 2057) (see FIG. 164). The space surrounded by the front inner wall portion 2054, the upper inner wall portion 2055, the side inner wall portion 2056, and the rear inner wall portion 2057 is also referred to as the inner space of the cover-side bonding portion 2050.

  In a state in which the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is housed in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the front inner wall portion 2054 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is located forward of the front wall portion 2031 of the base-side adhesive portion 2030. Accordingly, a gap is generated between the front inner wall portion 2054 and the front wall portion 2031. In particular, the curved surface 2054b of the front inner wall portion 2054 and the curved surface 2031b of the front wall portion 2031 face each other, and a large gap is formed between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b as compared with the surroundings.

  In the present embodiment, a nozzle is inserted from a gap generated between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b, and the adhesive is injected using the nozzle. As described above, the curved surface 2054b of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 has a tapered shape, and the shape corresponds to the shape of the nozzle, and when the adhesive is injected, the nozzle faces the curved surface 2054b. Engaged. There is a relatively large gap between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b, and a structure in which a nozzle can be easily inserted is formed. The nozzle is inserted from the bottom surface side of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030, and the cover is attached so that the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is positioned downward when the adhesive is injected. The positions of the side bonding portion 2050 and the base side bonding portion 2030 are maintained.

  As the adhesive, an ultraviolet curable adhesive is used. The ultraviolet curable adhesive injected from the nozzle fills a portion of the internal space of the cover-side bonding portion 2050 that is not occupied by the base-side bonding portion 2030.

  Specifically, in the inner space of the cover-side bonding portion 2050, a gap is formed between the front inner wall portion 2054 of the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the front wall portion 2031 of the base-side bonding portion 2030 at the front, and the rear side. Thus, a gap is also formed between the rear inner wall portion 2057 of the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the rear wall portion 2035 of the base-side bonding portion 2030 (see FIG. 165), and the gap is filled with an ultraviolet curable adhesive. You.

  The ultraviolet curable adhesive injected from the nozzle moves backward along the groove 2031c formed in the front wall 2031. Since the groove portion 2031c is formed symmetrically with respect to the curved surface 2031b (see FIG. 154), the right and left sides of the curved surface 2031b are less likely to be biased in the amount of the ultraviolet-curable adhesive that moves backward, The curable adhesive can be filled uniformly.

  Further, in a state in which the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is accommodated in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the upper wall portion 2032 of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is formed by a protrusion formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050. 2055a (see FIG. 165). Therefore, a gap is formed between the portion of the upper inner wall portion 2055 where the protrusion 2055a is not formed and the upper wall portion 2032, and the ultraviolet curable adhesive injected from the nozzle also moves backward from the gap. .

  In the present embodiment, since the projection 2055a is formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side bonding portion 2050, the base-side bonding portion 2030 is stored in the process of housing the base-side bonding portion 2030 in the internal space of the cover-side bonding portion 2050. If the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is pushed into the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 until the upper wall portion 2032 abuts on the projection 2055a, the gap between the upper inner wall portion 2055 and the upper wall portion 2032 is automatically set. Travel path). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently secure the moving path of the adhesive without requiring a complicated operation such as positioning.

  Further, if an error occurs in the size of the base-side bonding portion 2030 and the cover-side bonding portion 2050 during the molding process (for example, when the position of the upper wall portion 2032 of the base-side bonding portion 2030 is formed to be high, or when the cover is formed). Even when the position of the upper inner wall portion 2055 is lower than the side adhesive portion 2050), at least a gap corresponding to the height of the projection 2055a is secured between the upper inner wall portion 2055 and the upper wall portion 2032. be able to. This can prevent the movement path of the adhesive from being blocked.

  In this manner, after the ultraviolet curable adhesive is filled in a portion of the internal space of the cover side adhesive portion 2050 that is not occupied by the base adhesive portion 2030, the ultraviolet ray is irradiated to cure the ultraviolet curable adhesive. Is done. Thereby, the walls (the front inner wall 2054, the upper inner wall 2055, the side inner wall 2056, and the rear inner wall 2057) that form the internal space of the cover-side adhesive 2050 via the cured adhesive, The base-side bonding portion 2030 accommodated in the space is bonded.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(34-1) a control board (sub-control board 2070) for controlling the game,
A board case (sub-control board case 2000) for accommodating the control board,
The board case is configured by assembling a first member (cover member 2020) and a second member (base member 2010),
The first member has a first bonding portion (cover-side bonding portion 2050) for bonding the first member and the second member, while the second member has the first bonding portion. A second bonding portion (base-side bonding portion 2030) for bonding the member and the second member is formed,
The first bonding portion is formed to surround the second bonding portion,
The first bonding portion and the second bonding portion are bonded by an adhesive interposed between the first bonding portion and the second bonding portion,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the sub-control board case 2000 is configured by assembling the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, and the cover member 2020 is formed with the cover-side bonding portion 2050. On the other hand, the base member 2010 has a base-side bonding portion 2030 formed thereon. The cover side bonding part 2050 is formed so as to surround the base side bonding part 2030, and the cover side bonding part 2050 and the base side bonding part 2030 are located between the cover side bonding part 2050 and the base side bonding part 2030. It is adhered by an intervening adhesive.

  That is, in a state where the cover-side bonding portion 2050 surrounds the base-side bonding portion 2030, an adhesive is interposed between the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030, and the cover-side bonding portion is formed by the bonding agent. 2050 and the base side bonding portion 2030 are bonded. Therefore, unless the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 surrounded by the cover-side bonding portion 2050 are integrally removed, the sub-control board case 2000 cannot be opened. Therefore, in order to open the sub-control board case 2000, it is necessary to break the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 and their surroundings, so that the sub-control board case 2000 is easily opened. Can be prevented.

(34-2) a control board (sub-control board 2070) for controlling the game;
A board case (sub-control board case 2000) for accommodating the control board,
The board case is configured by assembling a first member (cover member 2020) and a second member (base member 2010),
The first member has a first bonding portion (cover-side bonding portion 2050) for bonding the first member and the second member, while the second member has the first bonding portion. A second bonding portion (base-side bonding portion 2030) for bonding the member and the second member is formed,
In a state where the first member and the second member are not assembled, the first bonding portion forms a space capable of storing an adhesive before curing,
In a state where the first member and the second member are assembled, the space contains at least a part of the second adhesive portion and a cured adhesive, and the first adhesive portion A second adhesive portion is adhered by the cured adhesive;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the sub-control board case 2000 is configured by assembling the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, and the cover member 2020 is formed with the cover-side bonding portion 2050. On the other hand, the base member 2010 has a base-side bonding portion 2030 formed thereon. In a state where the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are not assembled, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 forms a space in which the adhesive before curing can be stored, and the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are assembled. In this state, the space (the internal space of the cover-side bonding portion 2050) contains at least a part of the base-side bonding portion 2030 and the cured adhesive, and the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion The bonding portion 2030 is bonded by the cured adhesive.

  That is, in a state where the base-side bonding portion 2030 is accommodated in the space formed by the cover-side bonding portion 2050, the adhesive is interposed between the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 in a state where the adhesive is cured. The cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 are bonded by the bonding agent. Therefore, the sub-control board case 2000 cannot be opened unless the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 housed in the space formed by the cover-side bonding portion 2050 are integrally removed. Therefore, in order to open the sub-control board case 2000, it is necessary to break the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 and their surroundings, so that the sub-control board case 2000 is easily opened. Can be prevented.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the opening 2024 for exposing the connector 2071 to the outside of the sub-control board case 2000 is formed in the side edge 2022d of the cover member 2020. On the other hand, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050a and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050c of the cover member 2020 are provided at a position near the side edge portion 2022d, and the base-side adhesive portion 2030a and the base-side adhesive portion 2030c of the base member 2010 are It is provided near the side edge 2012d corresponding to the edge 2022d. That is, in the vicinity of the opening 2024, the cover-side bonding portion 2050a and the base-side bonding portion 2030a are bonded, and the cover-side bonding portion 2050c and the base-side bonding portion 2030c are bonded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sub-control board case 2000 from being illegally opened through the opening 2024.

  In the third embodiment, the description has been given assuming that the base-side adhesive portion 2030 formed on the base member 2010 is accommodated in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 formed on the cover member 2020. The cover member 2020 corresponds to a first member in the present invention, and the base member 2010 corresponds to a second member in the present invention. Further, the cover-side bonding portion 2050 corresponds to a first bonding portion in the present invention, and the base-side bonding portion 2030 corresponds to a second bonding portion in the present invention. In the present invention, contrary to the third embodiment, the base-side adhesive portion may form an internal space, and the cover-side adhesive portion may be accommodated in the internal space.

  In the third embodiment, the base member 2010 is formed by separately forming the base-side bonding portion 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) and the portion other than the base-side bonding portion 2030, and then bonding and fixing them. It has been described that they are united. In addition, the cover member 2020 is integrally formed by separately molding the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) and a portion other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, and then bonding and fixing them. That was explained. However, in the present invention, the first member may have the first adhesive portion and a portion other than the first adhesive portion integrally formed, and the second member may have a portion other than the second adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion. May be integrally formed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that an ultraviolet curable adhesive is used as the adhesive interposed between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030. The ultraviolet-curable adhesive is not particularly limited as long as it can be cured by irradiating ultraviolet rays, and may be, for example, an acrylate adhesive as a radical polymerization type or an epoxy as a cationic polymerization type. A system adhesive may be used. In the present invention, the adhesive for bonding the first bonding portion and the second bonding portion is not particularly limited, and for example, a photocurable resin containing a monomer, an oligomer, a photopolymerization initiator, various additives, and the like. Alternatively, a curable adhesive other than a photocurable type, such as a thermosetting adhesive or a moisture-curable adhesive, or another adhesive may be appropriately used.

  In the third embodiment, the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are described as being made of ABS resin. In the present invention, the material of the first member and the second member is not particularly limited, and a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate can be appropriately used.

  Further, the mounting position and mounting method of the first member (cover member 2020) and the second member (base member 2010), and the mounting of the board case (sub-control board case 2000) and the control board (sub-control board 2070) The position and the mounting method are not limited to the example of the third embodiment, and can be appropriately changed.

  In the third embodiment, it has been described that the sub-control device SS is attached to the cabinet G such that the bottom surface of the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G face each other. However, the mounting position and the mounting method of the sub-control device are not limited to this example, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the sub-control device may be attached to a door that can open and close the cabinet and a back side of the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the heat passage hole 2015 (see FIG. 149) receives the heat from the liquid crystal display device and transmits the heat to the heat sink 2074 (see FIG. 148) provided with the fan 2075 on the cover member 2020 side. Carry.

(34-3) The gaming machine according to (34-1) or (34-2),
At least a portion of the surface of the substrate case is plated, and a portion of the surface of the first adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion that is in contact with the adhesive is plated. Not
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the surface of the sub-control board case 2000 is plated. This makes it possible to cut off electrical or magnetic noise, and prevent malfunction of the sub-control board 2070 due to the influence of the noise.

  On the other hand, if plating is performed on the bonding portion between the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, there is a concern that the adhesive may be displaced or peeled off during the bonding process. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 are formed as bonding portions between the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, and the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and The base side bonding portion 2030 is not plated. Thus, the above-described problem does not occur in the bonding process, and the bonding strength between the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 can be ensured.

  The plating process is not particularly limited. For example, a plating process may be performed using copper as a base plating and then performing a nickel plating process thereon.

  In the third embodiment, it is assumed that the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) and a portion (cover-side substrate portion) other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 are separately formed. It is described that the cover member 2020 is manufactured by plating only the cover-side base portion of the cover-side bonded portion 2050 and then fixing the cover-side base portion and the cover-side bonded portion 2050. did. Further, on the premise that the base-side bonded portion 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) and a portion (base-side base portion) other than the base-side bonded portion 2030 are separately formed, the base-side bonded portion and the base-side bonded portion are formed. It has been described that the base member 2010 is manufactured by plating only the base-side base portion of the portion 2030 and then fixing the base-side base portion and the base-side adhesive portion 2030.

  However, as described above, in the present invention, the first member and the second member may be integrally formed including the first bonding portion and the second bonding portion, respectively. It is sufficient to prevent plating from being performed on the bonding portion between the first bonding portion and the second bonding portion. For example, in the third embodiment, the walls (the front inner wall 2054, the upper inner wall 2055, the side inner wall 2056, and the rear inner wall 2057) that form the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, and the base side Masking may be performed on these portions of the adhesive portion 2030 so as to prevent plating from being performed on portions formed above the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012.

  Also, after forming only the cover-side base portion and performing plating, a cover member may be manufactured by insert-molding the cover-side adhesive portion, and only the base-side base portion is formed and plated. Thereafter, the base member may be manufactured by insert-molding the base-side adhesive portion.

  Further, in the third embodiment, although it has been described that the plating process is performed on both the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, the plating process may be performed only on the cover member 2020. As described in the second embodiment, the sub control device SS may be affected by radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP. Preferably, the cover member 2020 whose surface is exposed toward the inside of the cabinet G (on the hopper mechanism HP side) is more preferably plated than the base member 2010 attached to the back wall G3 (see FIG. 90).

(34-4) The gaming machine according to any of (34-1) to (34-3),
The first adhesive portion (cover-side adhesive portion 2050) has an opening formed on one side, and a closed wall portion (upper wall portion 2052) formed on the opposite side to the opening, and the closed wall portion. A peripheral wall portion (a front wall portion 2051 and a side wall portion 2053) formed so as to continuously form the opening and surround the second adhesive portion;
A projection (projection 2055a) is formed inside the closed wall portion, while a first concave portion (curved surface 2054b) tapered from the opening side to the closed wall portion side is formed inside the peripheral wall portion. Is formed,
A second concave portion (curved surface 2031b) is formed in the second adhesive portion (base-side adhesive portion 2030) so as to face the first concave portion when the first member and the second member are assembled. On the other hand, a groove (groove portion 2031c) is formed along the outer periphery of the second bonding portion.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the front inner wall portion 2054 of the cover-side bonding portion 2050 is formed with a tapered curved surface 2054b from the opening side to the upper inner wall portion 2055 side. Is formed with a curved surface 2031b so as to face the curved surface 2054b. Therefore, when no adhesive is interposed between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030, a relatively large gap exists between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently inject the adhesive between the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 by using the gap, and the cover-side bonding portion 2050 and the base-side bonding portion 2030 are connected to each other. It can be glued effectively.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the groove 2031c is formed along the front wall 2031 of the base-side bonding portion 2030 and the wall surface of the side wall 2033. Therefore, the adhesive injected from between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b can be moved to another location in the space formed by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 along the groove 2031c, and the space can be moved. An adhesive can be filled throughout.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the projection 2055a is formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side bonding portion 2050. Therefore, when the base-side adhesive portion 2030 abuts on the projection 2055a in a state where the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is accommodated in the space formed by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is A gap is formed between the portion where the protrusion 2055a is not formed and the base-side adhesive portion 2030. Therefore, an adhesive can be interposed in the gap, and the adhesive strength between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 162, when the first bonding portion (cover-side bonding portion 2050) is viewed from the opening side, the first concave portion (curved surface 2054b) is formed by the peripheral wall portion of the first bonding portion (cover-side bonding portion 2050). It is desirable to be formed at the approximate center in the left-right direction inside the (front wall portion 2051). Further, as shown in FIG. 154, when the second bonding portion (base-side bonding portion 2030) is viewed from the front, the second concave portion (curved surface 2031b) is formed on the left and right of the second bonding portion (base-side bonding portion 2030). It is desirable to be formed substantially at the center of the direction. Furthermore, it is desirable that the groove (groove 2031c) along the outer periphery of the second bonding portion (base-side bonding portion 2030) is formed to be symmetric about the second concave portion (curved surface 2031b). This makes it easier to uniformly fill the adhesive.

  The number of protrusions (projections 2055a) formed on the closed wall portion (upper wall portion 2052) of the first bonding portion (cover-side bonding portion 2050) is not particularly limited, and may be one or more. Good. The shape and size of the projection (projection 2055a) are not particularly limited, but when a plurality of projections (projections 2055a) are provided, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of projections (projections 2055a) are substantially the same. Is desirable. Further, the position where the projection (projection 2055a) is formed on the closed wall portion (upper wall portion 2052) is not particularly limited, but when a plurality of projections (projections 2055a) are provided, the plurality of projections (projections 2055a) are provided. It is desirable to arrange them symmetrically. For example, in the case where two projections (projections 2055a) are provided, as shown in FIG. 162, when the first adhesive part (cover-side adhesive part 2050) is viewed from the opening side, the right projection (projection 2055a) is formed. Two projections (projections 2055a) such that the distance between the right inner wall (side inner wall 2056) and the distance between the left projection (projection 2055a) and the left inner wall (side inner wall 2056) are equal. Is desirably arranged. This makes it easier to uniformly fill the adhesive.

[Fourth embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions that apply to the description of the second embodiment and the third embodiment in the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Screen device C>
FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the display unit. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device.

  The display unit A shown in FIG. 166 has a so-called projection device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes the image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. It is a mapping device. As in the second embodiment, the display unit A is exchangeably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) in the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 167, the screen device C has a screen housing C10. Specifically, the screen housing C10 includes a bottom plate C1, which is horizontally disposed, a right plate C2, which is erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, a left plate C3, which is erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1, and a bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the vehicle. Thereby, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  A fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided inside the screen housing C10. The configuration of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that described in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. The configurations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later in detail while supplementing parts different from those of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, a central mounting portion C11 arranged at the center portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction around the central mounting portion C11 are provided. I have. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape.

  The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positioned by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end of the right movable base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6.

  A motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 is positioned and arranged by the motor accommodating portion C22. The drive motor F24 is a component of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 for driving the reel screen mechanism F1. The reel screen drive mechanism F2 will be described later in detail.

  Further, a first support portion C23 and a second support portion C24 are formed on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3, respectively. The first support portion C23 rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21. The second support portion C24 rotatably supports a shaft member E3 serving as a gear shaft of the intermediate gear E23. The crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 are components of the front screen driving mechanism E2 for driving the front screen mechanism E1. The front screen drive mechanism E2 will be described later in detail.

  Thus, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a right front screen drive mechanism E2B disposed on the right movable body base C5 side and a left front screen drive mechanism E2A disposed on the left movable body base C6 side. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

  Further, similarly to the second embodiment, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 have operation openings C21 and C31. Thus, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 47, the user can reach into the screen device C from the operation opening C21 and manually rotate the crank gear E21 seen from the operation opening C21, thereby obtaining the front screen. The mechanism E1 can be rotated.

<Screen position relation>
Similarly to the second embodiment, also in the present embodiment, by controlling the projector mechanism B2 to emit light including an image from the lens, a plurality of screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and An image is displayed on one of these screens according to the positional relationship of the reel screen mechanism F1). The positional relationship of each screen is the same as in the second embodiment. The outline will be described below.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively.

  By controlling the drive motor E25, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates between the front exposure position and the front standby position, while controlling the drive motor F24 causes the reel screen mechanism F1 to move to the reel exposure position. It rotates between the reel standby position (see FIG. 53).

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 51). .

  On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, and the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed. Is displayed (see FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 52). .

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be located at the reel exposure position. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be located at the front exposure position. This will be described in detail later.

<Front screen mechanism E1>
FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. FIG. 171 is a front view of the front screen support base. FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 171 along the line BB. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a state where the front screen member is adhered to the front screen support base illustrated in FIG. 172. FIG. 174 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 171 along the line CC. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating a state where the front screen member is adhered to the front screen support base illustrated in FIG. 174. FIG. 176 is a rear view of the front screen support base. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 176 taken along the line DD. FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 176 taken along the line EE.

  As shown in FIG. 170, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have.

  The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a flat projection surface E11a.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion.

  The shallow portion is formed in a lattice shape by a portion formed along the longitudinal direction of the front screen support E12 and a portion formed along the lateral direction of the front screen support E12. Specifically, the shallow portion includes outer shallow portions E122 (E122a, E122b, E122c, E122d) formed along each side constituting the outer periphery of the holding recess E121, and a longitudinal direction inside the holding recess E121. It has a long and shallow portion E123 (E123a, E123b, E123c) formed and a short and shallow portion E124 (E124a, E124b, E124c) formed along the short direction inside the holding recess E121.

  Of the outer shallow portion E122, the outer shallow portion E122b and the outer shallow portion E122d are formed along the longitudinal direction, and the outer shallow portion E122a and the outer shallow portion E122c are formed along the lateral direction. The outer shallow portion E122a and the outer shallow portion E122b are continuously formed, and the outer shallow portion E122b and the outer shallow portion E122c are continuously formed. On the other hand, the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d are not formed continuously, and a gap is provided between the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d. Similarly, the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a are not formed continuously, and a gap is provided between the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a.

  The long and shallow portions E123b are formed in the longitudinal direction at the central portion in the short direction, and the short and shallow portions E124b are formed in the short direction at the central portion in the longitudinal direction. Grooves are formed in the outer shallow portion E122 (E122a, E122b, E122c, E122d), the long shallow portion E123b, and the short shallow portion E124b.

  The front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is in contact with and supported by the shallow portion formed in a lattice shape as described above, and is separated from the remaining deep portion (FIGS. 172 to 172). 175).

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a becomes visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a (see FIG. 176). When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the second pattern surface E12b becomes visible to a player in front. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) can be appropriately adopted.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by being adhered. An adhesive layer is formed on the surface of the front screen member E11 opposite to the projection surface E11a by applying a paint containing an adhesive resin. The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are adhered by the adhesive layer. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed not on the front screen member E11 but on a shallow portion of the front screen support E12.

  Examples of the adhesive resin include acrylic resins, rubber resins, and silicone resins having adhesive properties. For example, an acrylic copolymer can be used. Examples of the acrylic copolymer include (meth) acrylic ester copolymers. In the present embodiment, the (meth) acrylic ester copolymer conventionally used as a resin component of the adhesive is conventionally used. Any of the unions can be appropriately selected and used.

  Through holes E130 (E130a, E130b, E130c, E130d) penetrating from the holding recess E121 to the second pattern surface E12b are formed in the front screen support E12. The through hole E130a is formed in a gap between the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d. The through hole E130b is formed in a gap between the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a. The through hole E130c is formed near the contact point between the outer shallow portion E122a and the long and shallow portion E123c. The through hole E130d is formed near the contact point between the outer shallow portion E122c and the long and shallow portion E123c.

  These four through holes E130 are a line segment connecting the through hole E130a and the through hole E130b, a line segment connecting the through hole E130b and the through hole E130c, a line segment connecting the through hole E130c and the through hole E130d, and It is provided in such a positional relationship that a substantially rectangular shape is formed by a line connecting the hole E130d and the through hole E130a.

  The through-hole E130 is formed such that the shape in a front view is circular, elliptical, square, hexagonal, or the like, and the hole diameter is large enough to accommodate the axis of a screw used for assembling the display unit A. (For example, about 1 to 10 mm). Thus, even after the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are adhered to each other, the front screen member E11 is lifted by inserting a screw or a rod-shaped object into the through-hole E130 to lift the front screen member E11. The member E11 can be removed.

  Further, in the front screen support E12, the portion that is adhered to the front screen member E11 is only a shallow portion formed in a lattice shape, and most of the front screen member E11 is adhered to the front screen support E12. Not. Thereby, the front screen member E11 can be relatively easily removed.

  Further, gaps are formed between the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d, and between the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a. The screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are not adhered. The location corresponds to the vicinity of the corner of the front screen member E11, and the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are not sufficiently adhered in the vicinity of such a corner. Due to this, if a screw or a rod-like object is inserted into the through-hole E130a and the through-hole E130b formed in these gaps to lift the front screen member E11, the front screen member E11 is moved forward. The force separating from the screen support base E12 acts efficiently, and the front screen member E11 is further easily removed.

  As described above, the through hole E130 extends from the holding recess E121 to the second pattern surface E12b. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view when the front screen support base E12 is cut along a plane that passes through the through-hole E130, and FIG. 177 also illustrates this state.

  As described above, since the through-hole E130 provided in the holding concave portion E121 penetrates to the second pattern surface E12b, as shown in FIG. 176, when the front screen mechanism E1 is viewed from the second pattern surface E12b side. , The through hole E130 becomes visible.

  As described in the second embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 assumes a posture in which the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined downward from the front to the rear on the upper side of the screen housing C10 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the second pattern surface E12b side of the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where it can be visually recognized by the player via the upper display window UD1. However, since a three-dimensional pattern having irregularities is formed on the second pattern surface E12b, the through-hole E130 is hidden by the pattern and is less noticeable in appearance.

  In particular, the through-hole E130 is provided in a concave portion (a position that is concave compared to the surroundings) of the irregularities forming the pattern. That is, the through hole E130 exists at a deep place in the second pattern surface E12b. This, combined with the fact that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the inclined posture at the front standby position, causes the through-hole E130 to be hidden behind a convex portion of the pattern formed on the second pattern surface E12b. , Making it difficult for the player to see.

  Further, a plurality of round concave portions E140 are formed in the second pattern surface E12b. The round recess E140 is a component of the pattern formed on the second pattern surface E12b, and has a concave shape on the second pattern surface E12b. However, unlike the through-hole E130, the dent does not necessarily penetrate to the holding recess E121. FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view when the front screen support base E12 is cut along a plane passing through the round concave portion E140, and FIG. 178 also shows the state.

  Such a round recess E140 is similar in shape to the through-hole E130 in a front view. Due to the presence of the round recess E140, when the front screen mechanism E1 is viewed from the second pattern surface E12b side, the through-hole E130. Is even less noticeable.

<Front screen drive mechanism E2>
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As described with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is connected to the left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower left lower surface of the front screen mechanism E1, and to the right lower surface of the front screen mechanism E1. And a right front screen driving mechanism E2B.

  FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the right side plate and the left side plate of the screen housing are removed. FIG. 180 is a perspective view of the right front screen driving mechanism. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the crank gear of the right front screen driving mechanism is removed. FIG. 182 is a plan view of the crank gear of the right front screen driving mechanism. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the right front screen mechanism and the left front screen drive mechanism.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. One end of the crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the front screen mechanism E1.

  As in the second embodiment, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 at an intermediate position E22a (see FIG. 181). Thereby, the crank member E22 can rotate around the intermediate position E22a as a rotation center. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 53).

  As described with reference to FIG. 57, the crank member E22 has an upper region from the intermediate position E22a on the upper end side (the side connected to the front screen mechanism E1) and a lower end portion from the intermediate position E22a (the front screen mechanism). (A side opposite to the side connected to E1). A slide groove E22b is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22 (see FIG. 181).

  The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b is formed such that the surface corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 has the center line of the lower region (the middle position E22a and the middle at the lower end of the crank member E22). (A straight line passing through the point). A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two linear portions) substantially matches the member width of the slide member E26, and is set so as to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b (see FIG. 182) of the crank gear E21. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is supported by a first support portion C23 (see FIG. 169) of the right side plate C2. Further, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 at an intermediate position E22a (see FIG. 181). As in the second embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the same as the crank shaft of the crank member E21. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to a line connecting the intermediate position E22a at E22 and the center point of the slide member E26 (see FIGS. 58 and 60).

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so that the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom having the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends, and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when E1 is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b in which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates around the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A has the same configuration as the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

  The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3.

  Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A and the right front screen driving mechanism E2B are connected to both ends thereof.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, respectively, and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated, whereby the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis FG (see FIG. 53). Therefore, the user moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

<Position relationship between front screen mechanism E1 and crank gear E21>
FIG. 184 is a right side view of the crank gear of the right front screen driving mechanism. FIG. 185 is a right side view of the intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 186 is a right side view of the crank gear and the intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is located at the front exposure position. FIG. 187 is a right side view of the right side plate. FIG. 188 is a right side view of the screen device when the front screen mechanism is disposed at the front exposure position.

  FIGS. 184 to 188 respectively correspond to the diagrams as viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of the crank gear E21. The direction of the rotation axis of the crank gear E21 coincides with the direction of the rotation axis of the intermediate gear E23, and the direction is perpendicular to the surfaces of the crank gear E21, the intermediate gear E23, and the right side plate C2. Becomes The surface of the crank gear E21, the surface of the intermediate gear E23, and the surface of the right side plate C2 are respectively arranged substantially in parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 184, a mark E21c and a through hole E21d are formed in the crank gear E21. The mark E21c and the through hole E21d are formed as holes penetrating from the front side to the back side of the crank gear E21 shown in FIG. 184. The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed such that the shape in a front view is circular (or elliptical, square, hexagonal, or the like). The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed with a considerably smaller size than the crank gear E21, and have a hole diameter of, for example, about 1 to 10 mm. The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed near the circumference of the crank gear E21, the distance from the center O21 of the crank gear E21 to the mark portion E21c, and the distance from the center O21 of the crank gear E21 to the through hole E21d. Is set to be about 75% to 90% of the radius of the crank gear E21. The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed in a positional relationship such that an angle between a straight line connecting the center O21 and the mark portion E21c and a straight line connecting the center O21 and the through hole E21d is about 160 °. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 185, two mark portions E23a are formed in the intermediate gear E23. The mark E23a is formed as a hole penetrating from the front side to the back side of the intermediate gear E23 shown in FIG. The mark portion E23a is formed such that the shape in a front view is circular (or elliptical, square, hexagonal, or the like). The mark portion E23a is formed with a considerably smaller size than the intermediate gear E23, and has a hole diameter of, for example, about 1 to 10 mm. The mark E23a is formed near the circumference of the intermediate gear E23, and the distance from the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23 to the mark E23a is about 75% to 90% of the radius of the intermediate gear E23. Is set to The two mark portions E23a are formed at symmetrical positions with respect to the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23.

  In addition, the mark part E21c and the mark part E23a may have any features as long as they function as a mark. That is, the mark portion E21c and the mark portion E23a are not limited to through holes, and may be holes (recesses) that do not penetrate, protrusions (convex portions), or a combination of concave and convex portions ( (A pattern due to unevenness), a portion where some characters or symbols are drawn with a pen or the like, or a portion where a color different from the surroundings is painted may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 186, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, and the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21. The crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 are arranged such that the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are substantially aligned with the mark E23a.

  As shown in FIG. 187, a mark window C100 is provided on the right side plate C2 near the center between the first support portion C23 and the second support portion C24. The mark window C100 is formed as an opening through which the inside of the right side plate C2 can be visually recognized.

  The mark window C100 is formed in a slightly vertically elongated rectangular shape, and the intersection (the center of gravity of the rectangle) of the two diagonal lines of the rectangle is located at the center (intermediate position) between the first support portion C23 and the second support portion C24. ). Further, the length of the diagonal line is equal to or slightly shorter than the average value of the radius of the crank gear E21 and the radius of the intermediate gear E23 (80 times the average value of the radius of the crank gear E21 and the radius of the intermediate gear E23). (About 110%). Thus, the vicinity of the meshing portion between the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 can be visually recognized through the mark window C100.

  Further, a through hole C101 is formed in the right side plate C2. The through hole C101 is formed as a hole that penetrates the right side plate C2. The size of the hole is substantially the same as the size of the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21, and is considerably smaller than that of the mark window C100. ing. For example, the area of the mark window C100 in front view is about 30 to 300 times (or about 50 to 200 times) the area of the through hole C101 in front view. The shape of the through hole C101 is substantially the same as the shape of the through hole E21d, and is, for example, substantially circular in a front view. The through hole C101 is formed near the operation opening C21.

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, a mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21 and a mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 (see FIG. 186) are formed on the right side plate C2. It is visible through the mark window C100 (see FIG. 188). In FIG. 188, the center O21 of the crank gear E21 and the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23 cannot be directly viewed. However, since the screw C23a and the screw C24a are arranged at positions corresponding to the center O21 of the crank gear E21 and the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, respectively, the center O21 of the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear are controlled by the screw C23a and the screw C24a. The position of the center O23 of E23 can be confirmed. Thus, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are substantially aligned. That can be understood.

  Although not shown, the right side plate C2 and the crank gear E21 are arranged substantially in parallel with the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 supported by the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the through hole C101 formed in the right side plate C2 and the through hole C101 formed in the crank gear E21 when viewed from the right side (or the left side). The hole E21d overlaps. That is, when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the right side plate C2, the position of the through hole C101 substantially coincides with the position of the through hole E21d, and the positions overlap. Thereby, a part of the member arranged inside the crank gear E21 inside the screen housing C10 is visible through the overlapping portion. As described later, a rod-shaped object can be inserted into both the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d at the overlapping portion.

<Position relationship between front screen mechanism E1 and slide member E26>
FIG. 189 is a left side view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is located at the front exposure position. FIG. 189 corresponds to the view seen from the direction of the rotation axis of the crank gear E21.

  As described above, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is supported by the first support portion C23. Therefore, even if the crank gear E21 rotates, the position of the center O21 of the crank gear E21 does not change.

  On the other hand, a slide member E26 is provided on the crank gear E21. As described above, the slide member E26 is pivotally supported at the eccentric position E21b (see FIG. 182) of the crank gear E21. When the crank gear E21 rotates, the slide member E26 also rotates. Specifically, the slide member E26 has a circular shape with the center O21 of the crank gear E21 as a center and the radius r (see FIG. 189) between the center O21 and the eccentric position E21b as the crank gear E21 rotates. Rotate on the circumference. That is, the locus drawn by the slide member E26 when the crank gear E21 rotates is a part (arc) of the circumference.

  Then, as described above, as the slide member E26 rotates on the arc, the slide member E26 slides inside the slide groove E22b, and the driving force is transmitted to the crank member E22 via the slide member E26. You. In conjunction with this, the front screen mechanism E1 connected to the crank member E22 rotates between the front exposure position and the front standby position (see FIGS. 57 to 60).

  As described above, while the front screen mechanism E1 rotates between the front exposure position and the front standby position, the slide member E26 moves while changing the position on the arc with time. At this time, the position on the arc where the slide member E26 is located (the position of the eccentric position E21b on the arc) is determined by the straight line connecting the eccentric position E21b and the center O21 of the crank gear E21 and the horizontal direction. It is represented by an angle between a straight line (a straight line connecting the fixed point X21 whose position does not change irrespective of the rotation of the crank gear E21 and the center O21) (hereinafter, this angle is expressed as ∠EOX) (see FIG. 189).

  Then, using such an angle ∠EOX, the value of ∠EOX when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position is represented by α, and the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position. The value of ∠EOX in the case is denoted as β. Then, when the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front exposure position to the front standby position, ∠EOX changes over time from α to β.

  As described above, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 according to the present embodiment adjust the crank gear E21 so that the angle ∠EOX indicating the position of the slide member E26 changes over time from α to β. The driving force is transmitted to the front screen mechanism E1 by sliding the slide member E26 inside the slide groove E22b, thereby rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position. Designed for

<Assembly of the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2>
FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the crank gear in a state before the crank gear and the crank member are assembled. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating the crank member in a state before the crank gear and the crank member are assembled. Note that FIGS. 190 and 191 show only the crank gear and the crank member, and some members existing around the crank gear and the crank member, and the other members are not shown for convenience.

  In order to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 as designed as described above, when assembling the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2, the crank gear is subjected to the following steps (i) to (v). What is necessary is just to assemble E21 and the crank member E22.

(I) The crank gear E21 is attached to the right side plate C2 such that the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is supported by the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2 (see FIG. 190).
(Ii) By manually rotating the crank gear E21 of (i), the angle ∠EOX indicating the position of the slide member E26 is adjusted, and the crank gear E21 is arranged so that ∠EOX = α (FIG. 190). reference)
(Iii) In a state where ＝ EOX = α, the crank gear E21 is fixed so as not to rotate any more.
(Iv) The posture of the crank member E22 is set to the posture (exposure posture) when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position (see FIG. 191).
(V) The slide member E26 provided on the crank gear E21 of (iii) is engaged with the slide groove E22b formed on the crank member E22 of (iv).

  Among the above (i) to (v), the steps (i), (iv) and (v) can be carried out by appropriately employing conventionally known means. Hereinafter, the steps (ii) and (iii) will be mainly described.

  FIG. 192 is a right side view showing a state where the crank gear is attached to the right side plate. FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating a state where an intermediate gear is attached to the right side plate and the crank gear illustrated in FIG. 192.

  In the step (ii), first, while visually recognizing the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 through the mark window C100 formed on the right side plate C2, the crank gear E21 of the above (i) is removed. Rotate manually. Then, as shown in FIG. 192, a mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21 includes a center O21 of the crank gear E21 (a screw C23a for fastening the right side plate C2 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21) and the second The position of the crank gear E21 is adjusted so as to be arranged on a straight line connecting the center of the hole formed as the support portion C24.

  On the other hand, the intermediate gear E23 fixed in advance to the shaft member E3 is temporarily fixed to the position of the second support portion C24. At this time, the intermediate gear E23 is manually rotated while visually recognizing the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 via the mark window C100. Then, as shown in FIG. 193, a mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 includes a center O21 of the crank gear E21 (a screw C23a for fastening the right side plate C2 to the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21) and the intermediate gear. The position of the intermediate gear E23 is adjusted so that the intermediate gear E23 is arranged on a straight line connecting the center O23 of E23 (the screw C24a seen from the hole formed as the second support portion C24).

  As described above, by using the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 as a mark together with the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, the position of the crank gear E21 can be strictly adjusted.

  Here, the position of the slide member E26 on the crank gear E21 (the eccentric position E21b) is formed at the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the intermediate gear E23. The angle ∠EOX described with reference to FIG. 189 is designed to be α when the marked portions E23a are aligned on a straight line.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192 and 193, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23.ク ラ ン ク EOX = α by arranging the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 such that と EOX = α.

  However, even if ∠EOX (the position of the slide member E26) is adjusted in this manner, the crank gear E21 is easily rotated, and the adjusted position is easily shifted. Then, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned with the crank gear E21. Is fixed so as not to move (step (iii)). The fixing of the crank gear E21 can be performed as follows.

  As described with reference to FIG. 187, the through hole C101 is formed in the right side plate C2. The through hole C101 is formed when the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned. (When the crank gear E21 is arranged so that ∠EOX = α), the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 are designed to overlap exactly.

  In the step (iii), a rod-shaped object (for example, a rod whose thickness is substantially equal to the size of the through-hole C101 and the through-hole E21d) is inserted into both the through-hole C101 and the through-hole E21d. Insert it. Thereby, the relative position between the crank gear E21 and the right side plate C2 is fixed. Therefore, even if the force for rotating the crank gear E21 acts, the crank gear E21 cannot move with respect to the right side plate C2 due to the presence of the rod-shaped object, and the displacement can be prevented. .

  The method of fixing the crank gear E21 is not limited to the above-described method. For example, instead of the right side plate C2, another member such as the right movable base C5 (which does not move with the rotation of the crank gear E21, The through-hole C101 may be formed in a member whose position does not change regardless of the operation of the gear E21, and the crank gear E21 may be fixed by the same method as described above. In addition, an outlet-type (U-shaped or U-shaped) object is inserted into both the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23. May be fixed. In this case, the through-hole C101 does not have to be formed in a member such as the right side plate C2.

  Further, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are not aligned on the right side plate C2. The position of the crank gear E21 may be adjusted so that the formed through hole C101 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 overlap. However, as described above, the through-hole C101 formed in the right side plate C2 and the through-hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 are considerably small, and even when the crank gear E21 is rotated in a dark cloud, both holes are very heavy. May not be possible. Also, it may be difficult to visually check whether these holes overlap. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned. Thereby, the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d are automatically overlapped with each other, so that the positioning can be easily performed.

  In the above, the alignment of the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has been described. However, the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A, and the left side plate C3 also respectively have the right front screen drive mechanism E2B. And the right side plate C2 (see FIGS. 184 to 188), and the position of the crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is also adjusted as described in (ii) above. And (iii) through the same steps.

  Thereby, in both the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the left front screen drive mechanism E2A, the slide member E26 provided on the crank gear E21 (the above (ii) and (iii)) fixed in a state of ∠EOX = α. Can be engaged with the slide groove E22b formed in the crank member E22 (the above (iv)) in the exposed posture (the above (v)). As a result, the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface of the slide groove E22b (see FIG. 60).

  With this state as an initial state, by operating the front screen drive mechanism E2 so that ∠EOX changes from α to β, it is possible to realize that the slide member E26 slides inside the slide groove E22b as designed. The front screen mechanism E1 connected to the crank member E22 can be appropriately rotated from the front exposure position to the front standby position.

  Through the steps described above, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 can be assembled in a state (exposure posture) when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position.

  Then, by connecting the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 to another mechanism, a completed product of the display unit A can be obtained. In the display unit A obtained in this way, the state of the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 is the exposure posture, and the display unit A is transported in that state.

  Here, as described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, a straight line connecting the rotation center position (the gear shaft E21a, the center O21) of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b, and the crank member A straight line connecting the rotation center position of E22 (intermediate position E22a) and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 is orthogonal (FIG. 60 and the features (2-1) of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment and (See (2-2)).

  Accordingly, even if a force is applied to the slide member E26 due to shaking during transportation or the like, the force is not converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21, and the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 are firmly braked. , The front screen mechanism E1 does not move. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display unit A from being damaged due to the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 during transportation.

  However, when assembling the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2, the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the state (exposure posture) when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front exposure position, but is in the front standby position. The crank gear E <b> 21 and the crank member E <b> 22 may be assembled in a state in which they are arranged (standby posture).

  In this case, when the crank gear E21 is arranged so that the angle ∠EOX described with reference to FIG. 189 becomes β, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, and the crank gear E21 The position where the mark E21c is formed in the crank gear E21 may be changed so that the formed mark E21c and the mark E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned. Further, when the crank gear E21 is arranged so that ∠EOX becomes β, the crank gear E21d is formed such that the through hole C101 formed in the right side plate C2 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 overlap. In E21, the position at which the through hole E21d is formed may be changed.

  As described above, by appropriately changing the positions where the mark portions E21c and the through holes E21d are formed, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen driving mechanism E2 can be assembled in any posture including the exposure posture and the standby posture.

<Reel screen mechanism F1>
FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism when the reel screen mechanism is located at the reel standby position. FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism when the reel screen mechanism is located at the reel exposure position.

  As shown in FIGS. 194 and 195, the reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape in a side view curved to a shape approximate to the rotation direction (see FIG. 52). The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on a peripheral edge thereof, and an inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex toward the upstream side in the light irradiation direction from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position (see FIG. 53). In addition, a pattern is formed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, which is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position (see FIG. 53), the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front.

<Reel screen drive mechanism F2>
The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between a reel standby position and a reel exposure position by a driving force of a reel screen driving mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can display an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

  FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism, the reel screen drive mechanism, and the movable base. FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism and the reel screen drive mechanism.

  As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 and F21, an arc gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the right end back surface and the left end back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. Support shafts F21a, F21a projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other ends of the two arm members F21, F21. The support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, respectively. Thus, the two arm members F21 can rotate about the support shafts F21a and F21a as the rotation center. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center axis RG (see FIG. 53) of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arc-shaped gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 meshes with the arc gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23.

<Position relationship between arm member F21 in the reel standby posture and movable body bases C5 and C6>
FIG. 198 is a perspective view showing the arm member and the movable base when the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position.

  When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the arm member F21 connected to the reel screen mechanism F1 and the movable body bases C5 and C6 are substantially in contact with each other. FIG. 198 shows this state.

  Hereinafter, the positional relationship between the arm member F21 and the movable body bases C5 and C6 will be described in detail with reference to the structure of the arm member F21 and the structure of the movable body bases C5 and C6. Since the left movable base C6 has the same structure as the right movable base C5, the description of the left movable base C6 is omitted.

  FIG. 199 is a right side view of the reel screen mechanism and the arm member. FIG. 200 is a bottom view of the reel screen mechanism and the arm member. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism and the arm member as viewed from below.

  As shown in FIG. 199, the arm member F21 has a shape of a sector when viewed from the side. A reel screen mechanism F1 is connected to a portion corresponding to the fan-shaped arc. Further, one side (lower side) of the two sides constituting the sector has a shape in which a portion slightly closer to the reel screen mechanism F1 than the center of the side is bulged.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the lower end constituting the lower end of the arm member F21 from the lower side of the sector in FIG. 199 toward the inside (the side opposite to the side on which the support shaft F21a is formed, that is, the left side). The part F200 is formed. The lower end portion F200 has a rectangular shape in bottom view. The long side on the outer side (right side) of the four sides constituting the rectangle matches the lower side of the sector in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the lower end portion F200 has a planar lower end surface F200a and a projection F200b formed to protrude downward at a part of the outer edge of the lower end portion F200.

  The projection F200b has a triangular shape in a side view (see FIG. 199), and the apex portion of the triangle is formed in a slightly rounded curved shape (see FIG. 201).

  FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the right movable body base. FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the positions of the arm member and the movable body base illustrated in FIG. 198 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. FIG. 204 is a top view near the reference surface of the movable base. FIG. 205 is a cross-sectional view of the movable base shown in FIG. 204 taken along the arrow FF. FIG. 206 is a diagram of the cushioning member installation section viewed from the right side. FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating a state where a buffer member is installed in the buffer member installation section illustrated in FIG. 206. FIG. 208 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the arm member and the cushioning member are in contact with each other along a cross section taken along line GG of the movable body base illustrated in FIG. 204.

  As shown in FIG. 202, the right movable body base C5 includes an upper side wall C81 and a lower side wall C91. A third support portion C51 and a fourth support portion C61 are formed on the upper side wall portion C81. A fifth support portion C71 is formed on the lower side wall portion C91. The third support portion C51 rotatably supports the crank member E22 connected to the front screen mechanism E1. The fourth support portion C61 rotatably supports the support shaft F21a of the arm member F21 connected to the reel screen mechanism F1. The fifth support portion C71 rotatably supports a shaft member E3 serving as a gear shaft of the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2.

  The upper side wall portion C81 and the lower side wall portion C91 have plane surfaces. The surface formed on the upper side wall portion C81 and the surface formed on the lower side wall portion C91 are formed so as to be displaced in the left-right direction in a front view.

  The right movable base C5 has a reference surface C200 formed substantially horizontally. The right end of the reference surface C200 is continuous with the lower end of the surface formed on the upper wall portion C81, and the left end of the reference surface C200 is continuous with the upper end of the surface formed on the lower wall portion C91.

  Further, the right movable body base C5 has a buffer member installation part C201. The buffer member installation part C201 is formed continuously with the reference plane C200, and has a concave shape with respect to the reference plane C200.

  When the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position (see FIG. 198), the lower end surface F200a of the arm member F21 substantially abuts on the reference surface C200, and the projection F200b of the arm member F21 is formed as a buffer member installation portion C201. In the recessed portion (see FIG. 203).

  As shown in FIG. 204, the reference surface C200 of the right movable base C5 and the cushioning member installation portion C201 have a rectangular shape in a top view. The reference plane C200 has a horizontal plane C200a formed from the vicinity of the rear end of the buffer member installation section C201 to the rear, and a rough surface C200b formed in front of the horizontal plane 200a. The rough surface C200b is a rough surface having some irregularities as compared with the horizontal surface 200a.

  The short side (length in the left-right direction) of the rectangle (the reference plane C200 of the right movable base C5) in FIG. 204 is the short side (length in the left-right direction of the arm member F21) in FIG. Is longer than Thus, when the arm member F21 and the right movable body base C5 are substantially in contact with each other (see FIG. 198), the left portion of the reference plane C200 is not covered by the lower end face F200a and is exposed.

  FIG. 206 shows the back surface of the upper side wall portion C81 shown in FIG. 205. That is, FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a state when the upper side wall portion C81 is viewed from the side (right side) opposite to the side on which the reference plane C200 is formed, centering on the buffer member installation portion C201.

  As shown in FIG. 206, an opening is formed on the back surface of the upper side wall portion C81. The cushioning member installation portion C201 is formed by communicating the recess with the reference surface C200 and the opening, and has a box shape in which the upper surface and the right surface are open. Note that an opening C92 (see FIG. 202) is also formed in the lower side wall portion C91, but the opening does not communicate with the buffer member installation portion C201.

  The cushioning member installation portion C201 includes a bottom surface portion C201a that forms the bottom surface of the box, a front end portion C201b that is continuously formed vertically upward from the front end of the bottom surface portion C201a, and a rearward direction from the left end of the front end portion 201b. And a rear end portion C201d continuous with the side wall portion C201c and forming a rear end of the box. The rear end portion C201d includes a front portion continuously formed vertically upward from the rear end of the bottom portion C201a, a rear portion formed with a slope at the rear, a front portion, and a rear portion. And a connecting portion for connecting the terminals in a curved shape.

  As shown in FIG. 207, a rectangular parallelepiped buffer member C202 is mounted on the bottom surface portion C201a of the buffer member installation portion C201. The cushioning member C202 is made of a gel-like material (silicone gel) mainly made of silicone having a shock absorbing power and a vibration damping property. As the silicone gel, for example, α gel (registered trademark) manufactured by Taika can be used. The material of the cushioning member C202 is not particularly limited. In addition to silicone gel, a flexible organosilicon compound such as silicone grease, silicone rubber, or silicone resin, or a flexible organic fluorine compound such as a fluororesin is used. Can be appropriately adopted.

  FIG. 208 shows the state of the buffer member installation section C201 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position (the state of FIG. 198). As shown in FIG. 208, the projection F200b of the arm member F21 is housed in a recess formed as the buffer member installation part C201. The tip of the projection F200b is in contact with the surface of the cushioning member C202. Although not shown in the figure, the surface of the cushioning member C202 is pressed by the tip of the projection F200b and has a concave shape.

  The lower end surface F200a of the arm member F21 is substantially in contact with the reference surface C200 (horizontal surface C200a and rough surface C200b) of the right movable base C5. However, there are slight gaps between the lower end face F200a and the horizontal plane C200a and between the lower end face F200a and the rough face C200b, respectively, and the lower end face F200a and the reference plane C200 are strictly Is not in contact. The arm member F21 is in a state of being supported by the right movable base C5 via the buffer member C202.

  As described above, when the reel screen mechanism F1 starts rotating from the reel exposure position and reaches the reel standby position, the projection F200b of the arm member F21 contacts the surface of the buffer member C202. Thus, the rotation of the arm member F21 can be smoothly stopped while absorbing the shock caused by the contact by the buffer member C202. As a result, the arm member F21 and the movable body base C5 do not directly contact with a large impact, and the arm member F21, the movable body base C5, the reel screen mechanism F1 and the like are prevented from being damaged by the impact. be able to.

<Position relationship between front screen mechanism E1 and bottom plate C1 in front exposure posture>
FIG. 209 is a perspective view showing the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate when the front screen mechanism is located at the front exposure position.

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the front screen support base E12 (see FIG. 171), which is a component of the front screen mechanism E1, and the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 (see FIGS. 168 and 169). Are substantially in contact with each other. FIG. 209 shows this state.

  Hereinafter, the positional relationship between the front screen support E12 and the bottom plate C1 will be described in detail with reference to the structure of the front screen support E12 and the structure of the bottom plate C1.

  FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the front screen support base. FIG. 211 is a partially enlarged view of a protrusion formed on the front screen support shown in FIG. 210.

  As described with reference to FIG. 171, the front screen support E12 has a rectangular shape in a front view. As shown in FIG. 210, a lower end portion E300 constituting the lower end of the front screen support base E12 is formed along the lower long side of the four sides constituting the rectangle.

  The lower end portion E300 has a planar lower end surface E300a and a projection E300b formed to protrude downward near both ends in the longitudinal direction.

  As shown in FIG. 211, the protrusion E300b has a triangular shape in a side view. The three sides forming the triangle are sides on the same plane as the lower end surface E300a (side A in the front-rear direction), sides continuous with the back surface of the front screen support E12 (sides B in the up-down direction), and these sides. And diagonally connected sides. The part corresponding to the oblique side is formed through a stepwise inclination, and the connection part with the vertical side B is formed in a rounded curve shape.

  FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the bottom plate. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a state where the positions of the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate shown in FIG. 209 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. FIG. 214 is a view of the bottom plate viewed from diagonally below. FIG. 215 is a top view of the bottom plate. FIG. 216 is a partially enlarged view of the buffer member installation portion in a cross section taken along line HH of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215. FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a cushioning member cover is attached to the cushioning member installation portion formed on the bottom plate illustrated in FIG. 214. FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the cushioning member cover. FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating a state where the cushioning member is placed on the cushioning member cover illustrated in FIG. 218. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a state in which the front screen support and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in a cross section taken along line HH of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215. FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating a state where the cushioning member and the cushioning member cover are installed in a cross section taken along the line II of the bottom plate illustrated in FIG. 215.

  As shown in FIG. 212, two buffer member installation portions C300 are formed on the bottom plate C1 slightly ahead of the two apexes on the front side of the trapezoidal central mounting portion C11. The buffer member installation part C300 has a shape that is depressed with respect to the surrounding reference plane C301.

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position (see FIG. 209), the lower end surface E300a of the front screen support E12 substantially abuts the reference surface C301, and the projection E300b of the front screen support E12 is provided with a buffer member. It is stored in the recess formed as the part C300 (see FIG. 213).

  Note that the distance in the left-right direction of the two protrusions E300b is set to be substantially the same as the distance in the left-right direction of the two cushioning member installation portions C300, and the right projection E300b is set to the right cushioning member installation portion C300. And the left protrusion E300b is stored in the left cushioning member installation part C300.

  As shown in FIG. 214, the recess formed as the cushioning member installation portion C300 is formed by an opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 penetrating to the back surface of the bottom plate C1. In FIG. 214, the opening formed in the surface of the bottom plate C1 is indicated by oblique lines for simplicity.

  As shown in FIG. 216, the buffer member installation portion C300 includes a front wall portion C300a and a rear wall portion C300b formed from the front end and the rear end of the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 toward the lower side in the vertical direction, respectively. The cushioning member cover mounting portion C300c is formed continuously from the lower end of the front wall portion C300a toward the rear side in the horizontal direction, and is formed continuously from the lower end of the rear wall portion C300b toward the front side in the horizontal direction. And a buffer member cover mounting portion C300d. The buffer member cover mounting portion C300c and the buffer member cover mounting portion C300d are not continuous and have a divided shape.

  A part of the lower surface of the buffer member cover C310 shown in FIG. 218 abuts on the buffer member cover mounting portion C300c and the buffer member cover mounting portion C300d. The cover C310 for the cushioning member is provided with a screw hole C312, and a screw passing through the screw insertion hole C302 (see FIG. 212) of the bottom plate C1 is screwed into the screw hole C312 so that the cover C310 for the cushioning member is attached to the bottom plate C1. (See FIG. 217).

  As shown in FIG. 219, a rectangular parallelepiped buffer member C320 is mounted on the buffer member mounting surface C311 (see FIG. 218) of the buffer member cover C310. The cushioning member C320 is made of a gel-like material (silicone gel) mainly made of silicone having a shock absorbing ability and a vibration-proofing property. As the material of the cushioning member C320, the same material as the cushioning member C202 described above (see FIG. 207) can be used.

  FIG. 220 shows the state of the buffer member installation section C300 when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position (the state of FIG. 209). As shown in FIG. 220, the protrusion E300b of the front screen support E12 is housed in a recess formed as the cushioning member installation part C300. The tip of the projection E300b is in contact with the surface of the cushioning member C320. Although not shown in the figure, the surface of the cushioning member C320 is pressed by the tip of the projection E300b and has a concave shape.

  Although not shown, the lower end surface E300a of the front screen support base E12 is substantially in contact with the reference surface C301 of the bottom plate C1. However, there is a slight gap between the lower end surface E300a and the reference surface C301, and the lower end surface E300a and the reference surface C301 are not strictly in contact with each other. The front screen mechanism E1 is supported by the bottom plate C1 via the buffer member C320.

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts rotating from the front standby position and reaches the front exposure position, the projection E300b of the front screen support base E12 contacts the surface of the cushioning member C320. Thus, the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 can be stopped smoothly while absorbing the shock caused by the contact by the cushioning member C320. As a result, the front screen support base E12 and the bottom plate C1 do not directly contact with a large impact, and it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1, the bottom plate C1, and the like from being damaged by the impact.

  As shown in FIG. 221, the length in the left-right direction of the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 is shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cushioning member C320. That is, the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 is smaller than the size of the buffer member C320. If a large opening is formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1, there is a possibility that the buffer member provided inside the opening (buffer member installation portion) and the projection stored therein will be visible to the player. is there. In the present embodiment, such a situation is prevented from occurring by providing a buffer member in a hollow portion larger than the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is maintained. .

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the lower end surface E300a of the front screen support base E12 substantially abuts the reference surface C301 of the bottom plate C1, and the front screen mechanism E1 has a cushioning function. It is supported by the bottom plate C1 via the member C320.

  On the other hand, although not shown, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is separated from the reference surface C301 of the bottom plate C1. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 rotates from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 does not come into contact with the bottom plate C1, so that it is not necessary to absorb an impact caused by the contact. Therefore, no projection is formed at the lower end of the reel screen mechanism F1, and no cushioning member is provided for contacting the projection.

<Rotation control of front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1>
As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. (See FIG. 51). In this case, the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (FIG. 52). reference). In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position.

  As described with reference to FIG. 53, the front exposure position is within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may come into contact with each other. become. Further, the reel exposure position exists within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position to the front exposure position when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 come into contact with each other. become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment, the sensor mechanism CS (sensors CS1 to CS3) is connected to the sub control circuit 1070 (see FIG. 147), and the sub CPU 1071 outputs the signals from the sensors CS1 to CS3. The positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately managed based on the signals transmitted.

  Then, the sub CPU 1071 executes the rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position, and on condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position. The rotation operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed. Thereby, it is trying to prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  However, the force to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position or the force to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position due to external vibration or impact. Is considered to be added.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the center of gravity of the front screen mechanism E1 is above the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1. Furthermore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the connecting portion between the front screen mechanism E1 and the crank member E22 is located behind the front screen mechanism E1, and the center of gravity of the front screen mechanism E1 is , And is located forward of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, gravity acting on the center of gravity of the front screen mechanism E1 acts in a direction to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, a crank member E22 (see FIG. 183) that is a component of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and an arc gear F22 (see FIG. 197) that is a component of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (See). Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is prevented from moving from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position. , The front screen mechanism E1 is restricted from moving from the front standby position to the front exposure position.

  FIG. 222 is a right side view of the arc gear shown in FIG. 197. FIG. 223 is a perspective view of the arc gear shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 222 corresponds to the view seen from the direction of the rotation axis of the arc gear F22, and the direction coincides with the direction perpendicular to the surface of the arc gear F22.

As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, a reel-side regulated portion F400 is formed in the arc gear F22. The reel-side regulated portion F400 is formed at a reel-side regulated position (a position indicated by a point F400a in FIG. 222) shifted from the center O22 of the arc gear F22. In the figure, it represents the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 the distance to the reel side the restricted position F400a in _{R 1.}

  As shown in FIG. 223, the reel-side regulated portion F400 is provided so as to project from the reel-side regulated position F400a in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the arc-shaped gear F22. The reel-side regulated portion F400 is formed so that the shape in a side view is circular (or elliptical, square, hexagonal, or the like). The size (diameter) in side view is shorter than the length of the portion protruding from the surface of the arc gear F22 (the distance from the surface of the arc gear F22 to the tip of the reel-side regulated portion F400). ing.

The arc-shaped gear F22 is provided with a reel-side regulating portion F401. In FIG. 222, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is indicated by oblique lines for simplicity. The reel-side restricting portion F401 has a shape that forms an arc corresponding to a circle centered on the center O22 of the arc gear F22. In the figure, it represents the radius of the circle r _1. Further, the circumferential angle with respect to the circular arc is about 150 ° to 160 °.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the reel-side regulating portion F401 is provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the arc gear F22. The arc-shaped gear F22 has, besides the reel-side restricting portion F401, a structure protruding from the surface (a protruding structure formed on a concentric circle centered on the center O22, and a protruding structure formed radially from the center O22). ), But the length of the portion where the reel-side regulating portion F401 protrudes from the surface of the arc gear F22 is longer than other protruding structures.

  FIG. 224 is a left side view of the crank member of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 225 is a perspective view of the crank member shown in FIG. In these figures, the surface of the crank member E22 on the side opposite to the side where the slide groove E22b (see FIG. 181) is formed is shown. Note that FIG. 224 corresponds to the diagram viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of the crank member E22, and the direction corresponds to a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, a front-side regulating portion E400 is formed on the crank member E22. In FIG. 224, the front-side restricting portion E400 is indicated by oblique lines for easy understanding. The front-side restricting portion E400 has a shape that forms an arc corresponding to a circle centered on the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 (the intermediate position E22a shown in FIG. 181). In the figure, it represents the radius of the circle r _2. The circumferential angle with respect to the arc is about 90 ° to 100 °.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the front-side regulating portion E400 is provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22.

Further, a front-side regulated portion E401 is formed in the crank member E22. The front-side regulated portion E401 is formed at a front-side regulated position (position indicated by a point E401a in FIG. 224) that is shifted from the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22. In the figure, it represents the distance from the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 up front the restricted position E401a at _{R 2.} The front-side regulated position E401a corresponds to a position where the slide groove E22b is formed on the surface on the opposite side of the crank member E22.

  The front-side regulated portion E401 is formed so that the shape in a side view is circular (or elliptical, square, hexagonal, or the like). The size (diameter) of the front-side regulated portion E401 in a side view is set smaller (for example, about 1/6 to 1/4) than the width of the slide groove E22b.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the front-side regulated portion E401 is provided so as to protrude from the front-side regulated position E401a in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22.

  As described above, the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the reel-side regulated portion F401 are each provided so as to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the arc gear F22 (see FIG. 223). The front-side restricting portion E400 and the front-side restricted portion E401 are provided so as to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22 (see FIG. 225).

  The arc gear F22 and the crank member E22 are arranged so that the surface of the arc gear F22 and the surface of the crank member E22 are substantially parallel (the direction of the rotation axis of the arc gear F22 and the crank member E22). The direction of the rotation axis of E22 matches).

  The length of the portion where the reel-side regulated portion F400 protrudes from the surface of the arc-shaped gear F22 (the projection length of the reel-side regulated portion F400), and the reel-side regulated portion F401 is formed on the surface of the arc-shaped gear F22. The length of the protruding portion (the protruding length of the reel-side restricting portion F401) and the length of the portion of the front-side restricting portion E400 protruding from the surface of the crank member E22 (the protruding length of the front-side restricting portion E400). ) And the length of the portion where the front-side regulated portion E401 protrudes from the surface of the crank member E22 (the protruding length of the front-side regulated portion E401) are respectively equal to the surface of the arc-shaped gear F22 and the crank member. It is shorter than the distance from the plane of E22.

  On the other hand, the sum of the protrusion length of the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the protrusion length of the front-side regulated portion E400, and the sum of the projected length of the reel-side regulated portion F401 and the projected length of the front-side regulated portion E401 are: Each of them is longer than the distance between the surface of the arc gear F22 and the surface of the crank member E22.

  Therefore, when the reel-side regulated portion F400 rotates with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, if the front-side regulating portion E400 is present in the course of the rotation, the existence of the front-side regulating portion E400 is disturbed. (Locked to the front-side regulating portion E400), the reel-side regulated portion F400 cannot rotate any further. As a result, the arc gear F22 also cannot rotate, and as a result, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is restricted.

  Similarly, in a case where the front-side regulated portion E401 is rotated with the rotation of the crank member E22, if the reel-side restricted portion F401 is present in the course of the rotation, the existence of the reel-side restricted portion F401 is disturbed. (Locked to the reel-side regulating portion F401), the front-side regulated portion E401 cannot rotate any further. As a result, the crank member E22 cannot rotate, and as a result, the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 is restricted.

  Hereinafter, a more detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS. FIG. 226 is a perspective view of a cross section of the screen device when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position. FIG. 227 is a right side view of a cross section of the arc gear and the crank member when the front screen mechanism is disposed at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism is disposed at the reel standby position. FIG. 228 is a perspective view of a cross section of the screen device when the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front standby position. FIG. 229 is a right side view of a cross section of the arc gear and the crank member when the reel screen mechanism is disposed at the reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism is disposed at the front standby position.

  Specifically, FIGS. 226 and 227 are planes parallel to the surface of the arc gear F22 and the surface of the crank member E22, and the distance from the surface of the arc gear F22 is the protrusion length of the reel-side regulated portion F400. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view when cut along a plane that is shorter than the front side regulating unit E400 and that is shorter than the front surface of the crank member E22. 228 and 229 are planes parallel to the plane of the arc gear F22 and the plane of the crank member E22. The distance from the plane of the arc gear F22 is shorter than the projection length of the reel-side restricting portion F401. It is sectional drawing when it cut | disconnected by the surface from which the distance from the surface of the member E22 becomes shorter than the protrusion length of the front side regulated part E401.

  For the sake of simplicity, in FIGS. 226 and 227, the front-side restricting portion E400 is indicated by oblique lines, and in FIGS. 228 and 229, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is indicated by oblique lines. 226 to 229 show the crank member E22, which is the crank member E22 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A, and the crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is (front). (Except for the side regulation portion E400 and the front side regulated portion E401) (not shown).

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulating portion E400 are arranged as shown in FIGS. 226 and 227. Placed in

In this state, it is assumed that a force for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is applied. At this time, the reel-side regulated portion F400 starts to rotate counterclockwise from the positions shown in FIGS. 226 and 227. The direction of movement of the reel-side regulated portion F400 at the start of rotation is centered on the center O22 of the arc gear F22, and the distance between the center O22 and the position of the reel-side regulated portion F400 (reel-side regulated position F400a). A counterclockwise direction (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 227) is a tangent line at the reel-side regulated position F400a of a circle having a radius of (R _{1 in} FIG. 222). However, as shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, the front-side restricting portion E400 is disposed so as to approach (substantially abut) the reel-side restricted portion F400 on the moving direction side of the reel-side restricted portion F400. . The front-side restricting portion E400 is disposed so as to intersect with the movement direction (the tangent line) of the reel-side restricted portion F400 (to obstruct the course of the reel-side restricted portion F400). Even if F400 continues to rotate, it is locked by the front-side restricting portion E400, and the reel-side restricted portion F400 cannot pass through the position where the front-side restricting portion E400 exists. You will stop. As a result, the arc gear F22 cannot rotate any more, and as a result, the reel screen mechanism F1 does not rotate, and the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is maintained. become.

The above content can be paraphrased as follows. That is, when the arc gear F22 is rotated to drive the reel screen mechanism F1, the reel-side regulated portion F400 is centered on the center O22 of the arc gear F22, and moves between the center O22 and the reel-side regulated position F400a. It rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the distance (R _{1 in} FIG. 222). When the reel screen mechanism F1 rotates from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position, the locus drawn by the reel-side regulated portion F400 is a part (arc) of the circumference. In the present embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position, the front-side restricting portion E400 is disposed so as to intersect with the arc. The front-side restricting portion E400 exists during the rotation of. For this reason, the front-side restricting portion E400 serves as a barrier that blocks the course of the reel-side restricted portion F400, and prevents the reel-side restricted portion F400 from rotating any further (the front-side restricting portion E400 blocks a hand). . Thereby, even if a force for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is applied, it is possible to prevent the reel screen mechanism F1 from moving to the reel exposure position.

  When the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position (cases of FIGS. 226 and 227), the reel screen mechanism F1 is kept near the reel standby position. From the viewpoint, it is preferable that the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulated portion E400 be as close as possible. For example, the gap between the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulated portion E400 is equal to or less than twice the diameter (diameter of a circle) of the reel-side regulated portion F400, less than or equal to the diameter of the reel-side regulated portion F400, or the reel. The diameter of the side regulated portion F400 may be designed to be 2/3 or less (or 1/2 or less, 1/3 or less, 1/4 or less).

Further, as described in detail in the second embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated from the front exposure position to the front standby position. In this regard, as described with reference to FIG. 224, the front-side regulating unit E400 corresponds to the circle centered on the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 (circle the _{r 2} shown in FIG. 224 and radius) It has a shape that forms an arc. Therefore, when rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position, the front-side regulating unit E400 rotates clockwise on the circumference from the position shown in FIG. 227. At that time, the reel-side the restricted portion F400 is remains in the position shown in FIG. 227 (distance that is shorter than the radius r ₂ of the circular position of the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22), the front side It does not obstruct the course of the regulating unit E400. Therefore, the front-side regulating portion E400 is not locked by the reel-side regulated portion F400, and the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated from the front exposure position to the front standby position without any problem.

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated from the front exposure position to the front standby position, from the viewpoint of preventing the reel-side regulated portion F400 from obstructing the course of the front-side regulating portion E400, the front screen When the mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position (FIGS. 226 and 227), the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulating portion E400 are brought into contact with each other. It is better to keep the front-side restricting portion E400 and the reel-side closed when the front-side restricting portion E400 moves if the reel-side restricted portion F400 and the front-side restricting portion E400 are in contact with each other. Friction occurs due to contact with the regulated part F400, and smooth rotation cannot be performed. There is a gender). For example, the gap between the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulated portion E400 is 1/20 or more (or 1/10 or more, 1/5 or more) of the diameter (diameter of a circle) of the reel-side regulated portion F400. １ ／ or more, 、 ２ or more,） or more), or the diameter of the reel-side regulated portion F400 or more.

  When the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposing position and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the front-side regulated portion E401 and the reel-side regulating portion F401 are arranged as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229. Placed in

In this state, it is assumed that a force for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is applied. At this time, the front-side regulated portion E401 starts to rotate counterclockwise from the positions shown in FIGS. 228 and 229. The movement direction of the front-side restricted portion E401 at the start of the rotation is about the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22, and the position of the rotation center E22a and the front-side restricted portion E401 (the front-side restricted position E401a). the distance (in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 229) counter-clockwise direction along the tangential line at the front side the restricted position E401a of a circle the radius (R ₂ in FIG. ₂₂₄₎ with. However, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is disposed so as to approach (substantially abut) the front-side restricted portion E401 on the moving direction side of the front-side restricted portion E401. . The reel-side restricting portion F401 is disposed so as to intersect with the moving direction (the tangent line) of the front-side restricted portion E401 (so as to obstruct the course of the front-side restricted portion E401). Even if E401 continues to rotate, it is locked by the reel-side restricting portion F401, and the front-side restricted portion E401 cannot pass through the position where the reel-side restricting portion F401 exists. You will stop. As a result, the crank member E22 cannot rotate further, and as a result, the front screen mechanism E1 does not rotate, and the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is maintained. Become.

The above content can be paraphrased as follows. That is, when the crank member E22 rotates to drive the front screen mechanism E1, the front-side restricted portion E401 is centered on the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22, and the rotation center E22a and the front-side restricted position E401a. pivots on the circumference length of a circle that the (R ₂ in FIG. ₂₂₄₎ and the radius of the. When the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposure position, the trajectory drawn by the front-side restricted portion E401 is a part (arc) of the circumference. In the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is disposed so as to intersect with the arc. During the rotation of the reel, the reel side regulating portion F401 exists. For this reason, the reel-side restricting portion F401 serves as a barrier that blocks the path of the front-side restricted portion E401, and prevents the front-side restricted portion E401 from rotating any more. . Thus, even if a force is applied to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be prevented from moving to the front exposure position.

  When the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position (FIGS. 228 and 229), the front screen mechanism E1 is kept near the front standby position. From the viewpoint, it is preferable that the front-side regulated portion E401 and the reel-side regulated portion F401 be as close as possible. For example, the gap between the front-side regulated portion E401 and the reel-side regulated portion F401 is equal to or less than twice the diameter (diameter of a circle) of the front-side regulated portion E401, equal to or smaller than the diameter of the front-side regulated portion E401, or The diameter is preferably designed to be 2/3 or less (or 1/2 or less, 1/3 or less, 1/4 or less) of the diameter of the side regulated portion E401.

Further, as described in detail in the second embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be rotated from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position. Arc In this regard, as described with reference to FIG. 222, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is corresponding to circle around the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 (circle the r ₁ shown in FIG. 222 and radius) Is formed. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position, the reel-side restricting portion F401 rotates clockwise on the circumference from the position shown in FIG. At that time, the front side the restricted portion E401 is remains in the position shown in FIG. 229 (distance that is shorter than the radius r ₁ of the circle position from the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22), the reel-side regulating The path of the unit F401 is not obstructed. Therefore, the reel-side regulating portion F401 is not locked by the front-side regulated portion E401, and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be rotated from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position without any problem.

  In this manner, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position, from the viewpoint of preventing the front-side restricted portion E401 from obstructing the course of the reel-side restricting portion F401, the reel screen When the mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposing position and the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position (FIGS. 228 and 229), the front-side regulated portion E401 and the reel-side regulating portion F401 are brought into contact with each other. It is preferable that the reel-side restricting portion F401 and the reel-side restricting portion F401 move when the reel-side restricting portion F401 moves. There is a possibility that smooth rotation cannot be performed due to friction generated by contact with the regulated portion E401. ). For example, the gap between the front-side regulated portion E401 and the reel-side regulated portion F401 is 1/20 or more (or 1/10 or more, 1/5 or more) of the diameter (diameter of a circle) of the front-side regulated portion E401. １ ／, 以上 or more, 等 or more), or the diameter of the front-side regulated portion E401.

Further, the distance (r _{1 in} FIG. 222) from the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 to the reel-side regulating portion F401 and the distance from the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 to the front-side regulating portion E400 (r _{2 in} FIG. 224). ) Is shorter than the distance from the center O22 of the arc gear F22 to the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 (the linear distance between the center O22 and the rotation center E22a in FIGS. 227 and 229). . Thus, even if the crank member E22 rotates, the reel-side restricting portion F401 does not contact the front-side restricting portion E400 (the front-side restricting portion E400 is locked by the reel-side restricting portion F401). No), even if the circular gear F22 rotates, the reel-side restricting portion F401 does not contact the front-side restricting portion E400 (the reel-side restricting portion F401 is locked by the front-side restricting portion E400). No). Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position (in the case of FIG. 227), the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated from the front exposure position to the front standby position without any problem, and the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated. When E1 is located at the front standby position (in the case of FIG. 229), the reel screen mechanism F1 can be rotated from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position without any problem.

  As above, the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described as one embodiment of the present invention.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body.

  In recent years, a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed in order to further enhance the effect of the effect. In a gaming machine equipped with such an effect device, a desired effect can be performed by appropriately changing the positional relationship between the movable bodies according to the state of the game. If one movable body moves to a place different from the place where the movable body should be originally arranged, the intended effect cannot be realized.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to arrange a movable body at an appropriate position in a gaming machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(35-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and a second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A first drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the first screen;
A second drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1), which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, so that an image displayed on a screen can be visually recognized.
The first driving mechanism (front screen driving mechanism E2) includes a first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) for transmitting a driving force to the first screen, and the first screen includes the first driving mechanism. With the operation of the force transmission member, the operation is performed between a first projection position (front exposure position) and a first non-projection position (front standby position),
The second driving mechanism (reel screen driving mechanism F2) includes a second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a driving force to the second screen, and the second screen includes the second screen. With the operation of the driving force transmission member, the operation is performed between a second projection position (reel exposure position) and a second non-projection position (reel standby position),
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen is arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position), and an image projected by the projector Is displayed on the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1), and when the second screen is arranged at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen is moved to the first non-projection position. Position (front standby position), an image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1),
The first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) is provided with a first regulating portion (front side regulating portion E400) for preventing the operation of the second driving force transmitting member.
The second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) operates together with the second driving force transmitting member, and can be prevented from operating by the first restricting portion. F400) is formed,
When the first screen is located at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen is moved from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position). When a force to move the first driving force transmitting member is applied, the second restricted portion (reel-side restricted portion F400) formed on the second driving force transmitting member is connected to the first restricting portion formed on the first driving force transmitting member. The operation of the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) is prevented by being locked by the portion (front side regulating portion E400).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is used. It is arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position), and the image projected by the projector is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is located at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first non-projection position (front standby position). And the image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). As described above, by defining the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the screen on which the image projected by the projector is displayed can be moved to the first screen (front screen mechanism). Switching between the screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Thereby, an effect using a desired screen can be performed according to the situation of the game.

  Here, if the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is moved to the second non-projection position (reel standby). If the position moves from the position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position), the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) breaks down, and an appropriate There is a possibility that the production cannot be performed. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) for transmitting the driving force to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) includes the second screen. A first restricting portion (front side restricting portion E400) for preventing the operation of the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the driving force to the (reel screen mechanism F1) is formed. The second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) operates together with the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22), and the operation is blocked by the first regulating portion (front-side regulating portion E400). The resulting second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400) is formed. When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is located at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is moved from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second position. 2 Even if a force for moving toward the projection position (reel exposure position) is applied, the second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400) formed on the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22). ) Is locked by the first restricting portion (front-side restricting portion E400) formed on the first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22), so that the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) is locked. ) Is prevented. This prevents the force from being transmitted from the second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1), and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is moved to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Moving from the non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position) can be prevented.

(35-2) a projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and a second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A first drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the first screen;
A second drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1), which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, so that an image displayed on a screen can be visually recognized.
The first driving mechanism (front screen driving mechanism E2) includes an arm (crank member E22) connected to the first screen, and the first screen moves in a first projection position in accordance with the operation of the arm. (The front exposure position) and the first non-projection position (the front standby position).
The second driving mechanism (reel screen driving mechanism F2) includes a gear (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a driving force to the second screen, and the second screen rotates with the rotation of the gear. Performing an operation between a second projection position (reel exposure position) and a second non-projection position (reel standby position),
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen is arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position), and an image projected by the projector Is displayed on the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1), and when the second screen is arranged at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen is moved to the first non-projection position. Position (front standby position), an image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1),
On the arm (crank member E22), a first restricting portion (front side restricting portion E400) for preventing rotation of the gear is formed in a curved shape.
The gear (arc-shaped gear F22) includes a second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400) that rotates together with the gear and can be prevented from rotating by the first regulating portion. It is formed at a predetermined position (reel-side regulated position F400a) shifted from the moving center,
The second restricted portion (reel-side restricted portion F400) at the time when the second screen starts operating from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) toward the second projection position (reel exposure position). Is a tangent line at a predetermined position of a circle centered on the rotation center of the gear (the center O22 of the arc gear F22) and having a radius equal to the distance between the rotation center of the gear and the predetermined position. One direction (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 227),
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the curved second restricting portion (front-side restricting portion E400) intersects with the tangent line. Portion, which is disposed on the one direction side of the portion and is in contact with or close to the second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is used. It is arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position), and the image projected by the projector is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is located at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first non-projection position (front standby position). And the image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). As described above, by defining the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the screen on which the image projected by the projector is displayed can be moved to the first screen (front screen mechanism). Switching between the screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Thereby, an effect using a desired screen can be performed according to the situation of the game.

  Here, if the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is moved to the second non-projection position (reel standby). If the position moves from the position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position), the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) breaks down, and an appropriate There is a possibility that the production cannot be performed. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the arm (the crank member E22) connected to the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1) applies a driving force to the second screen (the reel screen mechanism F1). A first restricting portion (front-side restricting portion E400) for preventing rotation of a gear (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the rotation is formed in a curved shape. In addition, a gear (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a driving force to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) rotates together with the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) to form a first regulating portion (front-side regulation). The second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400), which can be prevented from rotating by the portion E400), is shifted from a rotation center on the gear (center O22 of the arc gear F22) by a predetermined position (reel-side regulated portion). It is formed at a position F400a). The second restricted portion (reel-side restricted portion) at the time when the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) starts operating from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) toward the second projection position (reel exposure position). The movement direction of the gear F400) is centered on the rotation center of the gear (the center O22 of the arc gear F22) and the rotation center of the gear (the center O22 of the arc gear F22) and a predetermined position (the reel-side regulated position F400a). Is a direction (direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. 227) along a tangent line at a predetermined position (reel-side regulated position F400a) of a circle having a radius of. When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the first projection position (front exposure position), the curved first restricting portion (front side restricting portion E400) intersects the tangent line. The one direction (the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) of the second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400) moves from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position). At the time of starting the movement toward the second regulated portion (the moving direction of the reel-side regulated portion F400), and is in contact with or close to the second regulated portion (the reel-side regulated portion F400). ing. Accordingly, it is assumed that a force for moving the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position) is applied to the gear (arc-shaped gear F22). Also, a second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400) formed on the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) is engaged by a first regulated portion (front-side regulated portion E400) formed on the arm (crank member E22). Will be stopped. Due to this, the rotation of the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) is prevented, so that the force is transmitted from the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). And the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) can be prevented from moving from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position).

(36-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and a second screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A first drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the first screen;
A second drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the second screen;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1), which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, so that an image displayed on a screen can be visually recognized.
The first driving mechanism (reel screen driving mechanism F2) includes a first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a driving force to the first screen, and the first screen includes the first screen. With the operation of the driving force transmitting member, the driving force transmitting member rotates between a first projection position (reel exposure position) and a first non-projection position (reel standby position),
The second driving mechanism (front screen driving mechanism E2) includes a second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) for transmitting a driving force to the second screen, and the second screen includes the second driving mechanism. With the operation of the force transmitting member, the power transmission member rotates between a second projection position (front exposure position) and a second non-projection position (front standby position),
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen is arranged at the second non-projection position (front standby position), and an image projected by the projector Is displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1), and when the second screen is arranged at the second projection position (front exposure position), the first screen is displayed on the first non-projection position. Position (reel standby position), the image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (front screen mechanism E1),
When the second screen rotates from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position), a portion on the second screen farthest from the center of the rotation is drawn. The trajectory (the trajectory drawn by the front end of the front screen mechanism E1 shown in FIG. 53) is ahead of the existing position of the first screen disposed at the first projection position (reel exposure position),
A first restricting portion (reel-side restricting portion F401) for preventing the operation of the second driving force transmitting member is formed on the first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22).
The second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) is operated together with the second driving force transmitting member, and the second regulated portion (front regulated portion E401), which can be prevented from operating by the first regulating portion. ) Is formed,
When the first screen is located at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen is moved from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position). When a force to move the first driving force transmitting member is applied, the second regulated portion (front-side regulated portion E401) formed on the second driving force transmitting member is connected to the first regulating portion formed on the first driving force transmitting member. The operation of the second driving force transmission member (crank member E22) is prevented by being locked by the portion (reel side regulating portion F401).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is disposed at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is used. It is arranged at the second non-projection position (front standby position), and the image projected by the projector is displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1). On the other hand, when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is located at the second projection position (front exposure position), the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the first non-projection position (reel standby position). And the image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). In this manner, by defining the positional relationship between the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), the screen on which the image projected by the projector is displayed can be moved to the first screen (reel screen mechanism). Switching between the screen mechanism F1) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). Thereby, an effect using a desired screen can be performed according to the situation of the game.

  Here, if the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is located at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is moved to the second non-projection position (front standby). If the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) are displaced from each other from the second projection position (the front exposure position) to the second projection position (the front exposure position), the positional relationship may be lost. There is a possibility that the production cannot be performed. In particular, when the second screen (the front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the second non-projection position (the front standby position) to the second projection position (the front exposure position), the second screen (the farthest from the center of the rotation) The locus drawn by the part on the front screen mechanism E1) (the locus drawn by the front end of the front screen mechanism E1 shown in FIG. 53) is the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position). ) Is located ahead of the existing position. Therefore, when the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is located at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second non-projection position (front standby position). When moving toward the second projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) appears so as to cover the front of the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1). For example, while a player who is excited during playing a game may hit or shake the gaming machine, the second screen (the front screen mechanism E1) is moved to the second non-projection position due to the vibration caused thereby. When moving from the (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position), it is displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) due to the appearance of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). The displayed image is covered from the front (a part or the whole of the image displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is displayed on the second screen (front screen mechanism E1)), and the effect is produced. It can be very strange.

  In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the driving force to the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) includes the second driving force transmitting member. A first restricting portion (reel-side restricting portion F401) for preventing operation of a second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) for transmitting a driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is formed. The second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) operates together with the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22), and the operation can be prevented by the first regulating portion (reel-side regulating portion F401). Two regulated portions (front-side regulated portion E401) are formed. When the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is disposed at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is moved from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second position. 2 Even if a force is applied to move to the second projection position (front exposure position), the second regulated portion (front regulated portion E401) formed on the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22). Is locked by the first restricting portion (reel-side restricting portion F401) formed on the first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22), so that the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) is formed. Operation is blocked. This prevents the force from being transmitted from the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) to the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), and causes the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) to move to the second non-conductive state. Moving from the projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position) can be prevented. As a result, when an effect using the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is being performed, a situation occurs in which the effect is disturbed by the movement of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). Can be suppressed.

(36-2) The gaming machine according to (36-1),
When the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the second non-projection position (front standby position), the center of gravity of the second screen is above and forward of the center of rotation.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the second non-projection position (front standby position), the center of gravity of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). Is located above and forward of the center of rotation of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is projected from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection by gravity. A force to move toward the position (front exposure position) acts. In addition to such gravity, as described above, there is a possibility that a shock is applied by the player during the game. Alternatively, there is a possibility that a force for moving the second screen (the front screen mechanism E1) is exerted due to vibration or the like (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-042692) generated when the gaming machine is carried. Thus, if the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position) (the second screen (front screen disposed above) If the mechanism E1) is dropped), there is a concern that the second screen (the front screen mechanism E1) comes into contact with other members and these members are damaged. However, as described above, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second regulated portion (the front regulated portion E401) formed on the second driving force transmitting member (the crank member E22) is the second regulated portion. The movement of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be stopped by being locked by the first restricting portion (reel-side restricting portion F401) formed on the first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body.

  In a gaming machine equipped with such a movable body, it is assumed that the movable body moves and the movable body and other members come into contact with each other. The member may be damaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to prevent a movable body and other members from being damaged in a gaming machine having a movable body.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(37-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the screen;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1), which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, so that an image displayed on a screen can be visually recognized.
The drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) includes a drive force transmission member (arm member F21) for transmitting a drive force to the screen.
The driving force transmitting member is rotatably supported by a support member (movable body bases C5 and C6).
The screen rotates from a first position (reel exposure position) to a second position (reel standby position) by being driven by the driving mechanism,
When the screen is at the second position (reel standby position), a projection (projection F200b) formed on the driving force transmitting member is housed in a concave portion (buffer member installation section C201) formed on the support member. At the same time, the protrusion comes into contact with a buffer member (buffer member C202) provided in the concave portion.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the projection (projection F200b) is formed on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) for transmitting the driving force to the screen (reel screen mechanism F1), A concave portion (cushioning member installation portion C201) is formed in a support member (movable body base C5, C6) that rotatably supports the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21), and is formed in the concave portion (cushioning member installation portion C201). Is provided with a buffer member (buffer member C202). When the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the second position (reel standby position), the projection (projection F200b) formed on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is supported by the support member (movable body base C5. The protrusion (protrusion F200b) is accommodated in the concave portion (buffer member installation portion C201) formed in C6) and abuts on the buffer member (buffer member C202) provided in the concave portion (buffer member installation portion C201). . Therefore, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) that has started rotating from the first position (reel exposure position) reaches the second position (reel standby position), the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is turned on. The contact between the projection (projection F200b) and the cushioning member (cushioning member C202) allows the shock accompanying the contact to be absorbed by the cushioning member (cushioning member C202). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the force applied to the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21), the supporting members (movable body bases C5 and C6), the screen (reel screen mechanism F1), and the like due to the contact. Damage can be prevented. Further, the protrusion (protrusion F200b) formed on the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21) is housed in a concave portion (buffer member installation portion C201) formed on the support member (movable body base C5, C6). Therefore, it is sufficient that the cushioning member (cushioning member C202) is provided in the concave portion (cushioning member installation portion C201), and the entire contact portion between the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21) and the supporting members (movable body bases C5 and C6). There is no need to provide a buffer member over the entire area. Therefore, the amount of the buffer member can be reduced, and the cost due to the use of the buffer member can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, it has been described that the projection F200b formed on the arm member F21 (driving force transmitting member) is housed in the buffer member installation portion C201 (recess) formed on the movable body bases C5 and C6. In the present invention, the driving force transmitting member on which the projection to be housed in the recess is formed is not limited to the arm member F21. For example, a projection is formed on a gear (arc-shaped gear), and the projection is formed on the recess. It may be stored. As such a gear, a gear in the shape of a sector (a figure surrounded by an arc and two radii) in a front view can be employed, and in this case, the protrusions project from one of the two radii. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be provided.

  As an example, a fan-shaped gear having a central angle of 270 ° will be described. Two points on the circumference around the point O are denoted as A and B, and the arc and two radii forming the sector are denoted as arc AB, radius OA, and radius OB, respectively. The arc AB forming the sector is a longer arc (dominant arc). In other words, the sector AB (segment having a central angle of 270 °) has a shorter arc (minor arc), a radius OA, and a radius OB. (A sector having a central angle of 90 °) is cut out from the circle with the point O as the center. The points A and B on the circumference have a positional relationship such that the point B exists at a position obtained by rotating the point A 90 degrees clockwise along the circumference. In the gear having such a shape, the portion corresponding to the radius OA has a larger thickness than the portion corresponding to the radius OB, and the portion having the increased thickness has a protrusion that projects in the clockwise direction. Are formed.

  Here, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the first position (reel exposure position), while the radius OA is arranged along the vertical direction, the radius OB is arranged along the horizontal direction, and the gear is moved. By rotating clockwise by 90 °, the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) moves to the second position (reel standby position). When the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the second position (reel standby position), the radius OA is arranged along the horizontal direction. At this time, the protrusion formed with the radius OA is arranged so as to protrude downward. On the other hand, as described in the fourth embodiment, the movable member bases C5 and C6 each have the buffer member installation portion C201 (concave portion) that is concave with respect to the horizontal plane (the reference surface C200), and the screen (reel). When the screen mechanism F1) is at the second position (reel standby position), the protrusion formed with the radius OA is housed in the buffer member installation section C201 (recess) and provided in the buffer member installation section C201 (recess). Abuts on the cushioning member (buffer member C202). According to such an embodiment, the same effect as in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

(37-2) The gaming machine according to (37-1),
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screen and the drive mechanism;
The support member (movable body bases C5 and C6) has a support surface (reference surface C200) formed above the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen casing and substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate,
The recess (the cushioning member installation portion C201) has a shape recessed with respect to the support surface,
When the screen is at the second position (reel standby position), the tip of a projection (projection F200b) formed on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) becomes the lower end of the driving force transmission member, and The tip of abuts against the buffer member, whereby the driving force transmitting member is supported by the recess through the buffer member.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the second position (reel standby position), the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) includes the screen housing (arm member F21). The screen case C10) is separated from the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). In other words, the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21) is not supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), but is supported by a supporting surface (reference surface C200) substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). C6), and the protrusion (of the driving force transmission member (arm member F21)) of the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is formed on a buffer member (buffer member C202) provided in a concave portion (buffer member installation portion C201) formed on the support surface (reference surface C200). The driving force transmitting member (the arm member F21) is supported by the concave portion (the cushioning member installation portion C201) via the cushioning member (the cushioning member C202) by abutting the projection F200b). As a result, the gravity acting on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is received by the buffer member (buffer member C202), and the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) can be kept in a stable state.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the second position (reel standby position), the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is added to the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21). The reel screen mechanism F1) is also separated from the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen casing (screen casing C10) and is not supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). The screen (reel screen mechanism F1) disposed at the second position (reel standby position) can be supported by the member (the buffer member C202), and can be stabilized.

(37-I) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2), a first screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (reel screen mechanism F1), and driving the first screen A first drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for the display unit (display unit A) configured as a unit;
A main unit (cabinet G) that houses the display unit and has an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1), which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, so that an image displayed on a screen can be visually recognized.
An arm (arm member F21) is connected to the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1).
The arm is rotatably supported by a support member (movable body bases C5 and C6).
The first screen is driven by the first drive mechanism to rotate from a first position (reel exposure position) to a second position (reel standby position) in conjunction with the rotation of the arm. ,
When the first screen is at the second position (reel standby position), a projection (projection F200b) formed on the arm is housed in a recess (buffer member installation section C201) formed on the support member. At the same time, the projection comes into contact with a buffer member (buffer member C202) provided in the concave portion.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

(37-II) The gaming machine according to (37-I),
The display unit, together with the projector, the first screen, and the first drive mechanism,
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A second drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the second screen;
The first screen, the first drive mechanism, the second screen, and a screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the second drive mechanism are configured as a unit,
The second screen is driven by the second drive mechanism to rotate from a position A (front standby position) to a position B (front exposure position),
When the second screen is at the position B (front exposure position), a protrusion (protrusion E300b) formed on the second screen has a concave portion (buffer member) formed on a bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen casing. The projection is in contact with a cushioning member (cushioning member C320) provided in the recess while being stored in the installation portion C300).
It is characterized by the following.

(38-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the first screen;
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the first screen and the driving mechanism;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1), which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, so that an image displayed on a screen can be visually recognized.
The first screen is driven by the drive mechanism to rotate from a first position (front standby position) to a second position (front exposure position),
When the first screen is at the second position (front exposure position), a protrusion (protrusion E300b) formed on the first screen has a concave portion (bottom plate C1) formed on a bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen casing. The protrusion is stored in the cushioning member installation portion C300), and the protrusion comes into contact with the cushioning member (the cushioning member C320) provided in the concave portion.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the projection (the projection E300b) is formed on the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1), while the bottom plate (the bottom plate C1) of the screen housing (the screen housing C10) is formed. ) Is formed with a concave portion (buffer member installation portion C300), and the concave portion (buffer member installation portion C300) is provided with a buffer member (buffer member C320). When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position), the projections (projections E300b) formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) are on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). The protrusion (protrusion E300b) is accommodated in the formed concave portion (buffer member installation portion C300) and abuts on the buffer member (buffer member C320) provided in the concave portion (buffer member installation portion C300). Therefore, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), which has started rotating from the first position (front standby position), reaches the second position (front exposure position), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). ) Comes into contact with the cushioning member (cushioning member C320), so that the shock caused by the contact can be absorbed by the cushioning member (cushioning member C320). Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the force applied to the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1), the bottom plate (the bottom plate C1), and the like due to the contact, and it is possible to prevent them from being damaged. In addition, since the projection (projection E300b) formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is housed in the concave portion (buffer member installation portion C300) formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the cushion member ( The buffer member C320 only needs to be provided in the concave portion (the buffer member installation portion C300), and there is no need to provide a buffer member over the entire contact portion between the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1) and the bottom plate (the bottom plate C1). . Therefore, the amount of the buffer member can be reduced, and the cost due to the use of the buffer member can be suppressed. Further, the projection (projection E300b) formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is housed in a recess (buffer member installation section C300) formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), so that the projection (projection E300b) is formed. Can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated by the presence of the projection (projection E300b).

  Note that the projection need not be completely housed in the recess, and the rest of the projection may be exposed to the outside of the recess while a part of the projection is housed in the recess. However, as described above, from the viewpoint of making the protrusion invisible to the player, it is desirable to store most of the protrusion in the recess. For example, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, 80% of the protrusion The projections and recesses may be configured so that the above (or 90% or more, 95% or more, 98% or more) is housed in the recesses and hidden.

(38-2) The gaming machine according to (38-1),
A second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) different from the first screen,
On the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a mounting portion (center mounting portion C11) for mounting the second screen is formed in a concave shape.
The second screen is mounted on the bottom plate while being fitted to the mounting portion,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the mounting portion (center mounting portion C11) for mounting the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is formed in a concave shape on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is mounted on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) while being fitted to the mounting portion (center mounting portion C11). Therefore, when an impact is generated when the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1) and the bottom plate (the bottom plate C1) come into contact with each other, the impact easily propagates to the second screen (the fixed screen mechanism D). However, as described above, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the projection (the projection E300b) of the first screen (the front screen mechanism E1) comes into contact with the cushioning member (the cushioning member C320). Since the shock caused by the contact can be absorbed by the cushioning member (cushioning member C320), the propagation of the shock to the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is suppressed, and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is Damage can be prevented.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine equipped with an effect device capable of performing an effect by operating a movable body (see JP-A-2013-013685). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only with the image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body.

  A gaming machine equipped with such a rendering device is provided with a drive mechanism for driving the movable body, but if the drive mechanism is not arranged at an appropriate position, the driving force is accurately applied to the movable body. It cannot be transmitted, and the originally intended movement of the movable body cannot be realized.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of disposing a drive mechanism at an appropriate position.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(39-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the screen;
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screen and the drive mechanism;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a first gear (crank gear E21) and a second gear (intermediate gear E23) for transmitting a driving force to the screen.
A straight line connecting a predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the first gear and the rotation center of the first gear, and a predetermined direction unrelated to the rotation of the first gear The angle between the straight line and the straight line (the angle 示 す EOX shown in FIG. 189) is denoted by θ, and when the value of θ changes from α to β with the rotation of the first gear, the screen moves to the From the first position (front exposure position) to the second position (front standby position),
The screen housing (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10) has openings (marking windows) at positions where at least a part of the first gear and the second gear can be visually recognized from the outside. C100) is provided,
When the first gear is in the state of θ = α, the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23). The first mark portion (mark portion E21c) formed on the first gear and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) formed on the second gear are substantially aligned with each other. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are visible through an opening,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, with the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21), the angle θ (from the rotation center on the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21)). A straight line connecting the shifted predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) and the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), and a predetermined direction unrelated to the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21). When the angle between the (horizontal) straight line and the angle (EOX shown in FIG. 189) changes from α to β, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position. (Front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position (front standby position), the first gear ( The crank gear E21) needs to be arranged in a state of θ = α.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first gear (crank gear E21) is in the state of θ = α, the rotation center of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) is set. ), The center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark (marker E21c) formed on the first gear (crank gear E21), and the second gear (intermediate gear E23). ), The opening (marking window C100) provided in the screen casing (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) so that the second mark portion (marking portion E23a) formed on the screen is substantially aligned. Through this, the first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) become visible. Therefore, in order to arrange the first gear (crank gear E21) in the state of θ = α, on the contrary, the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E21c) are provided through the opening (mark window C100). While visually recognizing the mark (mark E23a), the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the first mark If the first gear (crank gear E21) and the second gear (intermediate gear E23) are arranged so that the (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) are arranged substantially in a straight line. Good. As a result, the first gear (crank gear E21) can be arranged in a state of θ = α, and the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can perform a desired operation.

(39-2) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the screen;
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screen and the drive mechanism;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the screen,
A first drive for transmitting a driving force generated from a motor to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove. Gear (crank gear E21),
A second gear (intermediate gear E23) meshed with the first gear and transmitting a driving force generated by a motor to the first gear;
The slide member is fixed to an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) of the first gear that is shifted from the center of rotation, and the rotation of the first gear is caused by the rotation of the first gear. 189. Rotation on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the center of motion (center O21 shown in FIG. 189) and whose radius is the distance between the center of rotation of the first gear and the eccentric position (the distance r shown in FIG. 189). And
The slide member rotates from a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle と EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes α) to a second predetermined position (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes β). When the arm is moved, the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove via the slide member by the slide member sliding inside the slide groove with the rotation of the slide member. The screen rotates from a first position (front exposure position) to a second position (front standby position) in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
The screen housing (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10) has openings (marking windows) at positions where at least a part of the first gear and the second gear can be visually recognized from the outside. C100) is provided,
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the rotation center of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) , The center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), a first mark (marker E21c) formed on the first gear, and a second mark formed on the second gear. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are visible through the opening so that the portion (mark portion E23a) is substantially aligned with the straight line.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, an arm (crank member E22) is connected to a screen (front screen mechanism E1), and a slide groove (slide groove E22b) is formed in the arm (crank member E22). Have been. The slide member (slide member E26) fixed to the first gear (crank gear E21) can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). Specifically, the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) on the first gear (crank gear E21) that is offset from the center of rotation, and the first gear (crank gear E21). With the rotation of E21), the center of rotation of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) is centered on the center of rotation of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the eccentric position (eccentricity). It rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the distance from the position E21b). The slide member (slide member E26) moves from a first predetermined position (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α) on the circumference to a second predetermined position (the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes β). Position), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the slide member (slide member E26). The arm (the crank member E22) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the slide groove E26). Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arm (the crank member E22), the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (the front exposure position) to the second position (the front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (the front exposure position) to the second position (the front standby position), at the time of starting the rotation, the slide member (the slide member) is required. E26) needs to be arranged at a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In this case, the rotation center of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the first gear (the crank gear E21) are formed. The screen casing (right side plate C2) is arranged such that the first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) formed on the second gear (intermediate gear E23) are substantially aligned. The first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) can be visually recognized through the opening (mark window C100) provided in the left side plate C3). Therefore, in order to arrange the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), on the contrary, the opening (the mark window) is required. C100) and the center of rotation of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the second gear while visually recognizing the first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a). The first gear (crank gear) is arranged such that the center of rotation (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark part (mark part E21c), and the second mark part (mark part E23a) are substantially aligned. E21) and the second gear (intermediate gear E23). Thereby, the slide member (slide member E26) can be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX is α shown in FIG. 189), and thus the slide member (slide member E26) Can be accurately transmitted to the screen (front screen mechanism E1) by sliding the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as designed. Operation can be performed.

(39-3) The gaming machine according to (39-1) or (39-2),
When the screen is in the second position (front standby position), the screen is separated from the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen casing, while the screen is in the first position ( When in the front exposure position), the screen is supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1);
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (the front exposure position), the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) is connected to the screen housing (the screen housing). The screen (front screen mechanism E1) is supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the body C10), and is in a stable state as compared with the case where the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front standby position). In order to arrange the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) in such a stable state (the first position (the front exposure position)), as described above, the rotation center of the first gear (the crank gear E21). By utilizing the positional relationship between the center O21), the center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark part (mark part E21c), and the second mark part (mark part E23a), What is necessary is just to arrange the 1st gear (crank gear E21). According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) can be arranged in a more stable state through the arrangement of the first gear (the crank gear E21).

(40-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the screen;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a drive force to the screen.
The angle between a straight line connecting a predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) on the gear and deviating from the rotation center and the rotation center of the gear and a straight line in a predetermined direction unrelated to the rotation of the gear (FIG. 189) Is described as θ, and when the value of θ changes from α to β with the rotation of the gear, the screen moves from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position. Position (front standby position)
The gear (crank gear E21) has a first through hole (through hole E21d) penetrating the gear,
When the gear is in the state of θ = α, the first through hole (the through hole E21d) and a fixed member (the right side plate C2 or the right movable body base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of the rotation of the gear. ) Are arranged in a positional relationship that allows a rod-shaped object to pass through both of the through-holes (through-holes C101).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the predetermined position (eccentricity) deviated from the angle θ (the rotation center on the gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21). Angle between a straight line connecting the position E21b) and the rotation center of the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and a straight line in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction) unrelated to the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21)) ( As the angle ΔEOX shown in FIG. 189 changes from α to β, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position (front standby position), the gear (crank gear E21) is required at the start of the rotation. ) Must be arranged in a state where θ = α.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the gear (crank gear E21) is in the state of θ = α, the first through hole (through hole E21d) formed in the gear (crank gear E21). ) And a second through-hole (through-hole C101) formed to penetrate a fixed member (right-side plate C2 or right movable base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of the rotation of the gear. By inserting a rod-shaped object, the gear (crank gear E21) can be fixed so that the value of θ does not change from α. Therefore, in order to dispose the gear in the state of θ = α, the position of the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) must be set at both the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101). The position of the gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted so that a rod-shaped object can be inserted through the gear. In this state, the gear (crank gear E21) is fixed by inserting a rod-shaped object into both the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101), so that the gear has θ = α. It can be fixedly arranged in a state. As a result, a desired operation can be performed on the screen (the front screen mechanism E1).

(40-2) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the screen;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the screen,
A gear (crank) for transmitting a driving force generated from a motor to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove. And a gear E21).
The slide member is fixed to an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) shifted from the center of rotation on the gear, and the center of rotation of the gear (center O21 shown in FIG. 189) with the rotation of the gear. ), And rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the distance (the distance r shown in FIG. 189) between the rotation center of the gear and the eccentric position,
The slide member rotates from a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle と EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes α) to a second predetermined position (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes β). When the arm is moved, the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove via the slide member by the slide member sliding inside the slide groove with the rotation of the slide member. The screen rotates from a first position (front exposure position) to a second position (front standby position) in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
The gear (crank gear E21) has a first through hole (through hole E21d) penetrating the gear,
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first through hole (the through hole E21d) and the rotation of the gear A second through-hole (through-hole C101) formed to penetrate a fixed member (right-side plate C2 or right movable base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of movement, and a rod-like object is inserted into both through-holes. It is arranged in a positional relationship that can be inserted,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, an arm (crank member E22) is connected to a screen (front screen mechanism E1), and a slide groove (slide groove E22b) is formed in the arm (crank member E22). Have been. The slide member (slide member E26) fixed to the gear (crank gear E21) can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). Specifically, the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) on the gear (crank gear E21), which is offset from the center of rotation, and rotates with the gear (crank gear E21). Accordingly, a circle whose center is the center of rotation of the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and whose radius is the distance between the center of rotation of the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the eccentric position (eccentric position E21b). Rotate on the circumference. The slide member (slide member E26) moves from a first predetermined position (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α) on the circumference to a second predetermined position (the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes β). Position), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the slide member (slide member E26). The arm (the crank member E22) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the slide groove E26). Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arm (the crank member E22), the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (the front exposure position) to the second position (the front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (the front exposure position) to the second position (the front standby position), at the time of starting the rotation, the slide member (the slide member) is required. E26) needs to be arranged at a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In this case, the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) formed in the gear (crank gear E21) and the fixed member (the right side plate C2 or the right movable base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of the rotation of the gear. By inserting a rod-shaped object into both of the second through holes (through holes C101) formed so as to penetrate, the position of the slide member (slide member E26) becomes the first predetermined position (the angle shown in FIG. 189). It is possible to fix the gear (crank gear E21) so as not to move from (the position where EOX becomes α). Therefore, in order to arrange the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first through hole (through hole E21d) is required. Of the gear (crank gear E21) so that the rod-shaped object can be inserted into both the first through hole (the through hole E21d) and the second through hole (the through hole C101). The position can be adjusted. In this state, a rod-shaped object is inserted into both the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) to fix the gear (crank gear E21). ) Can be fixedly arranged at a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ΔEOX is α as shown in FIG. 189). As a result, it is possible to accurately transmit the driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1) by sliding the slide member (slide member E26) inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as designed. , The desired operation can be performed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1).

(40-3) The gaming machine according to (40-2),
The fixing member (right side plate C2) is a plate disposed substantially parallel to the surface of the gear (crank gear E21),
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the gear and the plate are moved in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the gear. , The first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) overlap,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first The through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) overlap. Therefore, in order to arrange the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX is α shown in FIG. 189), the first through hole (through hole E21d) is required. The position of the gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted such that the second through hole (through hole C101) overlaps with the second through hole. When a rod-shaped object is inserted into the second through-hole (through-hole C101) in this state, the rod-shaped object also passes through the first through-hole (through-hole E21d). As a result, the gear (crank gear E21) is fixed, and the slide member (slide member E26) is fixedly arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). Can be.

(41-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the screen;
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screen and the drive mechanism;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The driving mechanism (front screen driving mechanism E2) includes a first gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force to the screen.
A straight line connecting a predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the first gear and the rotation center of the first gear, and a predetermined direction unrelated to the rotation of the first gear The angle between the straight line and the straight line (the angle 示 す EOX shown in FIG. 189) is denoted by θ, and when the value of θ changes from α to β with the rotation of the first gear, the screen moves to the From the first position (front exposure position) to the second position (front standby position),
The first gear (crank gear E21) has a first through-hole (through-hole E21d) penetrating the first gear,
A second through-hole (through-hole C101) penetrating the plate (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3) is formed in a plate (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3) which constitutes the screen casing.
When the first gear is in the state of θ = α, the first through hole and the second through hole are formed when the first gear and the plate are viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the plate. Hole and overlap,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, with the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21), the angle θ (from the rotation center on the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21)). A straight line connecting the shifted predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) and the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), and a predetermined direction unrelated to the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21). When the angle between the (horizontal) straight line and the angle (EOX shown in FIG. 189) changes from α to β, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position. (Front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposure position) to the second position (front standby position), the first gear ( The crank gear E21) needs to be arranged in a state of θ = α.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first gear (crank gear E21) is in the state of θ = α, the first gear formed on the first gear (crank gear E21) is formed. The through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) formed in the plates (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3) constituting the screen casing (the screen casing C10) overlap. Therefore, in order to arrange the first gear (crank gear E21) in the state of θ = α, conversely, the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) overlap. Then, the position of the first gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted. In this state, for example, when a rod-shaped object is inserted into the second through-hole (through-hole C101), the rod-shaped object also passes through the first through-hole (through-hole E21d). Thus, the first gear (crank gear E21) is fixed, and the first gear (crank gear E21) can be fixedly arranged in a state of θ = α. As a result, a desired operation can be performed on the screen (the front screen mechanism E1).

(41-2) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the screen;
A screen housing (screen housing C10) that houses the screen and the drive mechanism;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes:
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the screen,
A first drive for transmitting a driving force generated from a motor to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove. And a gear (crank gear E21).
The slide member is fixed to an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) of the first gear that is shifted from the center of rotation, and the rotation of the first gear is caused by the rotation of the first gear. 189. Rotation on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the center of motion (center O21 shown in FIG. 189) and whose radius is the distance between the center of rotation of the first gear and the eccentric position (the distance r shown in FIG. 189). And
The slide member rotates from a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle と EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes α) to a second predetermined position (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes β). When the arm is moved, the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove via the slide member by the slide member sliding inside the slide groove with the rotation of the slide member. The screen rotates from a first position (front exposure position) to a second position (front standby position) in conjunction with the rotation of the arm,
The first gear (crank gear E21) has a first through-hole (through-hole E21d) penetrating the first gear,
A second through-hole (through-hole C101) penetrating the plate (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3) is formed in a plate (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3) which constitutes the screen casing.
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first gear and the plate are moved relative to the surface of the plate. When viewed from a vertical direction, the first through-hole and the second through-hole overlap,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, an arm (crank member E22) is connected to a screen (front screen mechanism E1), and a slide groove (slide groove E22b) is formed in the arm (crank member E22). Have been. The slide member (slide member E26) fixed to the first gear (crank gear E21) can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). Specifically, the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) on the first gear (crank gear E21) that is offset from the center of rotation, and the first gear (crank gear E21). With the rotation of E21), the center of rotation of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) is centered on the center of rotation of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the eccentric position (eccentricity). It rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the distance from the position E21b). The slide member (slide member E26) moves from a first predetermined position (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α) on the circumference to a second predetermined position (the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 becomes β). Position), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with the rotation of the slide member (slide member E26). The arm (the crank member E22) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the slide groove E26). Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arm (the crank member E22), the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (the front exposure position) to the second position (the front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (the front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (the front exposure position) to the second position (the front standby position), at the time of starting the rotation, the slide member (the slide member) is required. E26) needs to be arranged at a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In this case, the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) formed in the first gear (crank gear E21) and the plate (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3) forming the screen casing (the screen casing C10) are formed. And the second through-hole (through-hole C101). Therefore, in order to dispose the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first through hole (through The position of the first gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted so that the hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap. In this state, for example, when a rod-shaped object is inserted into the second through-hole (through-hole C101), the rod-shaped object also passes through the first through-hole (through-hole E21d). Thereby, the first gear (crank gear E21) is fixed, and the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). Can be arranged. As a result, it is possible to accurately transmit the driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1) by sliding the slide member (slide member E26) inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as designed. , The desired operation can be performed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1).

(41-3) The gaming machine according to (41-2),
A second gear (intermediate gear E23) meshed with the first gear and transmitting a driving force generated by a motor to the first gear;
The screen housing (the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10) has openings (marking windows) at positions where at least a part of the first gear and the second gear can be visually recognized from the outside. C100) is provided,
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the rotation center of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21) , The center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), a first mark (marker E21c) formed on the first gear, and a second mark formed on the second gear. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are visible through the opening so that the portion (mark portion E23a) is substantially aligned with the straight line.
It is characterized by the following.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first gear (the crank gear E21) is set such that the first through-hole (the through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (the through-hole C101) overlap. ), The slide member (slide member E26) can be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ΔEOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). However, even if the first gear (crank gear E21) is rotated in a dark cloud, the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) may not easily overlap. Further, it may be difficult to visually check whether the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) overlap.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In this case, the rotation center of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the first gear (the crank gear E21) are formed. The screen casing (right side plate C2) is arranged such that the first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) formed on the second gear (intermediate gear E23) are substantially aligned. The first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) can be visually recognized through the opening (mark window C100) provided in the left side plate C3). Therefore, the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the center of rotation of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark part (mark part E21c), and the second mark part When the (mark part E23a) is substantially aligned, the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) overlap. Therefore, in order to make the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) overlap, the first mark (marker E21c) is provided through the opening (marker window C100). And the rotation center of the first gear (the center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the second mark (the mark E23a). Positions of the first gear (crank gear E21) and the second gear (intermediate gear E23) such that the first mark part (mark part E21c) and the second mark part (mark part E23a) are substantially aligned. Can be adjusted. By doing so, the first through-hole (through-hole E21d) and the second through-hole (through-hole C101) can be relatively easily overlapped, and the slide member (slide member E26) can be formed. ) Can be arranged at a first predetermined position on the circumference (a position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

  In addition, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by projecting an image on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to represent images at the same level as that of the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged as compared with the liquid crystal display device or the like. In addition, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by the liquid crystal display device.

  In a gaming machine that performs effects using such a screen, it is important that the screen is arranged at an appropriate position. In other words, if the screen is not placed at an appropriate position, there will be a gap between the image projected by the projection device such as a projector and the display surface of the screen. It becomes something.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to enhance the precision of an effect in a gaming machine that effects using a screen.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(42-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface (projection surface E11a) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) includes a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface and a second member (front screen support base E12) adhered to the first member. Is formed,
In the second member (front screen support base E12), a hole (through hole E130) penetrating from the side adhered to the first member to the other side is formed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a second member (front screen member E11) separate from the first member (front screen member E11) having a display surface (projection surface E11a). A front screen support E12) is provided, and the first member (front screen member E11) and the second member (front screen support E12) are adhered to each other. The second member (front screen support E12) has a hole (through hole E130) penetrating from the side where the first member (front screen member E11) is adhered to the other side. . Therefore, even after the first member (front screen member E11) and the second member (front screen support base E12) are adhered, a rod-shaped object or the like is inserted into the hole (through hole E130). By lifting the first member (front screen member E11), the first member (front screen member E11) can be easily removed. Therefore, the first member (front screen member E11) and the second member (front screen support base) are shifted in a state where the first member (front screen member E11) (display surface (projection surface E11a)) is displaced from an appropriate position. Even if E12) is adhered, the first member (front screen member E11) is once removed from the second member (front screen support base E12), and the first member (front screen member E12) is again removed. The position of the first member (front screen member E11) (display surface (projection surface E11a)) can be finely adjusted by adhering the second member (front screen support base E12) to the second member (E11). Thereby, it is possible to arrange the display surface (projection surface E11a) at an appropriate position, and it is possible to enhance the precision of the effect using the screen (front screen mechanism E1).

(42-2) The gaming machine according to (42-1),
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to operate between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposure position). Do
When the screen is at the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector is displayed on the screen, while when the screen is at the first position (front standby position), The screen is arranged such that the surface on the other side (the second pattern surface E12b) of the second member is visible through the display area,
A pattern having irregularities is formed on the other surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the second member,
The hole is formed in a concave portion of the irregularities constituting the pattern,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is connected to the second member (front screen mechanism E1). The other side (the side opposite to the side where the first member (the front screen member E11) is adhered) of the support base E12) (the back surface of the screen (the second pattern surface E12b)) is the display area (the upper side). It is arranged so as to be visible through the display window UD1). Here, as described above, the hole (the through-hole E130) formed in the second member (the front screen support E12) is provided on the other side from the side where the first member (the front screen member E11) is adhered. When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), the rear surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the display area (upper side). As it becomes visible through the display window UD1), the hole (through hole E130) formed in the second member (front screen support base E12) also comes into view of the player. If such a hole (through hole E130) is visually recognized by the player, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine may be impaired, and the interest in the game may be reduced. In this regard, in the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second member (front screen support E12) has the other side (the side adhered to the first member (front screen member E11)). A pattern is formed on the surface (the second pattern surface E12b) on the opposite side. Thereby, the holes (through holes E130) formed in the second member (the front screen support base E12) can be concealed in appearance by being confused with the pattern, and while maintaining the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine, It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. In particular, the pattern has irregularities, and the hole (through hole E130) is formed in a concave portion of the irregularities constituting the pattern. Thereby, the hole (through-hole E130) is located on the other side of the second member (front screen support base E12) (the side opposite to the side adhered to the first member (front screen member E11)). (A second pattern surface E12b), it is possible to create a situation in which the hole (through hole E130) is difficult to be visually recognized by a player.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals and described. In addition, the description of the second embodiment to the fourth embodiment that is applicable to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Irradiation light device B>
FIG. 230 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation light device.

  As shown in FIG. 230, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 diagonally below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

  Note that the configuration of the screen device C is the same as that described in the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

<Electrical and optical configuration of projector mechanism B2>
FIG. 231 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of the projector mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 231, the projector mechanism B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The sub-control device SS (see FIG. 148) is connected to the projector mechanism B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 in accordance with the production operation of the screen and the accessory, and projects the irradiation light on the screen and the accessory via the optical mechanism B24, thereby providing a visual effect. Display video. In the assembly process of the display unit A, etc., the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector mechanism B2. The adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used for adjusting the position of irradiation light projected by the projector mechanism B2 and performing initial setting of focus (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as an adjustment device of the projector mechanism B2. However, as the adjustment device of the projector mechanism B2, a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone on which an adjustment program (application software) is installed is used. Or a dedicated terminal device.

  The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 includes an LED light source that emits R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light, a DMD, and a lens unit B21 as components disposed around the lens unit B21 (see FIG. 232). And a focus mechanism (not shown) for adjusting the focus of the projection lens 210.

  The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on a command from the sub control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control device SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data relating to setting and adjustment of the projector mechanism B2.

  The DLP system of the projector mechanism B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver, and an LED light source and a DMD of the optical mechanism B24.

  Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in a predetermined direction by the DMD proceeds to the lens unit B21, enters the mirror mechanism B3 by passing through the projection lens 210, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. Is guided to the projection target. Thereby, the irradiation light is projected on the screen or the accessory as a projection target, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the projector mechanism B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector mechanism B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by turning the irradiation light back by the mirror mechanism B3, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. Thus, the display unit A including the projector mechanism B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in a limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

<Mechanical configuration of projector mechanism B2>
FIG. 232 is an exploded perspective view of the projector mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 232, the projector mechanism B2 includes a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as constituent elements serving as an exterior. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. The lower surface of the case B22 is disposed so as to cover the undercover B223. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via a stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate lower surface of the case B22.

  The projector mechanism B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 230) via an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. The procedure for mounting and adjusting the projector mechanism B2 will be described later.

  The projector mechanism B2 includes, as internal components, a lens unit B21, an LED board (not shown) on which an LED light source is mounted, a DMD board (not shown) on which a DMD is mounted, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is accommodated while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered by the lens unit cover B222, and the LED board, the DMD board, the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, and the intake fan are provided. 244A and 244B and an exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

  The projector mechanism B2 is controlled by the sub-control device SS such that image data relating to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub-control device SS and the image is projected on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control device SS controls the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the effect contents.

  Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 in accordance with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the projection planes E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection plane of the fixed screen mechanism D. The focus is adjusted so that the image is clearly projected.

  The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B partially contact the rear surface of the LED substrate. The heat sink 243D is partially in contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate. In the present embodiment, the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D have fin outer sizes such that the heat sinks 243R and 243G are relatively large, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D dissipate the heat generated in the LED substrate and the DMD substrate, respectively, into the air, so that the temperatures of the optical elements and the substrate are not increased until the optical characteristics are significantly changed. Dissipates heat well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipating members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat dissipating effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipating fins for increasing the contact area with air.

  The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the rear surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the rear surface of the left side of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the rear surface of the rear part of the case B22, and close to the heat sink 243G.

  An intake port B22A is provided at a front right portion of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244A is close, and an exhaust port B22E is provided at a right rear portion of the case B22 to which the heat sink 243R is close to face the intake port B22A. Have been. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and the other part of the left side of the case B22 is aligned with the intake port B22B. The air inlet B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 where the exhaust fan 245 approaches.

  That is, in case B22 of projector mechanism B2, a flow of air is exhausted from exhaust port B22E while forcibly sucking air from intake port B22A by intake fan 244A and then removing heat from heat sink 243R. . Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked by the suction fan 244B from the suction port B22B, the heat is forcibly drawn from the discharge port B22D by the discharge fan 245 while removing heat from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G. A flow of air to be exhausted is formed. Further, in the case B22, after the air is sucked in from the air inlet B22C, a flow of air is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust hole B22D while mainly removing heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. .

  The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered by the under cover B223. On the projector control board B23, a control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and the DMD board arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism.

<Position and orientation adjustment of projector mechanism B2>
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing the projector mechanism. FIG. 234 is a plan view showing a state where the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected. FIG. 235 is a diagram for describing a method of positioning the upper pedestal. FIG. 236 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 234 taken along arrow JJ. FIG. 237 is a diagram for describing a method of adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal. FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating a connection form between the projector mechanism and the adjustment PC.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 242), and has a rectangular main body 2200, and the left and right sides of the main body 2200 are directed downward and outward. And a left end 2201a and a right end 2201b extending to the left and right sides with a step from the main body 2200, and a rear end partially extending rearward from the rear side of the main body 2200. 2202.

  Each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the relay board B300 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 235) inserted and fastened thereto.

  FIG. 235 shows the manner in which the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the relay board B300. The upper diagram of FIG. 235 (a) is a diagram illustrating a state where the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the lower diagram of FIG. 235 (a) is a diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing in alignment with the BB 'line shown in the upper figure. Although FIG. 235 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (a), a mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from above, and the mounting screw T is disposed substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the lower surface side of the relay plate B300 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower surface of the relay plate B300. Thereby, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the relay board B300 by screwing. The right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the relay board B300 by similar screwing.

  Here, in FIG. 235 (a), a hatched portion indicated by reference numeral A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 235 (a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion indicated by the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end 2201a of the upper base B220 can be positioned and adjusted with respect to the relay plate B300. Similarly, the right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can be positioned and adjusted with respect to the relay board B300.

  FIG. 235 (b) shows a state where the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. 235 (a). The lower diagram of FIG. 235 (b) is a cross-sectional view along the line D-D ′ shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 235 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 235 (b), the screw axis of the mounting screw T is relatively deviated to the right within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range of the hatched portion C (adjustment range). Can be moved.

  In this manner, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the relay plate B300 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, the mounting position of the projector mechanism B2 with respect to the relay board B300 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As will be described later, the relay plate B300 is fixed to the projector cover B1, so that the direction of the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincides with the front-back direction as the reference direction. Adjusted easily.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221 are provided in the main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. These three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the main body 2200.

  The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member generally corresponding to the main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower pedestal B221 so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A. These three connection screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221.

  Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

  The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connection portions R1, R2, and R3 so that the distance between them can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 includes a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 of the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 237).

  FIG. 237 shows a connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 237 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connection hole 2200A, the connection screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connection portion R2. Although FIG. 237 shows one connecting portion R2, the other connecting portions R1 and R3 are the same.

  The connection screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connection hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via a washer 2212 disposed on the upper surface side of the main body 2200. You. A coil spring 2211 is externally fitted to the connection screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the periphery of the connection hole 2200A. Since the coil spring 2211 urges portions near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in directions away from each other (vertical direction), the screw between the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 is screwed. Prevention of looseness at the joint portion is achieved.

  In such a connection portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in a tightening direction or a loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is reduced. At this time, as described above, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 242), and as described later, the relay plate B300 is fixed to the projector cover B1. Therefore, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction approaching the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a higher position. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

  In the other connecting portions R1 and R3 as well, the height of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of tightening of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangular shape so that the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are not located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 or the lower pedestal B221. Are arranged as follows. That is, since the lower pedestal B221 can finely adjust the height position by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connection portions R1, R2, and R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be changed in the front-rear direction, It is possible to adjust the degree of tilt in the three-dimensional space in both the left-right direction and the up-down direction.

  By using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 as described above, the projector mechanism B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 so as to be capable of adjusting the position and adjusting the optical axis.

  Note that the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while irradiating a screen or the like with light from the projector mechanism B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At this time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. Thereby, the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is adjusted so that an image is projected on a surface such as a screen in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that a so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 238, adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector mechanism B2. The projector mechanism B2 attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 performs adjustment of the optical axis direction at the time of inspection at a factory and the like, and checks a display image on a screen and the like. Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying an image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector mechanism B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 231). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, optical parameters related to the projection position of irradiation light, focus adjustment, and the like in the projector mechanism B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and the optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector mechanism B2 as horizontal and vertical adjustment value data (see FIG. 231). The adjustment value data in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction stored in the EEPROM 231 are not supplied to the projector mechanism B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory or the like, and even if the gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, Can be used.

  As is clear from the above description, the projector mechanism B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-back direction according to the mounting position on the relay board B300, and according to the posture of the lower pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space. The optical axis direction is adjusted.

  In this embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three places. However, if at least three places satisfy the condition that they are not on the same straight line, four places are provided. The connecting portion may be provided as described above. In the present embodiment, the connection hole 2200A is provided in the upper pedestal B220 and the connection screw portion 2210 is provided in the lower pedestal B221. However, these connection holes and the connection screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, but may be any as long as it can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt fixed through the lower pedestal.

<Attaching the projector mechanism B2 to the projector cover B1>
When attaching the projector mechanism B2 to the projector cover B1, the projector mechanism B2 may be directly fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall B12 (FIG. 39) or the like. In the embodiment, a relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

  The upper pedestal B220 and the relay board B300 are fixed by the method described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the fixing of the relay plate B300 and the projector cover B1 will be described.

  FIG. 239 is a perspective view showing a state where an upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 240 is a plan view showing a state where the projector cover, the relay board, and the upper pedestal are connected. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover, the relay board, and the upper pedestal shown in FIG. 240 taken along arrow KK. FIG. 242 is a perspective view illustrating a state where the projector cover is removed from the state illustrated in FIG. 240. FIG. 243 is an exploded perspective view showing the relay plate and the buffer member.

  As shown in FIG. 239, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment is slightly different in appearance from the projector cover B1 according to the second embodiment (see FIG. 39). This is as described in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration inside the projector cover B1 that has not been described in the second embodiment will be described.

  In addition, similarly to the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the projector cover B1 is connected to the screen housing C10 by screwing screws into the right and left plates C2 and C3 via the screw holes B131c ( 166 and 167). The mirror mechanism B3 is housed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 38).

  The projector cover B1 has a relay plate attachment portion B301 inside thereof. The relay plate attachment portion B301 is formed so as to protrude inward from the inner surface of each of the left and right side wall portions B13. The relay plate mounting portion B301 has a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed substantially horizontally.

  A mounting hole B301b and a position adjusting hole B301c are formed as through holes in the relay plate mounting surface B301a. The mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjustment hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 233) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is mounted on the relay plate mounting portion B301.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the screw B310 is screwed into the mounting hole B301b of the relay plate mounting surface B301a via the washer B311 and the buffer member B312, so that the relay plate B300 is mounted on the projector cover B1. I have.

  In addition, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened using the cap bolt 320 and the fixing plate B321. In addition, FIG. 235 does not show the fixing plate B321, but when fastening the relay plate B300 to the upper pedestal B220, a conventionally known member can be appropriately selected and used.

  FIG. 243 shows only one of the two relay boards B300 provided on the left and right, and shows only one of the buffer members B312 provided at the four corners.

  As shown in FIG. 243, the relay plate B300 is formed in a rectangular plate, has three first through holes B300a, and has a second through hole having a larger diameter than the first through holes B300a. Two B300b are formed.

  The first through hole B300a is a hole through which the cap bolt 320 is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. The second through hole B300b is a hole for penetrating the buffer member B312.

  The buffer member B312 includes an upper portion B312a, an intermediate portion B312b, and a lower portion B312c. Each of the upper part B312a, the intermediate part B312b, and the lower part B312c has a donut shape obtained by cutting out a central part from a cylinder. The cut-out central portion communicates to form a through-hole B312d. The screw B310 (see FIGS. 240 to 242) is inserted into the through hole B312d. The upper part B312a and the lower part B312c have slightly rounded side surfaces.

  The upper portion B312a and the lower portion B312c have substantially the same diameter in top view, and the diameter of the middle portion B312b is smaller than the diameter of the upper portion B312a and the lower portion B312c. The diameter of the intermediate portion B312b is substantially the same as the diameter of the second through hole B300b of the relay plate B300, or slightly smaller than the diameter of the second through hole B300b. The vertical length of the intermediate portion B312b is substantially the same as the vertical thickness of the relay board B300. Thereby, the buffer member B312 can penetrate into the second through-hole B300b such that the side of the intermediate portion B312b is brought into contact with the side of the second through-hole B300b.

  And, as a result, the lower end of the upper portion B312a contacts the upper surface of the relay plate B300, the upper end of the lower portion B312c contacts the lower surface of the relay plate B300, and the lower end of the lower portion B312c contacts the relay plate mounting surface B301a. (See FIGS. 240 to 242).

  As shown in FIG. 242, the right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a front portion and a rear portion are cut out in a curved shape. Thereby, a space for disposing the buffer member B312 is secured. Although not shown, the left end 2201a has a similar shape.

  The cushioning member B312 is made of a gel-like material (silicone gel) mainly made of silicone having a shock absorbing property and a vibration damping property. As the silicone gel, for example, α gel (registered trademark) manufactured by Taika can be used. The material of the cushioning member B312 is not particularly limited, and in addition to silicone gel, a flexible organosilicon compound such as silicone grease, silicone rubber, silicone resin, or the like, or a flexible organic fluorine compound such as fluororesin. Can be appropriately adopted.

  Due to such a property of the buffer member B312, it is possible to reduce vibration transmitted to the projector cover B1 and the projector mechanism B2, and to reduce each member or device constituting the display unit A from an impact generated when the display unit A is transported. Can be protected.

  As above, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described as one embodiment of the present invention.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to represent images at the same level as that of the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged as compared with the liquid crystal display device or the like. In addition, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by the liquid crystal display device.

  In the case of gaming machines that perform effects using such projectors, if the projectors are damaged due to vibration or shock generated when transporting the projector or a gaming machine equipped with the projector, the projector will not function properly. Therefore, the intended effect cannot be realized.

  In particular, the present inventor has developed a display unit in which a projector and a screen are unitized as a gaming machine that performs effects using such a screen. Such a display unit is considered to be integrated by connecting the projector and the screen to each other, and it is considered that vibration or shock generated in any member of the display unit is easily transmitted to other members. Can be The present inventor pays attention to this point, and when a display unit or a gaming machine equipped with a display unit is carried, a force caused by vibration or impact is applied to each component of the display unit, so that the display unit is We thought that there was a possibility that some or all of them might be damaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a projector from being damaged.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(43-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (internal components (such as lens unit B21) of projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 accommodating them)
A projector cover (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
A buffer member (buffer member B312) is provided at a connection portion between the projector and the projector cover.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  A projector (an internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (such as the lens unit B21) and a case B22 for accommodating them) or a projector (an internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (such as the lens unit B21) and a case B22 for accommodating them) When transporting a loaded gaming machine, it is considered that a heavy member or device shakes, and a large load caused by the shake is applied to a portion connecting such members or devices. . According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the connection between the projector (the internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (such as the lens unit B21) and the case B22 that houses them) and the projector cover (the projector cover B1) is buffered. Since the member (buffer member B312) is provided, such a load can be reduced, and the connection portion can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, since the vibration can be absorbed by the cushioning member (buffer member B312) provided at the connection portion, the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2) and the case B22 that accommodates them. ) And the vibration transmitted to the projector cover (projector cover B1) can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the impact applied to the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 accommodating them) and the projector cover (projector cover B1), and the projector (projector mechanism B2) It is also possible to prevent the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) and the case B22 accommodating them and the projector cover (projector cover B1) from being damaged.

(43-2) Projector capable of projecting an image (internal components (such as lens unit B21) of projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and case B22 accommodating them);
A projector cover (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The projector cover and the projector are connected via a first member (relay plate B300) and a second member (upper pedestal B220),
The first member (relay plate B300) is connected to the projector via the second member by being attached to the second member (upper pedestal B220) on one side, The projector cover (projector cover B1) is attached to a side of the surface opposite to the one surface,
A buffer member (buffer member B312) is provided so as to sandwich the first member while abutting on both the one surface and the opposite surface of the first member (relay plate B300).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  A projector (an internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (such as the lens unit B21) and a case B22 for accommodating them) or a projector (an internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (such as the lens unit B21) and a case B22 for accommodating them) When transporting a loaded gaming machine, it is considered that a heavy member or device shakes, and a large load caused by the shake is applied to a portion connecting such members or devices. . According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them) and the projector cover (the projector cover B1) are connected. Since the buffer member (buffer member B312) is provided so as to be in contact with the first member (relay plate B300), such a load can be alleviated, and the first member (relay plate B300) can be used. Damage can be prevented. Further, since the vibration can be absorbed by the buffer member (buffer member B312) provided on the first member (relay plate B300), the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2) and the Vibrations transmitted to the case B22 that accommodates them and the projector cover (projector cover B1) can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the impact applied to the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 accommodating them) and the projector cover (projector cover B1), and the projector (projector mechanism B2) It is also possible to prevent the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) and the case B22 accommodating them and the projector cover (projector cover B1) from being damaged.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the buffer member (the buffer member B312) comes into contact with both surfaces of the first member (the relay plate B300), and the first member (the relay plate B300). ). This makes it possible to efficiently absorb the vibration generated in the first member (the relay plate B300), and to improve the performance of the projector (the internal components (the lens unit B21 and the like of the projector mechanism B2) and the case B22 that houses them) and the like. The vibration transmitted to the projector cover (projector cover B1) can be further reduced. As a result, the first member (the relay board B300), the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that houses them), the projector cover (the projector cover B1), and the like are damaged. This can be effectively prevented.

(43-3) The gaming machine according to (43-1) or (43-2),
A screen housing for housing the screen,
And a reflecting mirror for reflecting light emitted from the projector,
The screen can display an image projected by the projector based on light reflected by the reflection mirror,
The projector cover (projector cover B1) is provided with the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) and the screen casing (screen casing C10).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 accommodating them) is reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3). By being reflected, an image is displayed on a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). Here, since the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is provided on the projector cover (projector cover B1), the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them) The projector cover (projector cover B1), reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and screen casing (screen casing C10) are integrated. If the projector cover (projector cover B1) vibrates when transporting the unit or the gaming machine on which the unit is mounted, the position and posture of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) may change. As a result, the positional relationship between the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) and the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 accommodating them) is shifted, resulting in high quality. It is feared that it will not be possible to provide a proper video. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the vibration transmitted to the projector cover (projector cover B1) can be reduced by absorbing the vibration by the buffer member (the buffer member B312). It is possible to prevent the position and posture of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) provided on the cover (projector cover B1) from changing.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them), the projector cover (the projector cover B1), and the reflection mirror ( A unit in which the mirror mechanism B3), the screen (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1) and the screen casing (the screen casing C10) are integrated, or a gaming machine equipped with the unit. (Vibration) generated during transportation of the camera is absorbed by the buffer member (buffer member B312), so that the screen housing (screen housing C10) attached to the projector cover (projector cover B1) and the screen housing Screen housed in (screen housing C10) Fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, can relieve the vibration transmitted to reel screen mechanism F1). This can prevent the screen housing (screen housing C10) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) from being damaged.

(43-I) The gaming machine according to (43-2),
The second member (upper pedestal B220) is attached to the first member (relay plate B300) attached to the projector cover so that an in-plane position can be adjusted.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the second member (upper pedestal B220) is in-plane with respect to the first member (relay plate B300) attached to the projector cover (projector cover B1). It is mounted so that the position can be adjusted. Therefore, by interposing the first member (the relay plate B300) and the second member (the upper pedestal B220), the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector (projector mechanism B2) with respect to the projector cover (the projector cover B1) The relative position of the case B22) for housing them can be made appropriate. However, even if the projector (the internal components (the lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 accommodating them) is adjusted to be arranged at an appropriate position, the display unit (the display unit A) or the display There is a concern that a displacement may occur due to vibrations during the transportation of the gaming machine on which the unit (display unit A) is mounted. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the vibration can be absorbed by the buffer member (the buffer member B312) provided on the first member (the relay plate B300). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a large displacement.

(43-II) The gaming machine according to (43-2),
The first member (the relay plate B300) and the projector (the internal components (the lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and the case B22 that accommodates them) are the same as the second member (the upper pedestal). B220) and a third member (lower pedestal B221).
The third member (lower pedestal B221) is attached to the second member (upper pedestal B220) at three or more locations so as to be adjustable in distance while supporting the projector.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the third member (the lower pedestal B221) supports the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that houses them). At the same time, it is attached to the second member (upper pedestal B220) at three or more locations so as to adjust the distance. Therefore, by adjusting the interval between the second member (upper pedestal B220) and the third member (lower pedestal B221) at each location, the third member (lower pedestal) with respect to the second member (upper pedestal B220) is adjusted. The inclination of the side pedestal B221) can be changed. This makes it possible to adjust the attitude of the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them) supported by the third member (the lower pedestal B221). However, even if the attitude of the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that houses them) is adjusted in this way, the display unit (display unit A) or the display unit (display When the distance between the second member (upper pedestal B220) and the third member (lower pedestal B221) changes due to the vibration when the gaming machine carrying the unit A) is carried, the projector ( There is a concern that the attitude of the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them will be lost. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the vibration can be absorbed by the buffer member (buffer member B312) provided on the first member (relay plate B300). This prevents the distance between the second member (upper pedestal B220) and the third member (lower pedestal B221) from changing, and prevents the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the like) from changing. The posture of the case B22) for housing them can be maintained.

[Sixth embodiment]
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals and described. In addition, the description of the portions in the second to fifth embodiments that apply to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have a different configuration from the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the fifth embodiment.

  FIG. 244 is a perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 245 is a plan view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 246 is a diagram in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 247 is a diagram in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 248 is a perspective view of a case that houses internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing a state where the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

  As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member having a rectangular shape in plan view. As shown in FIG. 245, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by sides A, B, C, and D.

  Square holes 2201c are provided in the right and left portions of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 252) by screwing. As in the fifth embodiment, the vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T inserted and fastened thereto. The figure also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay board B300.

  The method of attaching the upper pedestal B220 to the relay board B300 using the square holes 2201c and the method of adjusting the position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the relay board B300 are the same as described with reference to FIG. Description is omitted.

  The upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. Similarly to the fifth embodiment, the three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

  The lower pedestal B221 has a rectangular main body B221a, a right side B221b and a left side B221c extending forward with a step with the main body B221a, and a rearward with a step with the main body B221a. It is a sheet metal member provided with a rear end portion B221d.

  As shown in FIG. 246, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 247, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and bending a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

  Connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220. Similarly to the fifth embodiment, the three connection screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d. I have.

  Similarly to the fifth embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connection portions corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A and the three connection screw portions 2210 so that the distance between them can be adjusted. Is done. Each of the three connection portions includes a connection hole 2200A, a connection screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 237).

  A method of connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and a method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 at each connection portion (a method of adjusting the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220) ) Is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 237, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 244, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment can be adopted. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, a case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. I have.

  As in the fifth embodiment, the case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 232), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, a suction fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector mechanism B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 232) is fixed to a lower surface of the case B22.

  A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 232) is attached to a front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 232) covered by the lens unit cover B222.

  Although not shown, the case B22 includes two intake fans 244A at positions closer to the left than the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left portion B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 249)). -244B is arranged so that it may line up front and back. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

  In addition, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 248), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 249). As a result, in case B22, a flow of air is exhausted from exhaust port B22E while being forcibly sucked from intake port B22A by intake fans 244A and 244B and then removing heat from the heat sink.

  As shown in FIG. 249, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing, and its upper end surface (upper wall B22F shown in FIG. 248) is the inner surface of the main body B221a of the lower pedestal B221. Is in contact with In a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

  In this regard, in the fifth embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is disposed above it. For this reason, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 (the gap indicated by the arrow S in FIG. 236).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the case B22 is arranged so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 passes through the opening upward, whereby the upper end of the case B22 is formed. The (upper wall B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to use the gap indicated by the arrow S in FIG. 236 as a space for disposing the case B22.

  In addition, as described above, by moving the position of the case B22 (projector mechanism B2) relative to the upper pedestal B220 upward as compared with the fifth embodiment, the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22. A part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 248) (see FIG. 249). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is placed in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 232) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. Thereby, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

  However, irradiation light is not blocked in this way. That is, in the present embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, when emitting the irradiation light, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the part below the horizontal plane passing through the central part in the vertical direction of the projection lens 210) is used. The light emission position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when emitting the irradiation light, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used, and the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. The upper pedestal B220 disposed in front of the projection lens 210 as described above exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

  Also, by bending the lower pedestal B221 downward to form a right side portion B221b, a left side portion B221c, and a rear end portion B221d, the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are respectively placed above. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. Thereby, while changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 from the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the three connecting portions can be the same as that of the fifth embodiment.

  Therefore, the adjustment of the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be performed by the same method as in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 238). Such an adjustment of the optical axis direction or the like requires a high-level computer program, but the development of the program requires a large cost. In the present embodiment, since the adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like can be performed using the same program as in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

  In this embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F. However, as in the fifth embodiment, the case B22 (see FIG. 232) whose upper side is open may be used. Good. The method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using a stay B223a (see FIG. 232) as in the fifth embodiment. It may be that.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward as compared with the fifth embodiment. , A new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the fifth embodiment, and the same configuration as the fifth embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

  However, in the present embodiment, the projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment is adopted in consideration of other effects. Hereinafter, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing a state where an upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 251 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall removed. FIG. 252 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view taken along line LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 251 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 253 is a diagram of the projector cover with the upper wall removed, as viewed obliquely from above. FIG. 254 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall removed. FIG. 255 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 250, the projector cover B1 has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside thereof. The relay plate attachment portion B301 is formed so as to protrude inward from the inner surface of each of the left and right side wall portions B13. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and includes a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed forward and rearward, a position adjustment surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and a front surface. And a connecting portion B301e for connecting the relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjusting surface B301d at the rear.

  A mounting hole B301b is formed in the relay plate mounting surface B301a. A position adjustment hole B301c is formed in the position adjustment surface B301d. As in the fifth embodiment, the mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay board B300 to the relay board mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjusting hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 244) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is mounted on the relay plate mounting portion B301.

  As shown in FIG. 252, the relay board B300 has a main body B300A, a front side B300B extending forward with a step with the main body B300A, and extending rearward with a step with the main body B300A. A rear side portion B300C is provided. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and backward. As described above, the shape of the relay board B300 is a shape corresponding to the step provided on the relay board mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

  A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. Similarly to the fifth embodiment, the first through hole B300a is a hole through which the cap bolt 320 (see FIG. 242) is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through-hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay board B300 is mounted on the relay board mounting portion B301 by screw fastening. However, unlike the fifth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the buffer member B312 ( 242) is not provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 250, an opening B400 whose upper side is open is provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The opening B400 has a shape in a top view that approximates a hexagon formed by sides E to J (see FIG. 251).

  As shown in FIG. 253, wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) are formed with the sides E to J as upper ends and continuous downward from each side. ing. The wall surface B401j (see FIG. 250) formed continuously from the side J has a shorter vertical length than the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. In addition, the wall surface B401e formed continuously from the side E is continuous to the rear inside the projector cover B1, and is a part of the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 255) of the projector cover B1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate attachment portion B301.

  FIG. 255 is a cross-sectional view taken along a horizontal plane passing through the connection portion B301e (a surface passing above the relay plate attachment surface B301a and passing below the position adjustment surface B301d).

  As shown in FIG. 255, an opening B400 opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and a cavity 402 formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301 communicate inside the projector cover B1. ing.

<Formation of air flow path by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In the present embodiment, a blind B500 is employed as a member provided below the projector cover B1 instead of the perforated plate B15 in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 256 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 257 is a plan view of the irradiation light device with the upper wall of the projector cover removed. 258 is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257, taken along the line NN. FIG. 259 is a right side view of a cross section taken along line NN of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257.

  As shown in FIG. 256, the blind B500 has a symmetrical structure, and includes a horizontal portion B501 formed substantially horizontally, and an inclined portion B502 formed so as to be continuous with the horizontal portion B501. And a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the inclined portion B502 so as to have the same width in the left-right direction as the inclined portion B502, and an outer wall of the blind B500 connected to the inclined portion B502 and the rear wall portion B503. And an inner wall portion B505 that is continuous with the inclined portion B502 and the rear wall portion B503 and faces the outer wall portion B504.

  The horizontal portion B501 has a first wall portion B501a slightly erected upward at a front end thereof, a second wall portion B501b continuous rearward from an inner portion of the first wall portion B501a, and a second wall portion B501b. A third wall portion B501c continuing obliquely rearward from the wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d continuing rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a fourth wall portion B501d continuing inward from the fourth wall portion B501d. And five wall portions B501e. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

  In a region surrounded by the first wall portion B501a, the second wall portion B501b, the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e, the blind B500 is attached to the projector cover B1 by screwing. Screw holes 506 are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 258, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1, and the second surface of the blind B500 The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is And the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1. The surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is continuous with a surface B402a (see FIG. 255) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 252) of the projector cover B1.

  The front surface of the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is continuous with a surface B402b (see FIG. 255) existing behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. Further, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 255) of the projector cover B1.

  As described above, the space P (see FIG. 258) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The upper part of the space P is covered with the projector cover B1, and the lower part is covered with the blind B500. The sides of the space P are the surfaces of the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the rear wall portion B503, and the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 continuous therewith. B401i, surfaces B402a and B402b existing in front and rear of the cavity B402, and an inner side surface 403.

  The upper part of the space P is connected to the outer space of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (see FIG. 251), and the inner space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 255) via the cavity B402. See).

  Here, although not shown, in the present embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 (see FIG. 40) formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is positioned at the right of the opening B400 of the projector cover B1. Positioned above.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, an intake port B22A (see FIG. 248) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 249) of the case B22 is similarly arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). As described above, two intake fans 244A and 244B are provided inside the case B22.

  Thereby, in the present embodiment, air flows from outside the gaming machine 1 into the cabinet G through the opening G41 (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41) formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G. Is adopted. This air moves downward inside the cabinet G, and is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the right one of the two openings B400).

  The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 moves backward in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P, see FIG. 258) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, and then moves to the projector. It turns inside the cover B1, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and enters the inside of the case B22 via the air inlet B22A.

  The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 moves to the left while depriving the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 via the exhaust port B22E.

  The air that has exited the case B22 passes through the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and then changes its course to the front, and moves to the space P (the left space of the two spaces P). Move P) forward. Then, the air goes out of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

  The air flowing out of the projector cover B1 moves upward in the cabinet G, and then passes through an opening G41 (a left opening G41 of the two openings G41) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. Thus, it is released to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  Of the air flows described above, the air flow path inside the projector cover B1 is indicated by a thick arrow in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, heat generated in the projector mechanism B2 can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  Further, the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 have a symmetrical structure (see FIGS. 250 and 256), and the opening B400 and the projector cover B1 of the projector cover B1 that form such an air flow path. The space P formed by the blind B500 is also symmetrical. Therefore, in designing the air flow path, if one of the left and right flow paths is designed, the design of the other flow path can be omitted. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to produce the display unit A that can appropriately discharge the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 to the outside while reducing the design cost in the development stage.

  Here, as described above, the opening G41 (see FIG. 40) formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G exists right above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening G41 of the cabinet G and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a part thereof overlaps.

  Therefore, when a foreign substance such as liquid enters the gaming machine 1 from the opening G41 of the cabinet G, the foreign substance enters the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid R is supplied from the opening G41 of the cabinet G will be described as an example.

  The liquid R supplied from the opening G41 of the cabinet G passes through the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and falls into the horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 258) of the blind B500. Then, the liquid R flows from the horizontal portion B501 to the inclined portion B502. Thus, the liquid R flows on the surfaces of the horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502.

  On the other hand, the space P shown in FIG. 258 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 255) of the projector cover B1 are connected via an opening B510 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 259, the opening B510 has a shape similar to a rectangle formed by sides K to N in a side view.

  Here, the side K constituting the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 256). Then, the upper edge B505a (the lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 is located above the horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502 (the passage of the liquid R) as shown in FIG. This makes it less likely that the liquid R will enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 via the opening B510.

  Furthermore, since the inclined portion B502 has an inclination that descends toward the rear, the liquid R flows backward through the inclined portion B502 and collides with the rear wall portion B503. Then, the liquid R is stored in a region surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the inner wall portion B505 (see FIG. 259).

  The rear part of the inclined part B502 has a longer vertical distance from the upper end edge B505a (the lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall part B505 than the front part, and the liquid R flows behind such an inclined part B502. Since the liquid R is stored in a portion (a region distant from the lower end of the opening 510), the liquid R may enter the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (the inside of the case B22) via the opening B510. It can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, since the capacity of the storable liquid R can be increased as compared with the case where such an inclination is not provided, the case where the amount of the liquid R supplied from the opening G41 of the cabinet G is not so large is provided. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the liquid R from entering the inside of the case B22.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is provided with a discharge mechanism including a tube communicating from the blind B500 to the outside of the gaming machine 1 so that foreign substances such as stored liquid can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Is desirable.

  In order to minimize the amount of foreign matter that enters the inside of the gaming machine 1 from the opening G41 of the cabinet G, the opening G41 of the cabinet G is preferably smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1. It is desirable that G41 be provided with some measure (mesh or the like) for preventing intrusion of foreign matter.

  As above, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described as one embodiment of the present invention.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to represent images at the same level as that of the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged as compared with the liquid crystal display device or the like. In addition, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by the liquid crystal display device.

  In a gaming machine that performs effects using such a projector and a screen, it is conceivable to install a variety of screens and other accessories in the space below the projector according to the type of the gaming machine.

  However, for example, when a large screen is to be installed, or when many accessories are to be installed, there has been a problem that a sufficient installation space cannot be secured.

  As a countermeasure for securing such an installation space, a design of a cover (projector cover) covering the projector may be changed. For example, it is conceivable to re-create the projector cover so that the position of the part forming the ceiling of the projector cover is higher, or to re-create the projector cover so that the mounting position of the projector to the projector cover is higher. If such a ceiling position or a mounting position becomes higher, it is possible to move the arrangement position of the projector upward accordingly, whereby a new space can be created in a lower area of the projector.

  However, when the design of the projector cover is changed, it is necessary to re-create the mold of the projector cover, and there has been a problem that enormous cost is required to create the mold.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a space existing below a projector while suppressing an increase in cost.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(44-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (internal components (such as a lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for housing them);
A projector cover (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The projector cover and the projector are connected via a first member (upper pedestal B220) having an opening,
The projector is arranged such that a part of the projector is inserted from below to above the opening of the first member, and the projector (internal components (such as a lens unit B21) of a projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232). And a part of the case B22) that accommodates them is located above the first member (upper pedestal B220).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the projector cover (projector cover B1) and the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them) are the first member. (Upper pedestal B220), and an opening is formed in the first member (upper pedestal B220). Then, due to the presence of the opening, a part (a part belonging to a predetermined range from the upper end) of the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 for accommodating them) is moved to the first member (the upper pedestal). B220). On the other hand, when no opening is formed in the first member (upper pedestal B220), the upper end of the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them) is inevitable. Then, it is arranged below the first member (upper pedestal B220). Therefore, by forming an opening in the first member (upper pedestal B220), compared to a case where the opening is not formed, the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2) and the housing thereof are housed. The case B22) can be moved upward as a whole. Thereby, a new space can be created in a region below the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them). In order to obtain such an effect, it is sufficient to change the design of the first member (upper pedestal B220), and it is not necessary to change the design of the projector cover (projector cover B1). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the cost required to increase the space existing below the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them).

(44-2) The gaming machine according to (44-1),
The first member (upper pedestal B220) is attached so that an in-plane position with respect to the projector cover can be adjusted.
The first member (upper pedestal B220) and the projector (internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for accommodating them) are second members (lower pedestal B221). Are connected via
The second member (lower pedestal B221) includes an upper part (main part B221a) and a lower part (right part B221b, left part B221c) formed by bending downward with respect to the upper part. Rear end portion B221d).
The second member is attached to the projector at the upper portion (main body portion B221a) and supports the projector, and the lower portion (right portion B221b, left portion) disposed below the first member. B221c and the rear end B221d) are attached to the first member (upper pedestal B220) at three or more locations so as to be adjustable in distance.
It is characterized by the following.

  Prior to the present invention, the present inventor attaches a second member (lower pedestal B221) to an upper portion of a projector (an internal component (such as a lens unit B21) of a projector mechanism B2 and a case B22 accommodating them) by attaching the projector to a projector. The first member (upper pedestal B220) disposed above the second member (lower pedestal B221) while supporting the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 accommodating them. ) Has been developed with a mounting structure that can be mounted at three or more locations with adjustable spacing. According to such a mounting structure, by adjusting the distance between the first member (upper pedestal B220) and the second member (lower pedestal B221) at each location, the second member with respect to the first member (upper pedestal B220) is adjusted. The inclination of the member (lower pedestal B221) can be changed, whereby the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 supported by the second member (lower pedestal B221) and the The posture of the case B22) to be accommodated can be adjusted.

  Here, as described above, based on the opening formed in the first member (upper pedestal B220), the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them) of the projector mechanism B2 are formed. A part is to be arranged above the first member (upper pedestal B220). Therefore, when the second member (the lower pedestal B221) is attached to the upper part of the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that accommodates them), as in the related art, A need has arisen to arrange the second member (lower pedestal B221) upward. However, when the second member (lower pedestal B221) is moved upward, the second member (lower pedestal B221) is disposed above the first member (upper pedestal B220), and the first member is moved. The upper-lower relationship between the (upper pedestal B220) and the second member (lower pedestal B221) will be reversed from the conventional one. To adjust the attitude of the projector as described above (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21 of the projector mechanism B2) and the case B22 that accommodates them), a sophisticated computer program is required, but the first member (the upper pedestal B220) is required. ) And the second member (lower pedestal B221) change, the conventional program cannot be used, and a large amount of cost is required to develop a new program. Faced the problem of having

  While earnestly studying such a problem, the present inventor changed the design of the second member (lower pedestal B221) and changed the upper part (main part B221a) and the lower part (right part B221b, left part). And a case for accommodating the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector (projector mechanism B2) in the upper portion (main body portion B221a) after having a bent structure including a portion B221c and a rear end portion B221d). B22), while disposing the lower portion (the right portion B221b, the left portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d) below the first member (the upper pedestal B220), the first member (the upper pedestal). B220) and the second member (lower pedestal B221) in the same manner as in the prior art without changing the relative positional relationship in the mounting portion. It led to idea that can be attached to adjustable distance from the 220). According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the projector (the internal components (such as the lens unit B21) of the projector mechanism B2) and the case B22 accommodating them by the same method as before without changing the design of the program. Since the posture adjustment of (1) can be performed, generation of new costs can be suppressed.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of performing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to represent images at the same level as that of the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged as compared with the liquid crystal display device or the like. In addition, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by the liquid crystal display device.

  However, the projection device easily generates heat and becomes high in temperature as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, and thus has a problem in that it does not function properly unless the generated heat is released.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently discharging heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting an image. And

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(45-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (an opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and a second opening (a left side of the two openings B400) opened upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while a first space is formed by communicating with the second opening. 2 spaces (the left space P of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (rightward) by a fourth opening (left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening). B510) is in communication with
The projector is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines a lower end of the first space (right side space P), and the lower end portion includes the first opening. And an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having a slope that descends as it goes away from a portion directly below.
At least a part of the inclined portion is located lower than a lower end of the third opening (an upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector mechanism B2) has the first opening (right opening) opened upward. B400) and a second opening (left opening B400). Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) opened in a direction (left-right direction) different from the upper direction are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (right space P) and a second opening. The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). A projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged between such a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510). Thereby, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (the right opening B400) flows into the first space (the right space P) and the third opening (the right opening B400). B510), passes through a projector (projector mechanism B2), and then passes through a fourth opening (left opening B510) and a second space (left space P) to pass through the second opening (left side). Is released to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector mechanism B2), it is heated by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2), and the high-temperature air has the property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) rises in the second space (the left space P), and rises in the second opening (the left space P) formed above the second space (the left space P). It will be smoothly discharged from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be increased.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (blind B500) has a lower end (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines a lower end of the first space (right space P). In addition, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having a slope that descends as it goes away from a portion immediately below the first opening (right opening B400). . Therefore, when a liquid (a drink or the like poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) from outside the gaming machine through the first opening (the right opening B400). The liquid flows through the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as it moves away from the portion immediately below the first opening (the right opening B400). Here, at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (the opening B510 on the right side), so that the liquid is inclined. When the liquid flows downward while descending the portion (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (the right opening B510), the third opening (the right side) is higher than the liquid. The upper end B505a of the inner wall B505) is located above, so that the liquid hardly passes through the third opening (the right opening B510), and the liquid does not pass through the projector. It is difficult for the projector mechanism B2 to enter the area where the projector mechanism B2 is disposed. In this way, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquid that have entered from outside the gaming machine.

(45-2) The gaming machine according to (45-1),
On the upper surface of the main body (the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (the right one of the two openings G41, G41) is provided above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) are provided on the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above the respective openings (left opening B400). Thereby, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (the right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After this air flows into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is passed through the second part of the cover member (projector cover B1). Through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), it can be discharged to the upper outside of the gaming machine. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the destination of the warmed air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is located outside and above the gaming machine. If the air is discharged from the back of the game machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island facilities installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. Also, if the air is discharged from the side of the gaming machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, resulting in a vicious circulation of warm air between the adjacent gaming machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector mechanism B2) cannot be increased. Furthermore, if air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air may be blown on the face of the player. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) without causing such a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the fifth opening (the right opening G41) and the sixth opening (the left opening) formed in the upper surface of the main body (the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Since the opening G41) exists above the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening (left opening B400) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), the fifth opening is formed. If a foreign object enters the inside of the gaming machine from the outside through the (right opening G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign object is removed from the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening. Of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (left opening B400). For this reason, there is a concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) reaches the projector (projector mechanism B2) and adversely affects the projector (projector mechanism B2). For example, when the player infuses a drink from the fifth opening (the right opening G41), the drink passes through the first space (the right space P) and the third opening (the right opening B510). If the projector (projector mechanism B2) then enters the inside of the projector (projector mechanism B2), the projector (projector mechanism B2) may be damaged. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (projector cover) is provided from outside the gaming machine through the fifth opening (the right opening G41) and the first opening (the right opening B400). Even when the liquid enters the interior of the blind B1 and the blind B500), such a situation occurs because the liquid flows along the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) as described above. Can be prevented.

(45-3) The gaming machine according to (45-1) or (45-2),
A space whose lower part is closed by the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and a wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion is formed.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502). Since the space closed below is formed, the liquid flowing down the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. Thereby, as long as the liquid level of the stored liquid exists below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right opening B510). The liquid can be prevented from invading the space where the projector (projector mechanism B2) is disposed via the.

(46-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image,
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body, and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (an opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and a second opening (a left side of the two openings B400) opened upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while a first space is formed by communicating with the second opening. 2 spaces (the left space P of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (rightward) by a fourth opening (left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening). B510) is in communication with
The projector is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector mechanism B2) has the first opening (right opening) opened upward. B400) and a second opening (left opening B400). Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) opened in a direction (left-right direction) different from the upper direction are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (right space P) and a second opening. The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). A projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged between such a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510). Thereby, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (the right opening B400) flows into the first space (the right space P) and the third opening (the right opening). B510), passes through a projector (projector mechanism B2), and then passes through a fourth opening (left opening B510) and a second space (left space P) to pass through the second opening (left side). Through the opening B400) to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1). When the air passes through the projector (projector mechanism B2), it is heated by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2), and the high-temperature air has the property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) rises in the second space (the left space P), and rises in the second opening (the left space P) formed above the second space (the left space P). It will be smoothly discharged from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be increased.

(46-2) The gaming machine according to (46-1),
The projector includes a first ventilation port (an intake port B22A) and a second ventilation port (an exhaust port B22E), and a fan (an intake port) disposed between the first ventilation port and the second ventilation port. Fans 244A and 244B).
The first vent (inlet B22A) and the third opening (right opening B510) face each other, while the second vent (exhaust B22E) and the fourth opening (left opening). B510) is disposed so as to face the projector.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the projector (projector mechanism B2) is provided with the first vent and the second vent, and the first vent and the second vent. And the projector is arranged so that the first vent is opposed to the third opening and the second vent is opposed to the fourth opening. Thus, the air flow as described above can be smoothly created.

(46-3) The gaming machine according to (46-1) or (46-2),
On the upper surface of the main body (the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (the right one of the two openings G41, G41) is provided above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) is formed,
The projector is housed in the main body so as to be disposed above the screen.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) are provided on the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above the respective openings (left opening B400). Thereby, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (the right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After this air flows into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is passed through the second part of the cover member (projector cover B1). Through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), it can be discharged to the upper outside of the gaming machine. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the destination of the warmed air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is located outside and above the gaming machine. If the air is discharged from the back of the game machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island facilities installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. Also, if the air is discharged from the side of the gaming machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, resulting in a vicious circulation of warm air between the adjacent gaming machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector mechanism B2) cannot be increased. Furthermore, if air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air may be blown on the face of the player. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) without causing such a problem.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (projector mechanism B2) is configured such that the main body is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). (Cabinet G), the arrangement position of the projector (projector mechanism B2) is close to the top surface of the main body (the top wall G4 of the cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (the right opening G41) and the sixth opening (the left opening G41) formed on the upper surface of the main body (the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G) and the projector (projector mechanism B2) is also large. Accordingly, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) and the projector (projector mechanism B2) is relatively small. I have. Therefore, in designing a flow path that discharges air taken in from the fifth opening (right opening G41) through the projector (projector mechanism B2) from the sixth opening (left opening G41), Therefore, there is no need to create a complicated detour path to avoid the members and devices existing in the apparatus, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

  The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine. However, the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like).

  As described above, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but they are merely specific examples, and do not particularly limit the present invention. It is possible. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

  In the above detailed description, characteristic portions have been mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the applicable range is various. Further, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used for accurately describing the present invention, and are not used for limiting the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, those skilled in the art will easily be able to infer other configurations, systems, methods, and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Therefore, the description of the claims should be regarded as including equivalent configurations without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and essence of the present application by the Patent Office and general public organizations, or by engineers in the technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. The purpose of this is to make it possible to make a quick decision with a simple survey. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, which should be evaluated by the appended claims. In addition, in order to fully understand the purpose of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the interpretation should be made with sufficient consideration given to already disclosed documents and the like.

  The above detailed description includes the processing executed by the computer. The above description and expressions are provided for the purpose of allowing a person skilled in the art to understand most efficiently. In this specification, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process without self-contradiction. In each process, transmission and reception, recording, and the like of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In the processing in each processing, such a signal is represented by a bit, a value, a symbol, a character, a term, a number, or the like, but it is noted that these are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. Further, the processing in each processing may be described in a common expression with human behavior, but the processing described in this specification is basically executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required for performing each process are obvious from the above description.

1 gaming machine 21 cabinet 2000 sub-control board case 2010 base member 2020 cover member 2030 base-side bonding portion 2050 cover-side bonding portion 2070 sub-control board A display unit B irradiation light device C screen device D fixed screen mechanism E1 front screen mechanism F1 reel Screen mechanism UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism

Claims (1)

A projector capable of projecting an image,
A screen having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector,
A body having an opening on the front,
An opening / closing door attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable, and provided with a display area where the screen can be viewed,
The screen is formed by a first member having the display surface, and a second member adhered to the first member,
The second member has a hole formed therethrough from the side adhered to the first member to the other side ,
The screen operates between a first position and a second position by being driven by a driving mechanism,
When the screen is at the second position, an image projected by the projector is displayed on the screen, while when the screen is at the first position, the screen is at the second member. The other side surface is disposed so as to be visible through the display area,
A pattern having irregularities is formed on the surface on the other side of the second member,
The hole is formed in a concave portion of the irregularities constituting the pattern ,
A gaming machine characterized by that: